3VT - SENTRON - LV36 - Complete - English - 2011 - noPW PDF

© Siemens AG 2011
3VT Molded Case

Circuit Breakers up to 1600 A
SENTRON Protection, Switching,
Measuring and Monitoring Devices
Catalog LV 36 • 2011
Answers for infrastructure.

© Siemens AG 2011
Related catalogs Contents
Low-Voltage Power Distribution and LV 10.1 ·

Air circuit breakers Molded case circuit breakers Miniature ·
Electrical Installation Technology ·
circuit breakers Residual current protective devices ·
Protection, Switching, Measuring and ·
Fuse systems Overvoltage protection devices Switch ·
· ·
disconnectors Switching devices Transformers, Bells and
Monitoring Devices
· ·
Socket Outlets Busbar Systems Measuring devices and
E86060-K8250-A101-A1-7600
· ·
E-counters Monitoring devices Software
Low-Voltage Power Distribution and LV 10.2 ·

Switchboards SIVACON 8PS busbar trunking systems ·
Electrical Installation Technology ·
SIVACON 8MC, 8MF Cubicle Systems SIVACON 8MR, 8ME
Switchboards and Distribution Systems ·
Cubicle Air-Conditioning Distribution Boards Terminal ·
blocks
E86060-K8260-A101-A1-7600
3WT Air Circuit Breakers LV 35 3WT Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A

up to 4000 A
E86060-K1835-A101-A3-7600
SIVACON S4 LV 56 ·
Power distribution boards Standard configurations Cubi- ·
Power Distribution Boards ·
cles, supporting structure and enclosures Busbar system ·
·
Assembly kits for switching devices Covers, modular doors,
· ·
mounting plates, 19" rack Internal separation Air-condition-
·
ing products Accessories
E86060-K1856-A101-A1-7600
SIVACON 8PS LV 70 ·
Busbar Trunking Systems, Overview CD-K System
Busbar Trunking Systems ·
(25 A ... 40 A) BD 01 System (40 A ... 160 A) ·
CD-K, BD01, BD2 bis 1250 A BD2 System (160 A ... 1250 A)
E86060-K1870-A101-A6-7600
Catalog CA 01 CA 01 All products of automation, drives and installation technology,

Products for Automation and Drives including those in the catalogs listed above.
DVD: E86060-D4001-A510-C9-7600
Industry Mall All products of automation, drives and installation technology,

Information and Ordering Platform including those in the catalogs listed above.
in the Internet:
www.siemens.com/industrymall
Catalog PDF All catalogs for low-voltage power distribution and electrical
Internet: installation technology can be downloaded as PDF files.
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/infomaterial
Trademarks Technical Support
All product designations may be registered trademarks or Expert advice on technical questions with a
product names of Siemens AG or other supplying companies. wide range of demand-optimized services for
Third parties using these trademarks or product names for all our products and systems.
their own purposes may infringe upon the rights of the trade-
mark owners.
Further information about low-voltage power distribution and
electrical installation is available on the Internet at: www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-support
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage
Siemens LV 36 · 2011
© Siemens AG 2011
3VT Molded Case 3VT1

1
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breakers up to 1600 A up to 160 A
SENTRON Protection, Switching,
Measuring and Monitoring Devices
Catalog LV 36 · 2011 3VT2
2
up to 250 A
The products and sys-

tems described in this
3VT3
catalog are manufac-
tured/distributed under Molded Case Circuit Breakers
3
application of a certified up to 630 A
quality management
system in accordance
with DIN EN ISO 9001.
The certificate is
recognized by all IQNet
countries.
3VT4
4
up to 1000 A
Supersedes:
Catalog LV 36 · 2008
For further information contact your local 3VT5

Siemens branch office. Molded Case Circuit Breakers
5
up to 1600 A
© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
6
Printed on paper
from sustainably
managed forests and
controlled sources.
PEFC/04-31-1404 www.pefc.org
© Siemens AG 2011
Innovation is the key to success Energy-efficiency and environmental Customer focus as USP
protection is our business principle
We continue to invest heavily in the re- And this business principle applies cross- This is not just a soundbite, we make ev-
search and development of new technolo- company and to each and every em- ery effort to ensure close customer rela-
gies. We have our own experimental and ployee: We are committed to environmen- tions. We have in-depth knowledge of
test laboratories where we carry out in- tal protection and the careful use of re- their business and involve them in the de-
tensive basic research on the climate in sources. Since 1994, we have been velopment of our innovations. Our skills
buildings and on fire, gas and explosion involved in more than 1300 energy effi- make us an expert provider of industry-
protection. This gives us the experience ciency projects, which have jointly con- specific solutions and services, a preferred
and the opportunity to create solutions tributed to the saving of around 1.5 billion partner during the life cycle of a building -
that continuously flow into our new prod- euro in energy costs and reduced the an- and allow us to enjoy mutual growth with
ucts and systems. At special test premises, nual CO2 burden on the environment by our customers.
such as airport buildings and hospital approx. 700 000 t. So, as you can see, in-
premises, we test the interoperability of telligent solutions in technical infrastruc-
the individual systems. This empirical data tures benefit not only the owners and op-
is incorporated into industry-specific solu- erators of buildings, but also those who
tions that continually set new standards have nothing to do with them.
and underscore our claim to technological
leadership.
2 Siemens LV 36 · 2011
© Siemens AG 2011
Answers for infrastructure
Siemens Industry meets the great challenges of our time
head on. With solutions for technical infrastructure in
industrial and non-residential buildings, residential
buildings and public facilities, Siemens ensures enhanced
comfort and energy efficiency in buildings, as well as the
protection and safety of persons, property and business
processes. As a longstanding and professional partner with
all-round expertise in the industry sector, we offer tailored
solutions that generate sustainable added value for our
customers.
Gain a competitive edge -

with integrated building solutions
Total Building Solutions means more in- • Low-voltage power distribution • Fire protection
novation from a single source for en- Switchboards, busbar trunking Fire alarms, alerting, evacuation, ex-
hanced functionality under one roof. systems, distribution boards, tinction and complete fire protection
When it comes to delivering turnkey build- circuit breakers, switch disconnectors, solutions
ings equipped with cutting edge power low-voltage circuit protection, building
distribution, building automation and management systems, switches and Take a closer look at all the options avail-
safety and fire-protection equipment from socket outlets able from Siemens. Check out the oppor-
a single source, Siemens is in a league of • Building automation tunities our products provide and discover
its own. And just to show that we are Heating, ventilation and air-condition- how we can help you to sustainably en-
more than just the sum of our parts, our ing controls, overall energy solutions hance your competitive edge.
portfolio includes: offering guaranteed savings
• Safety solutions
Access control, video monitoring, bur-
glar protection, alarm control centers,
operation of alarm control centers
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3
© Siemens AG 2011
The right product for every need
Our portfolio comprises switchboards,

busbar trunking systems, distribution
boards, measuring devices, circuit
breakers and switch disconnectors, circuit
protection devices, building management
systems, switches and socket outlets. The
consistency, modularity and intelligence
of our components and systems offer you
numerous advantages – throughout their
service life and wherever you are in the
world. We deliver trendsetting designs
and innovative functions in unique qual-
ity, developed in accordance with the
applicable international standards.
© Siemens AG 2011
Consistent, safe and intelligent

power distribution
Whether in industrial plants or in buildings: Every technical
system depends on a reliable supply of electric power. Even a
short power failure may have serious consequences. For this
reason, you need products and systems which cope with every
eventuality and always keep you on the safe side. Our portfolio is
the broadest world-wide, covering everything from switchboards
to socket outlets.
We will be glad to provide you with extensive support from the
initial information to the operation. Convince yourself of the
possibilities we offer you.
Making efficient use of energy Excellent support Top quality standards world-wide
The consistent concept behind the As a competent and reliable partner we Opting for us puts you on the safe side:
communication-capable components of offer you comprehensive support – from Whether it is our workmanship, the
our low-voltage power distribution range initial information, planning, configura- materials we use or the operability and
forms a sound basis for the measurement, tion and ordering through to commission- functionality of our products –
indication, evaluation and optimization of ing, operation and technical support. We we guarantee top standards of quality
power flows, thus enabling professional know the requirements to be met in your world-wide.
energy management for more cost-effec- area of work and day-to-day business. On
tiveness. At the same time our intelligent this basis we provide you with the type of
building management systems, e.g. for flexible and efficient help that allows you
lighting and heating, help to remarkably to concentrate fully on your customers
reduce power consumption. and their needs.
© Siemens AG 2011
New developments
RCD modules
A residual current module (RCD module) disconnects a circuit

whenever it detects that the electric current is not balanced
between the energized conductor and the return neutral con-
ductor.
Residual current devices and accessories → See page 1/9
Rotary operating mechanisms for operation through side

wall of cabinet
For lateral operation of 3VT2 molded case circuit breakers up

to 250 A. Available for right and left side mounting.
Rotary operating mechanisms for 3VT2 → See page 2/6
Rotary operating mechanisms for operation through side

wall of cabinet
For lateral operation of 3VT3 molded case circuit breakers up

to 630 A. Available for right and left side mounting.
Rotary operating mechanisms for 3VT3 → See page 3/6
© Siemens AG 2011
Our added extra
Build on a sound basis Low-voltage power distribution on the Web
With our basic and advanced courses, you can lay the founda- Visit us on the Internet. You will find comprehensive informa-
tions for your business success. Expert lecturers provide you tion on our products – SIVACON switchboards, busbar trun-
with the necessary theoretical and practical knowledge in our king systems, ALPHA distribution boards, SENTRON circuit
modern training center in Regensburg. Dynamic and easy-to- breakers and switch disconnectors, BETA low-voltage circuit
understand training with multimedia teaching equipment and protection, GAMMA building management systems and
many practical examples. Available in German and English. If DELTA switches and socket outlets – at:
required, we also provide training in-house or in one of our lo- www.siemens.com/lowvoltage
cal Siemens branches.
The range of courses extends through low-voltage power distri-

bution to electrical installation technology. You will get to know
our entire portfolio of products and their application. Step-by-
step we will familiarize you with the entire spectrum of modern
installation options, thus opening up a whole new world of
business opportunities.
For details of our current range of courses, please visit our

website at:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/training
BTLV Zusatzangebot En 11.11.2010
Comprehensive support
We can help you with all your requirements: contact us if you

have any queries regarding our products, the planning of your
electrical installation or how to obtain technical documentati-
on.
Just give us a call:

• Tel.: +49 (911) 895 7222
• Fax: +49 (911) 895 7223
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-support
Tender specification texts
For your support, we offer you a comprehensive range of spe-

cification texts:
www.siemens.com/specifications
© Siemens AG 2011
Selecting
Much more Find your products in the structure tree, in the new "Bread-crumb"
navigation or with the integral search machine with expert functions.
than a catalog. Electronic configurators are also integrated into the Mall. Enter the
various characteristic values and the appropriate product will be dis-
The Industry Mall. played with the relevant order numbers. You can save configurations,
load them and reset them to their initial status.
You have a catalog in your hands that will serve Ordering

you well for selecting and ordering your products. You can load the products that you have selected in this way into the
But have you heard of the electronic online cata- shopping basket at a click of the mouse. You can create your own tem-
log (the Industry Mall) and all its benefits? Take a plates and you will be informed about the availability of the products
look around it sometime: in your shopping cart. You can load the completed parts lists directly
into Excel or Word.
Delivery status
When you have sent the order, you will receive a short e-mail confir-
mation which you can print out or save. With a click on "Carrier", you
will be directly connected to the website of the carrier where you can
easily track the delivery status.
Added value due to additional information

So you have found your product and want more information about it?
In just a few clicks of the mouse, you will arrive at the image data base,
manuals and operating instructions. Create your own user documen-
tation with My Documentation Manager.
Also available are FAQs, software downloads, certificates and techni-
cal data sheets as well as our training programs. In the image database
you will find, depending on the product, 2D/3D graphics, dimension
drawings and exploded drawings, characteristic curves or circuit
diagrams which you can download.
Convinced? We look forward to your visit!
1
© Siemens AG 2011
3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

up to 160 A
Catalog 3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

up to 160 A
1/2 General data
1/3 Circuit breakers · Switch disconnectors
1/6 Accessories and Components
1/6 Auxiliary switches · auxiliary trip units
1/7 Manual/motorized operating mechanisms
1/9 Residual current devices
1/10 Connecting accessories
1/11 Mounting accessories
Technical Information 3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

up to 160 A
1/16 Trip units
1/20 Delay device for all 3VT circuit breakers
1/24 Auxiliary switches
1/26 Auxiliary trip units
1/27 Rotary operating mechanisms
1/30 Motorized operating mechanism
1/36 Insulating barriers and terminal covers
1/38 Project Planning Assistance
1/38 Dimensional drawings
© Siemens AG 2011
3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 160 A

Catalog
General data
1 ■ Overview
Versions and accessories
Connecting sets
3
4
2 5
6
7
Circuit breaker
9 10
11
8
12 13 14
NSO0_00258a
Rotary operating mechanism
15
17
18
19
20
16
23
27
22
26
21 24 25
1 3VT circuit breaker 10 Undervoltage trip unit 19 Lateral manual operating mechanism (right)
2 Circular conductor terminal 11 Adapter to install on 35 mm DIN rail 20 Lateral manual operating mechanism (left)
3 Front connection 12 Lockingtype lever 21 Non lockable knob
4 Rear connection 13 Signal switch 22 Coupling driver
5 Auxiliary conductor terminal 14 Auxiliary switch 23 Telescopic extension shaft
6 Front connecting bus with increased 15 Mechanical parallel switching 24 Lockable knob
pole spacing 16 Mechanical interlocking 25 Lockable knob
7 Insulating barriers 17 Front manual operating mechanism 26 Coupling driver
8 Lateral rotary operating mechanism 18 Front manual operating mechanism 27 Extension shaft
9 Shunt trip unit
1/2 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Catalog
Circuit breakers · Switch disconnectors
■ Overview 1
Circuit breaker Switch disconnector
Circuit breaker, 3-/4-pole versions Switch disconnector, 3-/4-pole versions
The 3- or 4-pole versions of the circuit breakers include: The 3- or 4-pole versions of the switch disconnectors include:
• 2 connecting sets for connecting Cu/Al cables1) with cross- • 2 connecting sets for connecting Cu/Al cables1) with cross-
sections of 2.5 ... 95 mm2 sections of 2.5 ... 95 mm2
(these terminals are connected to the circuit breaker) (these terminals are connected to the switch disconnector)
• insulating barriers • insulating barriers
• set of two mounting bolts (M3 x 30) • set of two mounting bolts (M3 x 30)
■ Selection and ordering data

Rated current In Current setting of the inverse-time DT Order No. PS* Weight
delayed overload trip unit „L“ Ir per PU
approx.
A A kg
Circuit breakers with tripping characteristic L 2)
TM3), LI function, 3-pole
• with permanently fixed thermal overload trip unit,
fixed short-circuit trip unit
40 160 B 3VT1 704-2DA36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
50 200 B 3VT1 705-2DA36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
63 252 B 3VT1 706-2DA36-0AA0 1 unit 1.062
80 320 B 3VT1 708-2DA36-0AA0 1 unit 1.062
100 400 B 3VT1 710-2DA36-0AA0 1 unit 1.047
125 500 B 3VT1 712-2DA36-0AA0 1 unit 1.047
160 640 B 3VT1 716-2DA36-0AA0 1 unit 1.074
TM, LI function, 3-pole + N, for unprotected N-conductor
• with permanently fixed thermal overload trip unit,
40 160 B 3VT1 704-2EA46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
50 200 B 3VT1 705-2EA46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
63 252 B 3VT1 706-2EA46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
80 320 B 3VT1 708-2EA46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
100 400 B 3VT1 710-2EA46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
125 500 B 3VT1 712-2EA46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
160 640 B 3VT1 716-2EA46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
TM, LI function, 4-pole, for protected N-conductor
• with permanently fixed overload trip unit,
40 160 B 3VT1 704-2EH46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
50 200 B 3VT1 705-2EH46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
63 252 B 3VT1 706-2EH46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
80 320 B 3VT1 708-2EH46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
100 400 B 3VT1 710-2EH46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
125 500 B 3VT1 712-2EH46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
160 640 B 3VT1 716-2EH46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
1)
For other connection methods, use connecting sets, see page 1/10
2) See pages 1/16 (3-pole) and 1/21 (4-pole)
3)
Thermal-magnetic trip unit
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/3
© Siemens AG 2011

Catalog
1 Rated current In Current setting of the inverse-time DT Order No. PS* Weight
delayed overload trip unit „L“ Ir per PU
approx.
A A kg
Circuit breakers with tripping characteristic D 1)
TM, LI function 3-pole
• with adjustable thermal overload trip unit,
adjustable short-circuit trip unit
16 160 ... 240 B 3VT1 701-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.048
20 200 ... 300 B 3VT1 702-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.048
25 250 ... 375 B 3VT1 792-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
32 160 ... 320 B 3VT1 703-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.047
40 200 ... 400 B 3VT1 704-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
50 250 ... 500 B 3VT1 705-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
63 315 ... 630 B 3VT1 706-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.062
80 400 ... 800 B 3VT1 708-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.062
100 500 ... 1000 B 3VT1 710-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.047
125 625 ... 1250 B 3VT1 712-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.047
160 800 ... 1600 B 3VT1 716-2DC36-0AA0 1 unit 1.074
TM, LI function 3-pole +N, for unprotected N-conductor
16 160 ... 240 B 3VT1 701-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
20 200 ... 300 B 3VT1 702-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
25 250 ... 375 B 3VT1 792-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
32 160 ... 320 B 3VT1 703-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
40 200 ... 400 B 3VT1 704-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
50 250 ... 500 B 3VT1 705-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
63 315 ... 630 B 3VT1 706-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
80 400 ... 800 B 3VT1 708-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
100 500 ... 1000 B 3VT1 710-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
125 625 ... 1250 B 3VT1 712-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
160 800 ... 1600 B 3VT1 716-2EC46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
TM, LIN function 4 pole, for protected N-conductor
16 160 ... 240 B 3VT1 701-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
20 200 ... 300 B 3VT1 702-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
25 250 ... 375 B 3VT1 792-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
32 160 ... 320 B 3VT1 703-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
40 200 ... 400 B 3VT1 704-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
50 250 ... 500 B 3VT1 705-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
63 315 ... 630 B 3VT1 706-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
80 400 ... 800 B 3VT1 708-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.380
100 500 ... 1000 B 3VT1 710-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
125 625 ... 1250 B 3VT1 712-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
160 800 ... 1600 B 3VT1 716-2EJ46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
1)
See pages 1/16 (3-pole) and 1/21 (4-pole)

1/4 Siemens LV 36 · 2011
© Siemens AG 2011

Catalog
Rated current In Current setting of the DT Order No. PS* Weight

1
short-circuit trip unit „I“ Ii per PU
approx.
A A kg
Circuit breakers, for short-circuit protection only (tripping characteristic N 1),)
TM, I function, 3-pole
• without overload trip unit, with adjustable short-circuit trip unit
32 160 ... 320 B 3VT1 703-2DB36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
40 200 ... 400 B 3VT1 704-2DB36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
50 250 ... 500 B 3VT1 705-2DB36-0AA0 1 unit 1.048
63 315 ... 630 B 3VT1 706-2DB36-0AA0 1 unit 1.048
80 400 ... 800 B 3VT1 708-2DB36-0AA0 1 unit 1.048
100 500 ... 1000 B 3VT1 710-2DB36-0AA0 1 unit 1.050
125 625 ... 1250 B 3VT1 712-2DB36-0AA0 1 unit 1.059
160 800 ... 1600 B 3VT1 716-2DB36-0AA0 1 unit 1.048
TM, I function, 3-pole +N, for unprotected conductors
• without overload trip unit, with adjustable short-circuit trip unit
32 160 ... 320 B 3VT1 703-2EB46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
40 200 ... 400 B 3VT1 704-2EB46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
50 250 ... 500 B 3VT1 705-2EB46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
63 315 ... 630 B 3VT1 706-2EB46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
80 400 ... 800 B 3VT1 708-2EB46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
100 500 ... 1000 B 3VT1 710-2EB46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
125 625 ... 1250 B 3VT1 712-2EB46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
160 800 ... 1600 B 3VT1 716-2EB46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
Circuit breakers with tripping characteristic M 2), for starter combinations
TM, LI function, 3-pole
• with adjustable thermal overload trip units,
fixed short-circuit trip units
16 12.5 ... 16 B 3VT1 701-2DM36-0AA0 1 unit 1.048
20 16 ... 20 B 3VT1 702-2DM36-0AA0 1 unit 1.048
25 20 ... 25 B 3VT1 792-2DM36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
32 25 ... 32 B 3VT1 703-2DM36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
40 32 ... 40 B 3VT1 704-2DM36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
50 40 ... 50 B 3VT1 705-2DM36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
63 50 ... 63 B 3VT1 706-2DM36-0AA0 1 unit 1.062
80 63 ... 80 B 3VT1 708-2DM36-0AA0 1 unit 1.059
100 80 ... 100 B 3VT1 710-2DM36-0AA0 1 unit 1.047
Switch disconnectors
Switch disconnector, without overload protection, without short
circuit protection
160 3-pole B 3VT1 716-2DE36-0AA0 1 unit 1.043
160 4-pole B 3VT1 716-2EE46-0AA0 1 unit 1.336
1)
See page 1/16 (3-pole)
2)
See pages 1/16 and 1/20

Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/5
© Siemens AG 2011

Catalog - Accessories and Components
Auxiliary switches · Auxiliary trip units
1 ■ Overview
Circuit breakers can be equipped with Shunt trip units can trip the circuit breaker from a remote loca-
• auxiliary switches, tion. A control supply voltage is required.
• alarm switches, An undervoltage trip unit trips the circuit breaker automatically
• shunt trip units, when the circuit voltage drops below 70 % Ue. The undervoltage
• undervoltage trip units. trip unit protects motors and other equipment in case of under-
voltage. A control supply voltage is required.

Rated control supply voltage Us DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU
approx.
AC 50/60 Hz or DC kg
Auxiliary switches and alarm switches
Auxiliary switches for signalling the state of the main contacts
• AC/DC 60 ... 250 V B 3VT9 100-2AB10 1 unit 0.010
• AC/DC 5 ... 60 V B 3VT9 100-2AB20 1 unit 0.010
Alarm switches for signalling the tripping of the circuit breaker

by an trip unit
• AC/DC 60 ... 250 V B 3VT9 100-2AH10 1 unit 0.010
• AC/DC 5 ... 60 V B 3VT9 100-2AH20 1 unit 0.010
Shunt trip units

Shunt trip units can trip the circuit breaker from a remote location.
• AC/DC 24, 48 V B 3VT9 100-1SC00 1 unit 0.050
• AC 110, 230 V/DC 110, 220 V B 3VT9 100-1SD00 1 unit 0.050
• AC 230, 400 V/DC 220 V B 3VT9 100-1SE00 1 unit 0.050
Undervoltage trip units

Undervoltage trip units trip the circuit breaker automatically when
the circuit voltage drops below 70 % Ue
• AC 24, 48 V B 3VT9 100-1UC00 1 unit 0.050
• AC 110, 230 V B 3VT9 100-1UD00 1 unit 0.050
• AC 230, 400 V B 3VT9 100-1UE00 1 unit 0.050
• DC 24, 48 V B 3VT9 100-1UU00 1 unit 0.050
• DC 110, 220 V B 3VT9 100-1UV00 1 unit 0.050

1/6 Siemens LV 36 · 2011
© Siemens AG 2011

Manual/motorized operating mechanisms
■ Overview 1
Rotary operating mechanisms • For operating through side panel of switchgear cabinet (lateral
operation):
The rotary operating mechanism must be combined from the fol- - 3VT9 100-3HE../HF.. knob
lowing parts: - 3VT9 100-3HG../HH.. coupling driver
• For rotary operation of the circuit breaker: - 3VT9 100-3HJ.. extension shaft
- 3VT9 100-3HE../HF.. knob
Mechanical interlocking and parallel switching
• For operation through the switchgear cabinet door:
- 3VT9 100-3HE../HF.. knob • The mechanical interlock must be combined from the fol-
- 3VT9 100-3HG../HH.. coupling driver lowing parts:
- 3VT9 100-3HJ.. extension shaft, - 2 x 3VT9 200-3HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanisms
(cannot be used with lateral operation)
- 2 x 3VT9 200-3HE/HF.. knobs (standard) or
1 x 3VT9 200-3HE/HF.. knob (parallel switching)

Version Color DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Rotary operating mechanisms
• not lockable gray B 3VT9 100-3HA10 1 unit 0.079
• lockable with padlock gray B 3VT9 100-3HA20 1 unit 0.079
• lockable with padlock yellow B 3VT9 100-3HB20 1 unit 0.079
• for lateral operation, gray B 3VT9 100-3HC10 1 unit 0.137

mounted on the left side,
not lockable
• for lateral operation, gray B 3VT9 100-3HD10 1 unit 0.137
mounted on the right side,
not lockable
Knob
• not lockable black B 3VT9 100-3HE10 1 unit 0.019
• lockable with padlock black B 3VT9 100-3HE20 1 unit 0.019
• lockable with padlock red B 3VT9 100-3HF20 1 unit 0.019
Coupling driver for door-coupling operating mechanism

Additionally requires
3VT9 100-3HE10 or 3VT9 100-3HE20
black knob
• degree of protection IP40 black B 3VT9 100-3HG10 1 unit 0.042
Additionally requires
3VT9 100-3HF20 red knob
• degree of protection IP40 yellow B 3VT9 100-3HH10 1 unit 0.042
Extension shaft
• length 350 mm, can be shortened B 3VT9 100-3HJ10 1 unit 0.113
• length 199 ... 352 mm, telescopic B 3VT9 100-3HJ20 1 unit 0.092

Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/7
© Siemens AG 2011

1 Version Color DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Mechanical interlocks
The mechanical interlocks additionally require the following parts:
• 2 x 3VT9 100-3HA../HB.. rotary operating mechanisms
• 1 or 2 x 3VT9 100-3HE/HF.. knobs
Mechanical interlock B 3VT9 100-8LA00 1 unit 0.089
Mechanical interlock for parallel switching B 3VT9 100-8LB00 1 unit 0.109

per PU
approx.
AC 50/60 Hz or DC kg
Motorized operating mechanism
Laterally mounted motorized operating mechanism
For a detailed description see page 1/30.
• AC/DC 24 V B 3VT9 100-3MA00 1 unit 0.900
• AC/DC 48 V B 3VT9 100-3MB00 1 unit 0.900
• AC/DC 110 V B 3VT9 100-3MD00 1 unit 0.900
• AC 230 V/DC 220 V B 3VT9 100-3ME00 1 unit 0.900

1/8 Siemens LV 36 · 2011
© Siemens AG 2011

N Residual current devices
1
Circuit breakers for system protection, only for TM1), starters,
disconnectors
Rated current IN Residual Delay time td, Rated opera- DT Order No. PS* Weight
currents I, adjustable tional voltage Ue per PU
adjustable approx.
A A s V kg
RCD modules
4-pole
160 0.030 instantaneous 80 ... 440 C 3VT9 116-5GA40 1 unit 1.300
0.100 0.1
0.300 0.2
0.500 0.3
1.000 0.5
3.000 1
4-pole
160 0.300 instantaneous 80 ... 440 C 3VT9 116-5GB40 1 unit 1.300
Accessories for RCD modules

Connection set, short
3-pole 3VT9 115-5GY31 1 unit
Connection set, long

1) Thermal-magnetic

Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/9
© Siemens AG 2011

Connecting accessories
1 ■ Selection and ordering data
Version Conductor Type of DT Order No. PS* Weight
cross-sections S connection per PU
approx
.
mm2 kg
Terminals for fixed-mounted circuit breakers
Connecting set for 3-pole version
Terminals for front connection -- Cu/Al busbars, B 3VT9 100-4TA30 1 unit 0.045
1 set = 3 units cable lugs
Terminals for circular conductors 2 x 25 ... 120 Cu/Al cable B 3VT9 100-4TF30 1 unit 0.180
Set includes a terminal cover, degree of
protection IP20
Terminals for rear connection Cu/Al busbars, B 3VT9 100-4RC30 1 unit 0.320
Auxiliary conductor terminals 1.5 ... 2.5; Cu flexible B 3VT9 100-4TN30 1 unit 0.010
4 ... 6 conductors
Front connection bars 1.5 ... 2.5; Cu/Al busbars, B 3VT9 100-4ED30 1 unit 0.103
4 ... 6 cable lugs
Terminals for 4-pole version

Terminal for front connection -- Cu/Al busbars, B 3VT9 100-4TA00 1 unit 0.015
1 set = 1 unit cable lugs
For 4th pole (to be used with
3VT9 100-4TA30 connecting set)
Terminals for circular conductors 2 x 25 ... 120 Cu/Al cable B 3VT9 100-4TF40 1 unit 0.250
Set includes a terminal cover, degree of
protection IP20
Terminal for rear connection Cu/Al-busbars, B 3VT9 100-4RC00 1 unit 0.080

For 4th pole (to be used with
3VT9 100-4RC30 connecting set)
Auxiliary conductor terminals 1,5 ... 2,5; Cu flexible B 3VT9 100-4TN00 1 unit 0.010
For 4th pole (to be used with 4 ... 6 conductor
3VT9 100-4TN30 connecting set)

1/10 Siemens LV 36 · 2011
© Siemens AG 2011

Mounting accessories
■ Selection and ordering data 1

Version Conductor Connection DT Order No. PS* Weight
cross-sections S per PU
approx.
mm2 kg
Accessories
3-pole version
Insulating barriers for circuit breakers B 3VT9 100-8CE30 1 unit 0.030
Included in the scope of supply of the circuit breaker or switch disconnector
In case of feed-in from below (power supply connected to terminals 2, 4 , 6), it
is necessary to install these barriers on the bottom side
For more information, see page 1/36.
Terminal protection cover, degree of protection IP20 B 3VT9 100-8CA30 1 unit 0.050
Increases degree of protection of the connection point to
degree of protection IP20, e.g. when used with cable lugs.
Locking devices for toggle levers B 3 VT9 100-3HL00 1 unit 0.005

• Enables locking of circuit breaker or switch disconnector in „switched off
manually“ position
• Locking is possible using a padlock with a shank diameter of up to 4 mm.
4-pole version
Insulating barrier for circuit breakers B 3VT9 100-8CE00 1 unit 0.020
• Included in the scope of supply of circuit breaker or switch disconnector
• In case of feed-in from below, (power supply connected to terminals 2, 4, 6,
N), it is necessary to install these barriers on the bottom side
For more information, see page 1/37.
Terminal cover, degree of protection IP20 B 3VT9 100-8CA40 1 unit 0.080

Increases the degree of protection of the connecting point to
degree of protection IP20, e.g. when used with cable lugs
Extension cable for motorized operating mechanism B 3VT9 100-3MF00 1 unit 0.100
Mounting adapter
3-pole version
For mounting on a 35 mm stan- B 3VT9 100-4-poleP30 1 unit 0.050
dard DIN mounting rail
For dimensions, see page 1/45.

Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/11
© Siemens AG 2011

Technical Information
1 ■ Design
Installation and connection Recommended cross-section of cables, busbars and flexibars
Main circuit Rated Conductor cross-section S Busbars W x H
• The main circuit is connected with Cu or AI busbars, cables, current In
and possibly cables with cable lugs. Cu AI Cu AI
• For further connecting options, connecting sets can be used A mm2 mm2 mm mm
(see page 1/10). 16 2,5 -- -- --
• Generally, conductors from the power supply are connected
to input terminals 1, 3, 5, (N) and conductors from the load to 20 2,5 -- -- --
terminals 2, 4, 6, (N). It is possible to reverse the current flow 25 4 -- -- --
inside the unit (i. e. infeed from below) without reducing the ra- 32 6 -- -- --
ted short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity Icu. 40 10 -- -- --
• In case of infeed from below, the units must additionally be fit- 50 10 16 -- --
ted with 3VT9 100-8CE30 insulating barriers on the side of ter-
63 16 25 -- --
minals 2, 4, 6 (see pages 1/36 and 1/37).
• We recommend painting the connection busbars. 80 25 35 -- --
• Input and output connectors/busbars must be mechanically 100 35 50 16 x 2; 12 x 3 16 x 4; 12 x 4
reinforced to avoid transferring electrodynamic forces to the 125 50 95 16 x 4; 12 x 4 16 x 5; 12 x 6
circuit breaker during short-circuiting. 160 70 120 16 x 5; 12 x 6 --
• The power circuit must be connected in such a way that the
deionizing space of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is
not obstructed (see pages 1/36 and 1/37). Auxiliary circuits
Switches, shunt trip units or undervoltage trip units are connec-
ted to the terminals of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector
using flexible Cu conductors with cross-section 0.5 ... 1 mm2.
Conductor cross-sections of main terminals

Order No. Maximum Maximum permissible conductor cross-sections S Max. width of Dimensional
permitted Cable type busbars and drawings
current Imax cable lugs
Sector-shaped Sector-shaped con- Round conductor, Round conductor,
conductor, stranded ductor, solid stranded solid
A mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm See page

3-pole
3VT9 100-4TF30 160 2 x 25 ... 120 2 x 25 ... 120 2 x 25 ... 120 2 x 25 ... 120 1/38
3VT9 100-4TA30 160 16
3VT9 100-4RC30 160 16 1/39
3VT9 100-4TN30 10/16 1,5 ... 2,5/4 ... 6 -- --
3VT9 100-4ED30 160 30 1/39
4-pole
3VT9 100-4TF40 160 2 x 25 ... 120 2 x 25 ... 120 2 x 25 ... 120 2 x 25 ... 120 1/43
3VT9 100-4TA00 160 16
3VT9 100-4RC00 160 16 1/43
3VT9 100-4TN00 10/16 1,5 ... 2,5/4 ... 6
1/12 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Technical specifications 1
Order No. 3VT1 7..-2..36-0AA0 3VT1 716-2DE36-0AA0 3VT1 7..-2..46-0AA0 3VT1 716-2EE46-
0AA0
Description Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors Circuit breakers 3) Switch
disconnectors
Number of poles 3 4
Standards EN 60 947-2, EN 60 947-3,IEC 947-3 EN 60 947-2, IEC 947-2 EN 60 947-3,IEC
IEC 947-2 947-3
Approval marks
Rated current In A 16 ... 1602) -- 16 ... 1602) --

Rated uninterrupted current Iu A 16 ... 1602) 160 16 ... 1602) 160
Rated operational current Ie A -- 160 -- 160
Rated operational voltage Ue V max. AC 690 max. AC 690
max. DC 250 max. DC 440
Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 8
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
Utilization category
• selectivity AC 690 V A -- A --
• switching mode AC-3 (16 ... 100 A) AC-23 A AC-3 (16 ... 100 A) DC-22 A
AC-2 (100 ... 160 A) AC-2 (100 ... 160 A) AC-23 A
Rated short-time withstand current Icw /t -- 2 kA/ 1 s -- 2 kA/1 s
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity 6 kA/AC 690 V -- 13 kA/DC 440V (τ = max. 5 ms)
(rms value)1) Icu/Ue 12 kA/AC 500 V 6 kA/AC 690 V
25 kA/AC 415 V 12 kA/AC 500 V
40 kA/AC 230 V 25 kA/AC 415 V
40 kA/AC 230 V
Off-time at Icu ms 7 -- 7 --
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity 3 kA/AC 690 V -- 13 kA/DC 440V (τ = max. 5 ms)
(rms value) Ics/Ue 6 kA/AC 500 V 3 kA/AC 690 V
13 kA/AC 415 V 6 kA/AC 500 V
20 kA/AC 230 V 13 kA/AC 415 V
20 kA/AC 230 V
Rated short-circuit making capacity 52 kA/AC 415 V 2.8 kA/AC 415 V 52 kA/AC 415 V 2.8 kA/AC 415 V
(peak value) Icm/Ue
Losses per pole at In = 160 A W see table page 1/14 15
Mechanical endurance cycles 20 000
Electrical endurance (Ue = AC 415 V ) cycles 6 000
Frequency of switching cycles/hr 120
Operating force N 55 65
Front-side device protection IP40
Terminal protection IP20
Operating conditions
Reference ambient temperature °C 40
Ambient temperature range °C -40 ... +55
Working environment dry and tropical climate
Degree of pollution 3
Max. elevation m 2000
Seismic resistance m/s2 3 g at 8 ... 50 Hz
Design modifications
Front/rear connection ✓/✓
Plug-in version --
Withdrawable version --
Accessories
Switches - auxiliary/relative/signal/leading ✓/–/✓/–
Shunt trip unit/with alarm switch ✓/✓
Undervoltage trip unit/with leading switch/with ✓/–/✓
alarm switch
Front hand drive/lateral drive right/left ✓/✓/✓
Mechanical interlocking to the manual drive --/-- --/--
by Bowden wire
Motor. oper. mechanism/with oper. counter +/+ +/+
Locking-type lever ✓
✓ available, 1) When reversing the circuit breaker connection (power supply connected to
-- unavailable, terminals 2, 4, 6, (N) output to terminals 1, 3, 5, (N)), Icu does not change.
2) Ranges of rated currents vary according to characteristics, see page 1/17.
+ in preparation
3) Permissible load of N pole is 100%.
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/13

© Siemens AG 2011

1 ■ Schematics
Circuit breakers with accessories
3-pole version
Switches or Auxiliary starters Main circuit Switches

auxiliary alarm or aux. auxiliary auxiliary
6.2
6.4
5.2
5.4
4.2
4.4
10.Y1
A1
10.Y1
B1
1 3 5
3VT9 100-1U.00
2.2
2.4
3.2
3.4
3VT9 100-1S.00
1.2
1.4
1.2
1.4
TEST
Q V
U
or
10.Y2
10.Y2
NSO0 00523
1.1
1.1
2.1
3.1
6.1
5.1
4.1
A2
B2
J 2 4 6
acc.comp. no. 10 acc.c. no. 6 acc.c. no. 5 acc.c. no. 4 acc.c. no. 1 acc.c. no. 2 acc.c. no. 3
Explanations TEST pushbutton

J 3VT1 circuit breaker Pressing the TEST pushbutton switches the circuit brea-
Q main contacts ker/switch disconnector off and actuates the auxiliary switches.
V trip-free mechanism
TEST TEST pushbutton
3VT9 100-1U.00 undervoltage trip unit
3VT9 100-1S.00 shunt trip unit
acc. c. accessory compartment
acc. comp. accessory compartment
Power losses (per pole)

Rated current In Power loss P per pole of circuit
breaker at maximum current
A W
16 4
20 4
25 4
32 4 Operator panel
40 4
Indication of circuit breaker tripping
50 5
63 6 When the circuit breaker was tripped by the overcurrent
trip unit, the following symbol is displayed: „ “
80 7
100 10
125 15
160 15
1/14 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

4-pole version 1
Switches
auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary
9.2
9.4
8.2
8.4
7.2
7.4
3VT9 100-2AB.0
3VT9 100-2AB.0
3VT9 100-2AB.0
9.1
8.1
7.1
J
acc.c. no. 9 acc.c. no. 8 acc.c. no. 7
Switches or Auxiliary starters Main circuit Switches

auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary alarm or aux. auxiliary auxiliary
6.2
6.4
5.2
5.4
4.2
4.4
2.2
2.4
3.2
3.4
10.Y1
A1
A1
10.Y1
1.2
1.4
1.2
1.4
N 1 3 5
3VT9 100-1U.00
3VT9 100-1S.00
TEST
TEST
pushbutton
Q V
U
T
10.Y2
10.Y2
NSO0_00001a
or
6.1
5.1
4.1
1.1
1.1
2.1
3.1
A2
B2
J N 2 4 6
acc.c. no. 6 acc.c. no. 5 acc.c. no. 4 acc.comp. no. 10 acc.c. no. 1 acc.c. 2 acc.c. 3
Explanations
J 3VT1 circuit breakers

Q main contacts
T thermomagnetic trip unit
3-pole +N (3 poles protected, N-pole unprotected)
4-pole (all four poles protected)
V trip-free mechanism
TEST test pushbutton
3VT9 100-1U.00 undervoltage trip unit
3VT9 100-1S.00 shunt trip unit
acc. c. accessory compartment
acc. comp. accessory compartment
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/15

© Siemens AG 2011

Technical Information - Accessories and Components
Trip units
1 ■ Overview
Trip units, 3-pole version Circuit breakers with characteristic
Trip units are integrated in the circuit breakers. „L“:
Tripping characteristics
L I
Circuit breakers are available with four types of tripping charac-
teristics. They are designated with the letters: t
„L“ - lines
For protection of lines with low starting currents
3VT1 circuit breakers with characteristic „L“ have a pre-set and
fixed rated current value. The circuit breakers feature In values
in a standardized current range from 40 A to 160 A (see „Ranges
of trip units and their possible settings“). Short-circuit trip units
are fixed at 4 x In.
„D“ - distribution
NSO0_00502
For protection of lines and transformers
3VT1 circuit breakers with characteristic „D“ have the option of
setting to a reduced current in a range of approximately 0.75 ... I
1 In. The circuit breakers feature In values in a standardized cur- „M“:
rent range from 16 A to 160 A (see „Ranges of trip units and their
possible settings“). The short-circuit trip unit is adjustable.
L I
Setting values are shown in the table on page 1/17.
Ir
„M“ - motor t
For motor protection
3VT1 circuit breakers with characteristic „M“ have the option of
setting a reduced current in a range of approximately
0.75 ... 1 In. The circuit breakers feature In values in a standar-
dized series of currents from 16 A to 100 A (see „Ranges of trip
units and their possible setting“). The short-circuit trip unit is
fixed at the value of 10 x In.
See page 1/20.
NSO0_00048
„N“ - short-circuit trip unit only

3VT1 circuit breakers with characteristic „N“ have a short circuit
trip unit only. They feature In values in a standardized series of I
currents ranging from 32 A to 160 A. The short-circuit trip unit is „D“:
adjustable.
The values are shown in the table on page 1/17. L I
Order numbers Ir
t
The order number of a circuit breaker depends on the rated cur-
rent and on the tripping characteristics.
For example: Motor protection with In = 32 A.
The order number is: 3VT1 703-3DM36-0AA0.
Setting of tripping characteristics
• Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L (for circuit breakers Ii
with characteristics “D” and “M”). The time-dependent trip unit
for overload protection Ir (instantaneous) is adjusted in a con-
NSO0_00500
tinuous range using the Ir adjustment dial on the overload trip

unit. The Ir adjustment range is 0.75 ... 1 In.
I
• Time-independent trip unit (short-circuit trip unit) I
(for circuit breakers with characteristics “D” and “N”). With an „N“:
time-independent instantaneous trip unit (value of the short
circuit current Ii), adjustment is possible within a continuous L I
range.
All values are shown in the table on page 1/17.
t
Ii
NSO0_00216
1/16 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Setting IR and Ii for circuit breakers with characteristic „D“ Derating in accordance with ambient temperature 1
Adjusting IR Adjusting Ii Rated Permissible load at
current In
A + 55 °C + 40 °C +20 °C -15 °C
16 15 16 17 19
20 19 20 22 25
25 23 25 28 31
32 29 32 36 41
40 38 40 45 53
50 48 50 56 66
63 57 63 69 83
80 73 80 88 100
100 91 100 105 122
125 110 125 132 145
160 145 160 168 175
Current ranges of trip units and their possible settings at 40 °C

Rated 3VT1 7..-2DA36-0AA0 3VT1 7..-2DC36-0AA0 3VT1 7..-2DM36-0AA0 3VT1 7..-2DB36-0AA0
current In Overload Short circuit Overload Short circuit Overload Short circuit Overload Short circuit
protection Ir protection Ii (ins- protection Ir protection Ii (ins- protection Ir protection Ii (ins- protection Ir protection Ii (ins-
tantaneous) tantaneous) tantaneous) tantaneous)
A A A A A A A A A
16 -- -- 12,5 ... 16 160 ... 240 12,5 ... 16 160 -- --
20 -- -- 16 ... 20 200 ... 300 16 ... 20 200 -- --
25 -- -- 20 ... 25 250 ... 375 20 ... 25 250 -- --
32 -- -- 25 ... 32 160 ... 320 25 ... 32 320 -- 160 ... 320
40 40 160 32 ... 40 200 ... 400 32 ... 40 400 -- 200 ... 400
50 50 200 40 ... 50 250 ... 500 40 ... 50 500 -- 250 ... 500
63 63 252 50 ... 63 315 ... 630 50 ... 63 630 -- 315 ... 630
80 80 320 63 ... 80 400 ... 800 63 ... 80 800 -- 400 ... 800
100 100 400 80 ... 100 500 ... 1000 80 ... 100 1000 -- 500 ... 1000
125 125 500 100 ... 125 625 ... 1250 -- -- -- 625 ... 1250
160 160 640 125 ... 160 800 ... 1600 -- -- -- 800 ... 1600
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/17

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
1 Characteristic „L“, In = 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 A Characteristic „D“, In = 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 A
1.05 1.30 NSO0_00049
1.05 1.30 NSO0_00051
10000 10000
5000 5000
t [s] t [s]
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
L L
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 In = 40 … 160 A 5 In = 32 … 160 A
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
I I
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
Characteristic „D“, In = 16, 20, 25 A Characteristic „M“, In = 16, 20, 25 A

1.05 1.30 NSO0_00050 1.00 1.20 NSO0_00052
10000 10000
5000 5000
t [s] t [s]
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
L L
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 In = 16 … 25 A 5 In = 16 … 25 A
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
I I
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
1/18 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Characteristic „M“, In = 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100 A 1
1.00 1.20 NSO0_00053
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
500
200
L
100
50
20
10
5 In = 32 … 100 A
2
1
0.5
0.2
I
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In
Characteristic „N“, In = 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 A
NSO0_00054
10000
5000
t [s]
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5 In = 32 … 160 A
2
1
0.5
0.2
I
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/19

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
1 Trip units, with tripping characteristics: class M
Rated current Order No. Class
The tripping time of the 3-pole trip unit of 3VT1 circuit breakers In
with characteristic M at 7.2 In corresponds to the tripping clas- 16 A 3VT1 701-2DM36-0AA0 10A
ses 10A, 10 and 20 according to EN 60947-4-1. 20 A 3VT1 702-2DM36-0AA0 10A
25 A 3VT1 792-2DM36-0AA0 10A
32 A 3VT1 703-2DM36-0AA0 10
40 A 3VT1 704-2DM36-0AA0 10
50 A 3VT1 705-2DM36-0AA0 20
63 A 3VT1 706-2DM36-0AA0 20
80 A 3VT1 708-2DM36-0AA0 20
100 A 3VT1 710-2DM36-0AA0 20
Plate of the trip units with characteristic M
Rated short-circuit ultimate and service breaking capacity of 3-pole 3VT1 circuit breakers in DC circuits
Specifications
Order No. 3VT1 7..-2DM36-0AA0
Rated operational voltage Ue DC 250 V
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking 25 kA/DC 250 V; τ = max. 5 ms
capacity1) (rms value) Icu/Ue
Rated service short-circuit breaking 13 kA/DC 250 V; τ = max. 5 ms
capacity (rms value) Ics/Ue
Utilization category (switching mode) DC-22A
1) in reverse connection of the circuit breaker (input terminals 2, 4, 6 and out-
put terminals 1, 3, 5), Icu does not change.
Circuit breaker connection for circuits DC 250 V:
1/20 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Trip units, 4-pole version Circuit breakers with characteristic 1
Trip units are integrated into the 3VT1 circuit breakers. „L“
It is not possible to deinstall or exchange the trip units. L I
4-pole circuit breakers are manufactured in the following
versions:
t
• 3-pole +N (three poles protected, N-pole unprotected)
• 4-pole (all four poles protected)
The permissible load of the N-pole is 100% In.
The circuit breakers are delivered with three types of tripping
characteristics, designated by the following letters:
„L“ - lines
For protection of lines with low starting currents
NSO0_00502
3VT1 circuit breakers with characteristic „L“ have a fixed value
of rated current I (without In control). The circuit breakers feature
In values of standard current range 40 ... 160 A, see „Ranges of
trip units and their possible setting“. The short-circuit trip unit I
has a fixed setting to 4 x In.
„D“
„D“ - distribution L I
For protection of lines and transformers
3VT1 circuit breakers with characteristic „D“ can be set to a re- Ir
t
duced current in the range of approx. 0.75 ... 1 In.
The circuit breakers feature In values within a standard current
range of 16 ... 160 A.
Setting values are shown in the table on page 1/22.
„N“ - short-circuit
For protection against short circuits only
3VT1 circuit breakers with characteristic „N“ have a short circuit
trip unit only. They feature circuit breaker values within a stan- Ii
dard current range of 32 ... 160 A. The short circuit trip unit is ad-
NSO0_00500
justable.
The values are shown in the table on page 1/22.
Order numbers I
The order number of a circuit breaker depends on the rated cur- „N“
rent and on the tripping characteristics.
L I
For example: Protection of a circuit with In = 40 A.
The order number is 3VT1 704-2EC46-0AA0.
t
Setting of tripping characteristics
• Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L (for circuit breakers
with
characteristics “D” and “M”). The time-dependent trip unit for
overload protection Ir (instantaneous), is adjusted in a conti-
nuous range using the Ir adjustment dial on the overload trip
unit. The Ir adjustment range is 0.75 ... 1 In.
• Time-independent instantaneous trip unit (short-circuit Ii
trip unit) I
(for circuit breakers with characteristics “D” and “N”). With a
NSO0_00216
time-independent instantaneous trip unit (value of the short

circuit current Ii), adjustment is possible within a continuous
range. I
All values are shown in the table on page 1/22.
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/21

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
1 Setting IR and Ii for circuit breakers with characteristic „D“ Derating in accordance with ambient temperature
Setting IR Setting Ii Rated Permissible load at
current In
A + 55 °C + 40 °C +20 °C -15 °C
16 15 16 17 19
20 19 20 22 25
25 23 25 28 31
32 29 32 36 41
40 38 40 45 53
50 48 50 56 66
63 57 63 69 83
80 73 80 88 100
100 91 100 105 122
125 110 125 132 145
160 145 160 168 175
Current ranges of trip units and their possible settings at 40 °C

Rated current 3VT1 7..-2EA46-0AA0 3VT1 7..-2EC46-0AA0 3VT1 7..-2EB46-0AA0
In Overload protection Ir Short circuit protection Overload protection Ir Short circuit protection Overload protection Ir Short circuit protection
Ii (instantaneous) Ii (instantaneous) Ii (instantaneous)
A A A A A A A
16 - -- 12,5 ... 16 160 ... 240 - -
20 - -- 16 ... 20 200 ... 300 - -
25 - -- 20 ... 25 250 ... 375 - -
32 - -- 25 ... 32 160 ... 320 - 160 ... 320
40 40 160 32 ... 40 200 ... 400 - 200 ... 400
50 50 200 40 ... 50 250 ... 500 - 250 ... 500
63 63 252 50 ... 63 315 ... 630 - 315 ... 630
80 80 320 63 ... 80 400 ... 800 - 400 ... 800
100 100 400 80 ... 100 500 ... 1000 - 500 ... 1000
125 125 500 100 ... 125 625 ... 1250 - 625 ... 1250
160 160 640 125 ... 160 800 ... 1600 - 800 ... 1600
1/22 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Characteristic „L“, In = 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 A Characteristic „D“, In = 16, 20, 25 A 1
1.05 1.30 NSO0_00049 1.05 1.30 NSO0_00050
10000 10000
5000 5000
t [s] t [s]
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
L L
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 In = 40 … 160 A 5 In = 16 … 25 A
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
I I
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
Characteristic „N“, In = 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 A Characteristic „D“, In = 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160 A
NSO0_00054
10000 1.05 1.30 NSO0_00051
10000
5000 5000
t [s] t [s]
2000 2000
1000
1000
500
500
200
200
100 L
100
50 50
20
20
10
10
5 In = 32 … 160 A
5 In = 32 … 160 A
2
2
1
1
0.5
0.5
0.2 0.2
I
0.1 I
0.1
0.05
0.05
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In
x In
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/23

© Siemens AG 2011

Auxiliary switches
1 ■ Overview
Auxiliary switches Location of switches in accessory compartments
Location of accessory compartments in a 3-pole 3VT1

Auxiliary and alarm switches circuit breaker/switch disconnector.
Function, name and location of switches
Order No. Type Switch location Switch function

3VT9 100-2AB10 Auxiliary Accessory Signals the condition
3VT9 100-2AB20 switch compartment of the main contact
11), 2, 3, 4, 5, 62) of the circuit brea-
ker/ switch discon-
nector
3VT9 100-2AH10 Alarm Accessory Signals whether the
3VT9 100-2AH20 switch compartment 11) circuit breaker was
tripped by the trip
unit
1) In accessory compartment 1, a 3VT9 100-2AB10 auxiliary switch and
3VT9 100-2AH10 alarm switch cannot be used simultaneously.
2) When one of accessory compartments 4, 5 or 6 is already in use for auxili-
ary switches, a shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit cannot be installed
additionally.
Location of accessory compartments in a 4-pole 3VT1

circuit breaker/switch disconnector.
When using one of the accessory compartments 4, 5 or 6,
neither a shunt trip unit nor an undervoltage trip unit can be ins-
talled.
1/24 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Auxiliary switches
■ Function 1
Switching states (3-pole) Switching states (4-pole)
Accessory compartment 1 ... 9 1 10 Accessory compartment 1 ... 6 1 10
Switching states of Switching states of
the circuit breaker the circuit-breaker
3VT9 100-1UC/UD/UE..
3VT9 100-1SC/SD/SE..
3VT9 100-2AH10
3VT9 100-2AH10
3VT9 100-2AB10
3VT9 100-2AB10
Position of the main contacts
Position of the main contacts
3VT9 100-1S...
SP-BC-X...
Lever position
Lever position
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1
Switched off manually 0 0 1 0 1 1 Switched off manually 0 0 1 0 1 1
Switched off by the trip 0 0 1 1 0 1 Switched off by the trip 0 0 1 1 0 1

unit or INSPECTION button unit or INSPECTION button
Switched off by auxiliary trip unit 0 0 1 0 1 0 Switched off by auxiliary trip unit 0 0 1 0 1 0
Switched off by TEST button 0 0 1 0 1 1 Switched off by TEST button 0 0 1 0 1 1
0 = contact open, 1 = contact closed 0 = contact open, 1 = contact closed
■ Technical specifications
Order No. 3VT9 100-2AB10, 3VT9 100-2AB20,
3VT9 100-2AH10 3VT9 100-2AH20
Rated operational voltage Ue V AC 60 ... 250 V AC 5 ... 60 V
DC 60 ... 250 V DC 5 ... 60 V
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 250 V
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 4 kV
Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60 Hz
Rated operational current Ie/Ue
AC-12 6 A/250 V 0.0004 ... 0.1 A/5 ... 60 V
AC-15 5 A/60 V, 3 A/110 V, 1.5 A/230 V 0.0004 ... 0.1 A/5 ... 60 V
DC-12 0.25 A/250 V 0.1 A/5 ... 60 V
DC-13 0.5 A/60 V, 0.2 A/110 V, 0.1 A/250 V 0.0004 ... 0.1 A/5 ... 60 V
Thermal current Ith A 6A 0.5 A
Contacts arrangement 001
Connector cross-section S mm2 0.5 ... 1
(connected switch)
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/25

© Siemens AG 2011

Auxiliary trip units
1 ■ Design
Auxiliary trip units The order number of the auxiliary trip unit depends on the rated
operational voltage
Ue Order No.
AC/DC 24/48 V 3VT9 100-1SC00
AC 110/230 V, DC 110/220 V 3VT9 100-1SD00
AC 230/400 V, DC 220 V 3VT9 100-1SE00
Ue Order No.
AC/DC 24/48 V 3VT9 100-1UC00
AC 110/230 V, DC 110/220 V 3VT9 100-1UD00
AC 230/400 V, DC 220 V 3VT9 100-1UE00
The specific rated operational voltage of the shunt trip unit is set
by jumpers located on the trip unit. The standard setting by the
manufacturer is always to the value corresponding to the order
Shunt trip unit Undervoltage trip unit
number.
Location of auxiliary trip unit Schematics

L+ L+
A1
10.Y1
B1
10.Y1
3VT9 100-1U.0
3VT9 100-1S.0
U U<
10.Y2
10.Y2
NSO0_00056
NSO0_00055
A2
B2
N- N-
One auxiliary trip unit can be installed in accessory compartment 10 Shunt trip unit Undervoltage trip unit
Order No. 3VT9 100-1S.00 Order No. 3VT9 100-1U.00
Rated operational voltage Ue AC 24/48/110/230/400 V Rated operational voltage Ue AC 24/48/110/230/400 V
DC 24/48/110/220 V DC 24/48/110/220 V
Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz
Input power at 1.1 Ue Input power at 1.1 Ue
• AC 2 VA • AC 2 VA
• DC 2W • DC 2W
Characteristics U ≥ 0.7 Ue: circuit breaker must Characteristics U ≤ 0.35 Ue: circuit breaker can be
trip switched on
U ≥ 0.85 Ue: circuit breaker must
trip
Time before switching off 15 ms Time before switching off 15 ms
Continuous load yes Continuous load yes
Connection cross-section S 0,5 ... 1 mm2 Connector cross-section S 0.5 ... 1 mm2
Terminal protection IP20 Terminal protection IP20
(connected trip unit) (connected trip unit)
Location in accessory compartment no. 10 Location in accessory compartment no. 10
Alarm switch - signals that the circuit breaker was switched off by the shunt Alarm switch - signals that the circuit breaker was switched off by the
trip unit undervoltage trip unit
Rated operational voltage Ue AC 230 V Rated operational voltage Ue AC 230 V
Rated insulation voltage Ui 250 V Rated insulation voltage Ui 250 V
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 4 kV Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 4 kV
Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz
Rated operational current Ie/Ue 2 A/AC 230 V Rated operational current Ie/Ue 2 A/AC 230 V
Thermal current Ith 6A Thermal current Ith 6A
Contact arrangement 01 Contact arrangement 01
1/26 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Design 1
Rotary operating mechanisms Operation through the switchgear cabinet door (Fig. 2)
3VT9 100-3HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism
The rotary operating mechanism actuates the circuit brea- + 3VT9 100-3HJ.. extension shaft
kers/switch disconnector when the operator turns the knob, e.g. + 3VT9 100-3HG/HH.. coupling driver
in order to switch machines on and off. The modular concept of + 3VT9 100-3HE/HF.. knob
the operating mechanism allows simple mounting on the circuit
breaker. Mounting can be done after having removed the acces-
sory compartment cover. An attached drive can be sealed (with
sealing wire). The drive and its accessories are ordered separa-
tely to match the requirements (see page 1/7).
• The rotary operating mechanism is mounted directly on the
circuit breaker or switch disconnector.
• The coupling driver is fixed to the switchgear cabinet door and
provides for degree of protection IP40 or IP66.
• The knob is mounted onto the rotary operating mechanism or
onto the coupling driver.
• The extension shaft is supplied in two versions, standard
(length 350 mm - can be shortened) and telescopic (adjus-
table length 199 ... 352 mm). It is fitted onto the rotary opera-
ting mechanism.
The rotary operating mechanism makes it possible to actuate the
circuit breaker:
Operation from the front panel of the circuit breaker (Fig. 1)
+ 3VT9 100-3HE/HF.. knob
Fig. 2: Rotary operating mechanism with extension shaft, coupling driver

and knob
Operation through the side wall of the switchgear cabinet (Fig. 3)
in left- or right-side designs of rotary operating mechanisms for
lateral operation
3VT9 100-3HD10 (right) or 3VT9 100-3HC10 (left)
+ 3VT9 100-3HJ.. extension shaft
+ 3VT9 100-3HG/HH.. coupling driver
+ 3VT9 100-3HE/HF.. knob.
Fig. 1: Rotary operating mechanism with knob
Fig. 3: Lateral rotary operating mechanism with extension shaft, coupling

driver and knob
Enhanced safety for operator
• The rotary operating mechanism and knob allow operators to
lock the circuit breaker into the “switched off manually” posi-
tion. The rotary operating mechanism and lever can be locked
with up to three padlocks with a shaft diameter up to 4 mm.
• Every coupling driver prevents the switchgear cabinet door
from opening when the circuit breaker is switched on or if it
was tripped. By means of the coupling driver it is possible to
switch off this locking and to open the door.
Locking of the switchgear cabinet door is also possible in the
OFF mode of the circuit breaker. It is necessary to activate the
locking by means of the knob on the coupling drive and to lock
the hand drive arm.
• Two circuit breakers with rotary operating mechanism can also
be provided with reciprocal mechanical interlocking or me-
chanical parallel switching (see page 1/29).
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/27

© Siemens AG 2011

1 Features
Order No. Description Color Permits operator to Degree of Switchgear cabinet door is locked Length
lock the circuit brea- Protection when circuit breaker is mm
ker in OFF mode
switched on switched off
manually
and locked
3VT9 100-3HA10 Rotary operating mechanism gray no -- -- -- --
3VT9 100-3HA20 Rotary operating mechanism gray yes -- -- -- --
3VT9 100-3HB20 Rotary operating mechanism yellow yes -- -- -- --
3VT9 100-3HC10 Rotary operating mechanism - lateral, grey no -- - -- --
left
3VT9 100-3HD10 Rotary operating mechanism - lateral, grey no -- - -- --
right
3VT9 100-3HE10 Knob black no -- -- -- --
3VT9 100-3HE20 Knob, lockable with padlock black yes -- -- -- --
3VT9 100-3HF20 Knob, lockable with padlock red yes -- -- -- --
3VT9 100-3HG10 Coupling driver black -- IP40 yes yes --
3VT9 100-3HH10 Coupling driver black -- IP40 yes yes --
3VT9 100-3HG20 Coupling driver yellow -- IP66 yes yes --
3VT9 100-3HH20 Coupling driver yellow -- IP66 yes yes --
3VT9 100-3HJ10 Extension shaft (can be shortened) -- -- -- -- -- 350
3VT9 100-3HJ20 Extension shaft, telescopic -- -- -- -- -- 199 ... 352
1/28 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Mechanical interlock and mechanical interlock for parallel switching 1
3VT9 100-8LA00 mechanical interlock 3VT9 100-8LB00 mechanical interlock for parallel switching
Mechanical interlocks make sure that two circuit breakers can- Mechanical interlocks for parallel switching are for simultaneous
not trip simultaneously, but always just individually. Both circuit switching of two circuit breakers. Parallel switching can be used
breakers may be switched off simultaneously. Interlocking can between two 3VT1 circuit breakers. Each circuit breaker must be
be used between two 3VT1 circuit breakers. Each circuit breaker furnished with a rotary operating mechanism and at least one of
must be furnished with a rotary operating mechanism – at least them with a knob (see page 1/27).
one of them with a rotary operating mechanism and a knob (see
page 1/27). When using a mechanical interlock for parallel switching it is re-
quired to comply with the dimensions shown in the figure and in
When using a mechanical interlock it is required to comply with the table.
the dimensions shown in the figure and in the table.
Dimensions mm Dimensions mm
X 87.5 or 100 X 75 or 87.5 or 100
L 94.5 or 106 L to be determined
X
X
NSO0_00057
NSO0_00058
Arrangement of circuit breakers/switch disconnectors with Arrangement of circuit breakers/switch disconnectors with
3VT9 100-8LA00 mechanical interlock 3VT9 100-8LB00 mechanical interlock for parallel switching
NSO0_00060
NSO0_00059
12.5 or 25 0 or 12.5 or 25
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/29

© Siemens AG 2011

1 ■ Design
Motorized operating mechanism Motorized operating mechanism automatic operation presets
The motorized operating mechanism is an accessory to the cir- The position of the main circuit breaker is indicated by the
cuit breaker/switch disconnector, by means of which it is possi- position of the circuit breaker driver lever under the transparent
ble to switch the circuit breaker or switch disconnector remotely protective cover of the operating mechanism. The wound up po-
on and off. The modular design of the motorized operating me- sition of the circuit breaker can also be signalled remotely.
chanism enables its simple attachment to the circuit breaker
(also in addition to a rotary operating mechanism). The moto- In the remote control mode, the circuit breaker is switched on
rized operating mechanism is used for both remote and local and off by an ON and OFF pushbutton. The accessories for the
control of 3VT1 3-pole and 4-pole circuit breakers. The circuit motorized operating mechanism includes an 3VT9 100-3MF00
breaker with attached motorized operating mechanism can be extension cable.
installed on a mounting plate or on a standard DIN mounting rail.
The motorized operating mechanism is fastened by means of a
bayonet mechanism to the circuit breaker. Symbol Description
3VT1 circuit breakers with motorized operating mechanism are Switched on manually or by motorized operating
mechanism electrically
intended for industrial, power engineering and infrastructure ap-
plications. The motorized operating mechanisms are for direct Switched off by trip unit, shunt trip unit, undervoltage trip
actuation of the circuit breaker, without a spring storage unit. unit or TEST pushbutton
The motorized operating mechanism can work in local or remote
control mode. The local control mode is used, for instance, in Switched off manually or by motorized operating mecha-
case of loss of the control voltage. Local control of the circuit nism electrically, wound up state
breaker is only accessible after lifting the transparent safety co-
ver off the operating mechanism. This procedure locks the re-
mote electrical control circuits. The lifted position of the cover
can be indicated remotely.
The circuit breaker is switched on and off by means of the
control lever. After returning the safety cover to the original posi-
tion, the operating mechanism is switched automatically into the
remote control mode.
After the safety cover was removed, it is possible to actuate an
automatic mode selector switch. Under the transparent cover,
there is a red LED. The lighting of the LED indicates a failure
(failed on/off/wind-up operations).
Electronic circuits of the motorized operating mechanism block
erroneous control process, e.g. drive cycling after tripping of trip
unit or shunt trip/undervoltage trip unit.
Lateral operating mechanisms can be locked in „off position“ of
the circuit breaker by up to three padlocks with a shank diameter
of max. 4 mm. The protective cover of the operating mecha-
nisms can also be sealed.
Switch Automatic Preset

position operation preset description
Circuit breaker switching off to Circuit breaker will be swit- Circuit breaker will be switched
TRIP position ched to OFF position to ON position
0 N 11) Automatic winding up is By trip unit The motorized operating The motorized operating
on By auxiliary trip unit mechanism switches the cir- mechanism switches circuit
1 2 cuit breaker OFF automati- breaker on when it receives an
By TEST pushbutton cally. ON signal.
0 N 2 Automatic winding up is The motorized operating The motorized operating
off mechanism stays in TRIP mechanism switches circuit
1 2 mode until it receives an OFF breaker on when it receives an
signal. ON signal.
0 N 3 Simultaneous winding When receiving an ON signal the motorized operating mecha-
up and switching on nism switches the circuit breaker off and on again immediately.
1 2 2)
0 N The motorized operating mechanism is out of operation, the red LED is lit.
1 2
1) Standard factory setting of the switch.

2) Pressing the OFF pushbutton causes the motorized operating mechanism
to wind up the circuit breaker to position only.
1/30 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Schematics 1
MP control circuit
Q3
L+
ON
OFF
B
Motor drive
X3 4 3 1
M P
MP
2 5 6 7 8
X3
B
NSO0_00061
HL1 HL2 HL3 HL4

N-
MP control circuit, signaling
Explanation of designations
Order No. 3VT9 100-3M.00
Rated operational voltage Ue AC 24/48/110/230 V MP 3VT9 100-3M.00 motorized operating mecha-
DC 24/48/110/220 V nism
Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz M Motor
Control pulse length P Gearbox
for switching on 60 ms ... ∞1) X3 Connector for connection of control and signal-
for switching off 60 ms ... ∞1) ling circuits
1)
Time for switching on < 70 ms B recommended connection of control circuits-
Time for switching off < 50 ms1) not part of MP
Frequency of cycles ON/OFF 5 cycles/min ON Pushbutton
Frequency of cycles-successive ON/OFF 10 cycles OFF Pushbutton
Mechanical endurance 20000 cycles Q3 motorized operating mechanism circuit breaker
Power input AC 100 VA HL1 remote failure signalling (unreliable making or
breaking), permissible load max. 10 W1)
DC 100 W
HL2 signalling of circuit breaker lever „wound up“
Starting current 12 A, at AC/DC 24 V position, permissible load max. 10 W1)
6 A, at AC/DC 48 V
4 A, at AC/DC 110 V HL3 signalling of opening of the front safety cover of
2 A, at AC 230 V/DC 220 V the operating mechanism, permissible load
max. 10 W1)
Protection
AC 24/48/110 V; AC 230 V LSN 4C/1; LSN 2C/1 HL4 signalling of extension of the operating mecha-
DC 24/48/110 V; DC 220 V LSN-DC 4C/1; LSN-DC 2C/1 nism locking bar, permissible load max. 10 W1)
Order No. 3VT9 100-3MF00 1)
Voltage on terminals 5, 6, 7, 8 is the same as Un of the motorized operating
Number of conductors 8 mechanism.
Conductor cross section S 0.35 mm2
Conductor length 60 cm
1)
The values depend on the motorized operating mechanism automatic ope-
ration preset, see pages 1/32 ff.
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/31

© Siemens AG 2011

1 3VT1 circuit breakers with motorized operating mechanism
Circuit breaker switched off by motorized operating mechanism Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanism
(OFF signal) (ON signal).
Automatic operation presets no. 1, 2, 3 Automatic operation presets no. 1, 2, 3
NSO0_00062
NSO0_00063
Main contacts Main contacts
50 70
1 1
0 0
Auxiliary switch - NO contact Auxiliary switch - NO contact
50 70
1 1
0 0
Auxiliary switch - NC contact Auxiliary switch - NC contact
55 65
1 1
0 0
t [ms] t [ms]
Recommended pulse durations for electrical switching

Automatic operation no. 1 Graph description
NSO0_00064
> 520 > 520 Symbol Description

>20 > 20 HK Main contacts
60 … 500 60 … 500
1
IMP OFF IMP ON NS Alarm switch
0
IMP ON Make pulse for motorized operating mechanism
50 < 70 IMP OFF Break pulse for motorized operating mechanism
HK 1
Switched on
0
Switched off manually or electrically by motorized opera-

NS 1 ting mechanism (wound up state)
0
t [ms]
Automatic operation no. 2

NSO0_00065
> 520 > 520

>20 > 20
60 … ∞ 60 … ∞
1
0 IMP OFF IMP ON
50 < 70
HK 1
0
NS 1
0
t [ms]

NSO0_00066
> 520 > 520

> 20 > 20
60 … 500 60 … 500
1
IMP OFF IMP ON
0
50 < 70
HK 1
0
NS 1
0
t [ms]
1/32 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Circuit breaker switches off by
trip unit or INSPECTION pushbutton
Recommended control pulses for switching the circuit breaker
with motorized operating mechanism after it was switched off
1
by trip unit or INSPECTION pushbutton
NSO0_00067
NSO0_00069
Main contacts
> 15001)
2 1 10 60 … 500
4 3 1 1
6 5 IMP ON
0 0
Auxiliary switch - NO contact
compartment
10 70
accessory
1 1
3.4 3.3 HK
0
3
0
Auxiliary switch - NC contact
15 1070
1 NS 1
3.2 3.1
0 0
Alarm switch - NO contact
t [ms]
compartment
10 1080
accessory
1
2.4 2.3 Automatic operation no. 2
0
2
Alarm switch - NC contact
NSO0_00070
> 500
5 1085
1 60 … ∞ > 20 60 … ∞
2.2 2.1
0 1 IMP OFF IMP ON
t [ms] 0
Automatic operation no. 2 1) 70
HK 1
0
NSO0_00068
Main contacts
2 1 10 70
4 3
1 NS 1
6 5 0 0
t [ms]
compartment
10
accessory
1
3.4 3.3 0
3
NSO0_00071
15
1 60 … 500
3.2 3.1 0 1 IMP ON
Alarm switch - No contact 0
compartment
10
accessory
1 1) 140
HK 1
2.4 2.3 0
2
Alarm switch - NC contact 0

5
1 70
NS 1
2.2 2.1 0
t [ms] 0
Automatic operation no. 3 t [ms]

1) If the circuit breaker was switched off by a trip unit, it is necessary to
remove the error before it switches on again.
NSO0_00068
Main contacts
Graph description
2 1 10
4 3
1
Symbol Description
6 5 0
Auxiliary switch - NO contact HK Main contacts
compartment
10 NS Alarm switch
accessory
1 IMP ON Make pulse for motorized operating mechanism

3.4 3.3 0
3
Auxiliary switch - NC contact IMP OFF Break pulse for motorized operating mechanism
Switched on
15
1
3.2 3.1 0 Switched off by trip units, TEST or INSPECTION pushbut-
Alarm switch - No contact
ton
compartment
10
accessory
1 Switched off manually or electrically by motorized opera-

2.4 2.3 0 ting mechanism (wound-up state)
2
Alarm switch - NC contact
5
1
2.2 2.1 0
t [ms]
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/33

© Siemens AG 2011

1 Circuit breaker switches off by
shunt trip unit, undervoltage trip unit or TEST pushbutton
NSO0_00072
Main contacts
2 1 15
4 3 1
6 5
0
compartment
15
accessory
1
3.4 3.3
0
3
20
1
3.2 3.1
0
accessory
Alarm switch Auxiliary trip unit
compart-
ment
2
10 1085
1
2.4 2.3
0
t [ms]

NSO0_00073
Main contacts
2 1 15
4 3 1
6 5
0
compartment
accessory
15
1
3.4 3.3
3
0
20
1
3.2 3.1
0
accessory

compart-
ment
2
10
1
2.4 2.3
0
t [ms]

NSO0_0007
Main contacts
2 1 15
4 3 1
6 5
0
compartment
accessory
15
1
3.4 3.3
3
0
20
1
3.2 3.1
0
accessory

compart-
ment
2
10
1
2.4 2.3
0
t [ms]
1/34 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Recommended control pulses for switching the circuit breaker
with motorized operating mechanism
Graph description 1
after it was switched off by trip unit or INSPECTION pushbutton Symbol Description
HK Main contacts
NS Alarm switch
NSO0_00074
SV Pulse for shunt trip unit
> 1500 SP Pulse for undervoltage trip unit
60 … 500
1 IMP ON Make pulse for motorized operating mechanism
IMP ON
0 IMP OFF Break pulse for motorized operating mechanism
Switched on
> 2001)
1
SV
0 Switched off by trip units, TEST or REVISION pushbuttons
> 2001)
SP 1 Switched off manually or by electrically by motorized
0 operating mechanism (wound up state)
15 1070 70
HK 1
0
NS 1
0
t [ms]
Automatic operation no.2

NSO0_00075
> 500
> 20
60 … ∞ 60 … ∞
1
IMP OFF IMP ON
0
> 2001)
1
SV
0
> 2001)
SP 1
0
15 70
70
HK 1
0
NS 1
0
t [ms]

NSO0_00076
> 500
60 … 500
1
IMP ON
0
> 2001)
1
SV
0
> 2001) 140

SP 1
0
15 70
HK 1
0
NS 1
0
t [ms]
1) Re-switching is only possible after deactivation of the shunt trip unit or

undervoltage trip unit.
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/35

© Siemens AG 2011

Insulating barriers and terminal covers
1 ■ Overview
3-pole version Fixed-mounted version
• Front connection
H
- Terminals 1, 3, 5
3VT9 100-8CE30 insulating barriers or 3VT9 100-8CA30 ter-
minal covers have to be used (when using 3VT9 100-4TF30
connection sets for connecting circuit breakers/switch dis-
connectors, the terminal cover is included in the connecting
set).
- Terminals 2, 4, 6
3VT9 100-8CE30 insulating barriers or 3VT9 100-8CA30 ter-
minal covers have to be used (when using 3VT9 100-4TF30
>15
connection sets for connecting circuit breaker/switch dis-

connector, the terminal cover is included in the connecting
set).
• Rear connection
- Insulating barriers and covers must be used.
Reference Size
mm
A 50 Minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switch dis-
connector and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for
connections using insulated conductors, cables, flexibars
or with rear connection)
A1 100 Minimum insulation length of bare conductors (using
3VT9 100-8CE30 insulating barriers from 50 mm to max.
100 mm, or by adding additional insulation for the con-
ductors with barriers to obtain at least A1 value)
A2 150 Minimum distance:
• between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and uninsu-
lated earthed wall (applicable for uninsulated conduc-
tors and busbars)
• between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and busbar
• between two circuit breakers/switch disconnectors situ-
ated vertically above one another
• between uninsulated connections of two circuit
breakers/switch disconnectors above one another
C, D, E, F, 30 Minimum distance between the circuit
G breaker/switch disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall
H Minimum distance between uninsulated conductors
H = 30 1 1
1 3VT9 100-8CE30
A2 = 150
A1 = 100
100
A = 50
F=0 G=0
ON ON ON
130
OFF OFF OFF

TEST TEST TEST
NSO0_00012
B=
20
B = 20 E = 70 G = 40
75 75 100 B = 20
1/36 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

4-pole version Fixed-mounted version 1
H • Front connection
- terminals N, 1, 3, 5
3VT9 100-8CE30 and 3VT9 100-8CE00 insulating barriers or
3VT9 100-8CA40 terminal covers have to be used (if 3VT9
100-4TF40 connecting sets are used to connect the circuit
breaker/switch disconnector, the terminal cover is included
in the connecting set)
>15
- Terminals N, 2, 4, 6
3VT9 100-8CE30 and 3VT9 100-8CE00 insulating barriers or
3VT9 100-8CA40 terminal covers have to be used (if 3VT9
100-4TF40 connecting sets are used to connect the circuit
breaker/switch disconnector, the terminal cover is included
in the connecting set)
• Rear connection
- Insulating barriers or covers must be used.
Reference Size
mm
A 50 Minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switch dis-
connector and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for
connection by means of insulated conductors, cables, fle-
xibars or connection)
A1 100 Minimum insulation length of bare conductors (using
3VT9 100-8CE30 and 3VT9 100-8CE00 insulating barriers
from 50 mm to max. 100 mm, or by means of additional
insulating of conductors over the barriers at least to the
value of A1)
A2 150 Minimum distance:
• between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and uninsu-
lated earthed wall (applicable for uninsulated conduc-
tors and busbars)
• between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and a bus-
bar
• between two circuit breakers/switch disconnectors ins-
talled vertically one above the other
• between uninsulated leads of two circuit breakers/switch
disconnectors
C, D, E, F, 30 Minimum distance between circuit breaker/switch discon-
G nector and uninsulated earthed wall
H Minimum distance between uninsulated conductors
H = 30 1 1
1 3VT9 100-8CE30
A2 = 150
A1 = 100
100
A = 50
F=0 G=0
ON ON ON
130
OFF OFF OFF

TEST TEST TEST
NSO0_00012
B=
20
B = 20 E = 70 G = 40
75 75 100 B = 20
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/37

© Siemens AG 2011

Technical Information - Project Planning Assistance
Dimensional drawings
1 ■ Dimensional drawings - 3-pole, fixed-mounted version
Fixed-mounted version, front connection
98
68.5
Ø 6.4
18 20 2
12 1.5
7
2°
13° 14°
ON 38
100
130
118
111
100
93
45
OFF
TEST
63
R5 4xØ4
NSO0_00018
40.5
4.6
15
25 25 20 25 25
75 70
80
Fixed-mounted version, front connection (3VT9 100-4TF30 connecting set)

25 25
25
ON
168
136
100
154
186
202
220
111
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00020
75 2 x Ø 16.2
31 20
68.5
1/38 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Fixed-mounted version, front connection (3VT9 100-4ED30 connecting set) 1
Ø 10.5
22 4
25
ON
100
130
183
111
100
OFF
TEST
75 4xØ4
NSO0_00026
15
25 25
36.5
10
20 20
25
37.5 37.5
Fixed-mounted version, rear connection (3VT9 100-4RC30 connecting set)
5.5
25 25 25 25
3
42
Ø
Ø 13.2
87
15
25
25
ON
100
100
130
111
OFF
TEST
80 2xØ4
NSO0_00023
Ø 6.4 35
12
75 70
2
9.5
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/39

© Siemens AG 2011

1 Fixed-mounted version, rotary operating mechanism
1
75
NSO0_00029
1 3VT1
2 2 3VT9 100-3HA.0, -3HB.0
3 3 3VT9 100-3HE.0, 3HF.0
22.5
22.5
TEST
63
°
90
98 29
27.5 45°
Fixed-mounted version, rotary operating mechanism with adjustable knob

1
75
NSO0_00031
1 3VT1
6 2 3VT9 100-3HA.0, -3HB.0
2
5 3 3VT9 100-3HJ.0
45 3 4 4 3VT9 100-3HE.0, -3HF.0
22.5
5 3VT9 100-3HG.0, -3HH.0

6 Outside surface of
45
22.5
cabinet door
TEST
63
°
90
98
27.5 45° 124 ... 448 (-3HJ10)
297 ... 450 (-3HJ20)
Dimensions of door cut-out

min.50
ø3
7
32
ø6
32
1/40 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Fixed-mounted version, lateral rotary operating mechanism - right 1
NSO0_00035
1 3VT1
2 6 ° 2 3VT9 100-3HC10
90
5 3 3VT9 100-3HJ.0
4 3VT9 100-3HE.0, -3HF.0
45°
5 3VT9 100-3HG.0, -3HH.0
45
cabinet door
TEST
63
4
1
26.6 50 114.5
45.5 ... 369.5 (3HJ10)
218.5 ... 371.5 (3HJ20)
Fixed-mounted version, lateral rotary operating mechanism - left
75
NSO0_00036
1 3VT1
6 2 2 3VT9 100-3HC10
5 3 3VT9 100-3HJ.0
45
4 3VT9 100-3HE.0, -3HF.0
5 3VT9 100-3HG.0, -3HH.0
cabinet door
45°
TEST
63
3
4
°
1 90
49.9 46.6 114.5

65.5 ... 389.5 (3HJ10)
238.5 ... 391.5 (3HJ20)
ø3
7
32
ø6
32
Fixed-mounted version, installation on standard DIN mounting rail (width 35 mm )
86
67
ON
130
45
OFF
TEST
40.5
NSO0_00043
2.7
2
72
82
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/41

© Siemens AG 2011

1 Fixed-mounted version and lateral motorized operating mechanism
130
150
94.4
80
45
40.5
70
1/42 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Dimensional drawings - 4-pole, fixed-mounted version 1

98
68.5
18 20 2
12 Ø 6.4 1.5
7
2°
13° 14°
ON 38
100
130
118
111
100
93
45
OFF
TEST
63
R5 M3
NSO0_00014
40.5
4.6
15
25 25 25 20 50 25
100 70
80
Fixed-mounted version, front connection (3VT9 100-4TF40 connecting set )
5.5
25 25 25 25 25 25
3
42
Ø
Ø 13.2
87 25
15
25
ON
100
100
111
OFF
TEST
80 M3
NSO0_00016
Ø 6.4 35
12
100 70
2
9.5

25 25 25 25 25 25
5.5
3
ø13.2
42 ø1
25 5 25
87
111
130
100
130
100
111
80
ø6
12
35 M
.4
3
9.5
70
100
2
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/43

© Siemens AG 2011

1 Fixed-mounted version, front rotary operating mechanism
100 1
75
NSO0_00028
1 3VT1
2 2 3VT9 100-3HA.0, -3HB.0
3 3 3VT9 100-3HE.0, 3HF.0
22.5
22.5
TEST
63
°
90
98 29
45°
52.5
Fixed version, front rotary operating mechanism with adjustable knob
1
100
NSO0_00525
1 3VT1
6 2 3VT9 100-3HA.0, -3HB.0
2
5 3 3VT9 100-3HJ.0
3 4
45 4 3VT9 100-3HE.0, -3HF.0
22.5
5 3VT9 100-3HG.0, -3HH.0

45
22.5
cabinet door
63
°
90
98
45° 124 ... 448 (-3HJ10)
52.5
297 ... 450 (-3HJ20)
min.50

ø3
7
32
ø6
32
Fixed-mounted version, lateral rotary operating mechanism - right
100
1 3VT1
2 6 ° 2 3VT9 100-3HD10
90
5 3 3VT9 100-3HJ.0
4 3VT9 100-3HE.0, -3HF.0
45°
5 3VT9 100-3HG.0, -3HH.0

45
cabinet door
TEST
3
63
NSO0_00032
4
1
62.5 26.6 49.9 114.5

45.5 ... 369.5 (3HJ10)
218.5 ... 371.5 (3HJ20)
1/44 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Fixed-mounted version, lateral rotary operating mechanism - left

1
100
NSO0_00033
1 3VT1
6 2 2 3VT9 100-3HD10
5 3 3VT9 100-3HJ.0
45
4 3VT9 100-3HE.0, -3HF.0
5 3VT9 100-3HG.0, -3HH.0
cabinet door
45°
TEST
63
3
4
°
1 90
49.9 46.6 37.5 114.5

65.5 ... 389.5 (3HJ10)
238.5 ... 391.5 (3HJ20)
ø3
7
32
ø6
32
Fixed-mounted version, installation on a standard DIN mounting rail (width 35 mm )
86
67
ON
130
45
OFF
TEST
40.5
NSO0_00038
2.7
2
72
82
Arrangement of circuit breaker/switch disconnectors with 3VT9 100-8LA00 mechanical interlock
TEST
NSO0_00039
148.2
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 1/45

© Siemens AG 2011

1 Arrangement of circuit breaker/switch disconnectors with 3VT9 100-8LB00 mechanical interlock for parallel switching
T TEST
NSO0_00041
max.6 148.2
min 0
Fixed-mounted version and lateral motorized operating mechanism

130
TEST
NSO0_00044
175
1/46 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

2
© Siemens AG 2011

up to 250 A

up to 250 A
2/2 General data
2/3 Circuit breakers ·
Switch disconnectors
2/5 Auxiliary switches · Auxiliary trip units
2/6 Manual/motorized operating mechanism
2/10 Further accessories

up to 250 A
2/15 Trip units
2/30 Mechanical interlocking and
parallel switching
2/37 Mounting accessories for plug-in version
2/40 Mounting accessories for withdrawable
version
© Siemens AG 2011

Catalog
General data
■ Overview
Connecting sets
4
5
6
7
8
2 9
10
11
Switching unit
12
13 3
2
Accessories for plug-in and withdrawable devices

14 1
15 20 21 22
16
18 19 23 24 25 26
Accessories
NSO0_00164a
17 27 28 29 30 31
1 Molded case circuit breaker 11 Auxiliary conductor terminal 22 Keying pins

2 Plug-in device 12 Rotary operating mechanism 23 Auxiliary switch NC/NO
3 Withdrawable device 13 Lateral rotary operating mechanism 24 Auxiliary switch NC/NO
4 Box terminals 14 Mechanical parallel switching 25 Auxiliary switch, change-over contact
5 Circular conductor terminal 15 Mechanical interlocking 26 Auxiliary switch, early
6 Circular conductor terminal 16 Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire 27 Lockingtype lever
7 Multiple feed-in terminal 17 Motor operating mechanism 28 Sealing inset
8 Multiple feed-in terminal 18 Shunt trip unit 29 Additional cover for
9 Rear connection 19 Undervoltage trip unit overcurrent releases
10 Front connection 20 Connecting cable 30 Terminal cover
21 Position signalling 31 Insulating barriers
2/2 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Catalog
■ Overview
Switching unit Circuit breaker
The switching unit includes: The circuit breakers consist of a 3- or 4-pole switching unit and
• Two connecting sets – for connecting busbars or cable lugs a trip unit which is available with a choice of different character-
• Insulating barriers istics.
• A set of 4 installation bolts (M4 x 35)
Switch disconnector
The switching unit must be fitted with a trip unit (circuit breaker)
or a switch disconnector unit (switch disconnector). The switch disconnector consists of a switching unit and a
switch disconnector unit. 2
For maximum circuit breaker/switch disconnector loads in ac-
cordance with the ambient temperature, see page 2/11.
For recommended cross-sections of cables, busbars and flexi-
bars for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions, see
page 2/11.

Rated current In Breaking capacity Icu DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU
approx.
A kA kg
Switching units
3-pole version
250 36 B 3VT2 725-2AA36-0AA0 1 unit 2.840
250 65 B 3VT2 725-3AA36-0AA0 1 unit 2.840
4-pole version, unprotected N
250 36 B 3VT2 725-2AA46-0AA0 1 unit 2.840
250 65 B 3VT2 725-3AA46-0AA0 1 unit 2.840
4-pole version, protected N
250 36 B 3VT2 725-2AA56-0AA0 1 unit 2.840
250 65 B 3VT2 725-3AA56-0AA0 1 unit 2.840

Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/3
© Siemens AG 2011

■ Selection and ordering data for accessories

Rated current In Current setting of the inverse- time DT Order No. PS* Weight
delayed overcurrent trip units „L“ Ir per PU
approx.
A A kg
Electronic trip units (ETU)
Line protection, ETU LP, LI function 1)
with fixed overload trip unit, fixed short-circuit trip unit
2 160 160 B 3VT9 216-6AB00 1 unit 0.317
200 200 B 3VT9 220-6AB00 1 unit 0.317
250 250 B 3VT9 225-6AB00 1 unit 0.317
Distribution protection, ETU DP, LI function 1)
with adjustable thermal overload trip unit,
100 40 ... 100 B 3VT9 210-6AC00 1 unit 0.283
160 63 ... 160 B 3VT9 216-6AC00 1 unit 0.284
250 100 ... 250 B 3VT9 225-6AC00 1 unit 0.283
Distribution protection with N-pole protection,
ETU DPN, LIN function 2)
100 40 ... 100 B 3VT9 210-6BC00 1 unit 0.327
160 63 ... 160 B 3VT9 216-6BC00 1 unit 0.327
250 100 ... 250 B 3VT9 225-6BC00 1 unit 0.327
Motor/generator protection, ETU MP, LI function 1)
100 40 ... 100 B 3VT9 210-6AP00 1 unit 0.285
160 63 ... 160 B 3VT9 216-6AP00 1 unit 0.284
250 100 ... 250 B 3VT9 225-6AP00 1 unit 0.285
Motor/generator protection, ETU MPS, LSI function 1)
100 40 ... 100 B 3VT9 210-6AS00 1 unit 0.230
160 63 ... 160 B 3VT9 216-6AS00 1 unit 0.230
250 100 ... 250 B 3VT9 225-6AS00 1 unit 0.230
Switch disconnector unit
250 Switch disconnector unit1) B 3VT9 225-6DT00 1 unit 0.219
For a description of trip units, see page 2/15.

1)
Only for switching units 3VT2725-. AA36-0AA0 or 3VT2725-. AA46-0AA0
2)
Only for switching unit 3VT2725-. AA56-0AA0

2/4 Siemens LV 36 · 2011
© Siemens AG 2011

■ Overview
The circuit breakers can be equipped with Shunt trip units can trip the circuit breaker from a remote loca-
• shunt trip units, An undervoltage trip unit trips the circuit breaker automatically
• undervoltage trip units. when the circuit voltage drops below 70 % Ue. The undervoltage
trip unit protects motors and other equipment in case of under-
■ Selection and ordering data 2

per PU
approx.
AC 50/60 Hz/DC kg
Auxiliary switches
with single NO contacts
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V B 3VT9 300-2AC10 1 unit 0.020
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V B 3VT9 300-2AC20 1 unit 0.120
with single NC contacts

AC/DC 60 ... 500 V B 3VT9 300-2AD10 1 unit 0.130
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V B 3VT9 300-2AD20 1 unit 0.130
with double contacts (2 x NO)

AC/DC 60 ... 500 V B 3VT9 300-2AE10 1 unit 0.260
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V B 3VT9 300-2AE20 1 unit 0.260
with double contacts (NO and NC)
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V B 3VT9 300-2AF10 1 unit 0.250
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V B 3VT9 300-2AF20 1 unit 0.250
with double contacts (2 x NC)
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V B 3VT9 300-2AG10 1 unit 0.240
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V B 3VT9 300-2AG20 1 unit 0.240
with change-over contacts
AC/DC 60 ... 250 V B 3VT9 300-2AH10 1 unit 0.013
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V B 3VT9 300-2AH20 1 unit 0.013
with leading contacts

AC/DC 60 ... 500 V B 3VT9 300-2AJ00 1 unit 0.040
Shunt trip units

AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V B 3VT9 300-1SC00 1 unit 0.140
AC/DC 110 V B 3VT9 300-1SD00 1 unit 0.140
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 V B 3VT9 300-1SE00 1 unit 0.140

AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V B 3VT9 300-1UC00 1 unit 0.110
AC/DC 110 V B 3VT9 300-1UD00 1 unit 0.110
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 V B 3VT9 300-1UE00 1 unit 0.110
with leading contact1)
AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V B 3VT9 300-1UC10 1 unit 0.120
AC/DC 110 V B 3VT9 300-1UD10 1 unit 0.120
1) Not to be used with 3VT9 200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism.

Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/5
© Siemens AG 2011

■ Overview
Rotary operating mechanisms - 3VT9 200-3HC10 for right side operation OR
- 3VT9 200-3HD10 for left side operation
The rotary operating mechanism must be combined from the - 3VT9 300-3HJ..extension shaft
following components: - 3VT9 300-3HG/HH.. coupling driver for door-coupling
• For rotary operation of the circuit breaker: operating mechanism
- 3VT9 200-3HA.0 or 3VT9 200-3HB.0 for frontside operation - 3VT9 300-3HE/HF.. knob
- 3VT9 300-3HE10 or 3VT9 300-3HE20 black knob or
2 - 3VT9 300-3HF20 red knob
• For operation through the switchgear cabinet door:
• Mechanical interlocks for fixed-mounted version must be
- 3VT9 200-3HA.0 or 3VT9 200-3HB.0 for frontside operation combined from the following parts:
- 3VT9 300-3HJ..extension shaft - 2 x 3VT9 200-3HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism
- 3VT9 300-3HG/HH.. coupling driver for door-coupling - 2 x 3VT9 200-3HE/HF.. knob or
operating mechanism - 1 x 3VT9 200-3HE/HF.. knob for parallel switching
- 3VT9 300-3HE/HF.. knob • Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire is intended for fixed-
• For operation through side wall of cabinet: mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions

kg
• lockable with padlock yellow label B 3VT9 200-3HB20 1 unit 0.223
• for lateral operation,

• mounted on the right side,
grey
N B 3VT9 200-3HC10 1 unit 0.300
• not lockable

• mounted on the left side,
grey
N B 3VT9 200-3HD10 1 unit 0.300
• not lockable
Knobs for rotary operating mechanism


To be used with the
3VT9 300-3HE10 or 3VT9 300-3HE20
black knob
Additionally requires 3VT9 300-3HF20 red knob
Extension shaft, B 3VT9 300-3HJ10 1 unit 0.205

length 365 mm, may be shortened
Extension shaft, telescopic, B 3VT9 300-3HJ20 1 unit 0.255

length 245 ... 410 mm

2/6 Siemens LV 36 · 2011
© Siemens AG 2011

Version DT Order No. PS* Weight

per PU
approx.
kg
The mechanical interlock additionally requires the following parts:
• 2 x 3VT9 300-3HA../HB.. rotary operating mechanisms,
• 1 or 2 x 3VT9 300-3HE../HF.. knobs
Mechanical interlock
for fixed-mounted version only
B 3VT9 300-8LA00 1 unit 0.136
2
Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wires

• for two 3VT2 circuit breakers B 3VT9 200-8LC10 1 unit 0.393
• for one 3VT2 and one 3VT3 circuit breaker B 3VT9 300-8LC20 1 unit 0.393
Motorized operating mechanism with storage spring

Degree of protection IP00,
with locking device for 3 padlocks
AC/DC 24 V B 3VT9 200-3MJ00 1 unit 1.529
AC/DC 48 V B 3VT9 200-3ML00 1 unit 1.529
AC/DC 110 V B 3VT9 200-3MN00 1 unit 1.529
AC 230 V/DC 220 V B 3VT9 200-3MQ00 1 unit 1.564
with operations counter
AC/DC 24 V B 3VT9 200-3MJ10 1 unit 1.529
AC/DC 48 V B 3VT9 200-3ML10 1 unit 1.564
AC/DC 110 V B 3VT9 200-3MN10 1 unit 1.546
Accessories for motorized operating mechanism
Operations counter with cable, B 3VT9 300-3MF10 1 unit 0.003
length 110 cm
Extension cable for motorized operating mechanism, B 3VT9 300-3MF00 1 unit 0.060
12 wires, length 60 cm

Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/7
© Siemens AG 2011

■ Overview
Plug-in version base Withdrawable version base
• The plug-in base includes: In the withdrawable version base the circuit breaker is fixed by
- Complete accessories for assembling circuit breakers/ side racks, therefore screws are not necessary. Changing of cir-
switch disconnectors in plug-in version. cuit breaker is faster as compared to plug-in version.
- A set of four installation bolts (M4 x 40) for fixing the switch-
ing unit to the plug-in base. • The withdrawable version base includes complete accesso-
ries for assembling circuit breakers/switch disconnectors in
2 3VT9 200-4TA30 connecting sets are intended for connecting
the plug-in base with busbars or cable lugs. These connecting
withdrawable version.
• The circuit breaker located inside the withdrawable version
sets are included in the scope of supply of the 3-pole base can be moved between an operating position (ON-OFF)
3VT2 725-.AA36-0AA0 or 4-pole 3VT2 725-.AA46-0AA0 switch- and a checking position (withdrawn).
ing units.
Other connecting sets are also available.

per PU
approx.
kg
Plug-in base
3-pole version B 3VT9 200-4PA30 1 unit 1.766
Withdrawable version base

same as plug-in base, but with additional side panels and racks
3-pole version B 3VT9 200-4WA30 1 unit 3.497
4-pole version B 3VT9 200-4WA40 1 unit 3.200

2/8 Siemens LV 36 · 2011
© Siemens AG 2011


Version Conductor Type of DT Order No. PS* Weight
cross-section S connection per PU
approx.
mm2 kg
Terminals for fixed-mounted circuit breakers
Connecting sets for 3-pole version
16 ... 150 1 unit 0.240
Box terminals
1 set = 3 units
Cu cables,
flexibars
B 3VT9 200-4TC30
2
Terminals for 25 ... 150 Cu/Al cables B 3VT9 215-4TD30 1 unit 0.200
circular conductors
150 ... 240 Cu/Al cables B 3VT9 224-4TD30 1 unit 0.339
Terminals for circular conductors

for enhancing termination point protection to IP20
use the 3VT9 200-8CB30 terminal cover
2 x 25 ... 150 Cu/Al cables B 3VT9 215-4TF30 1 unit 0.520
Terminals for 6 x 6 ... 35 Cu/Al cables B 3VT9 203-4TF30 1 unit 0.300
circular conductors,
for 6 cables
Terminals for rear connection Cu/Al busbars B 3VT9 200-4RC30 1 unit 0.237
Terminals for front connection Cu/Al busbars, B 3VT9 200-4TA30 1 unit 0.120
1 set = 3 units cable lugs,
flexibars
Included in every supply of switching units
Auxiliary conductor terminals 1,5 ... 2,5; Cu flexible B 3VT9 200-4TN30 1 unit 0.017
4 ... 6 conductors
Front connection bars

for increased pole spacing -- Cu/Al busbars B 3VT9 200-4ED30 1 unit 0.300
cable lugs,
flexibars
for increased pole spacing -- Cu/Al busbars B 3VT9 200-4EE30 1 unit 0.447
cable lugs,
flexibars
Single terminals for 3- or 4-pole versions

Box terminal 16 ... 150 Cu cables, B 3VT9 200-4TC00 1 unit 0.320
1 set = 1 unit flexibars
Terminal for 25 ... 150 Cu/Al cables B 3VT9 215-4TD00 1 unit 0.280
circular conductors
1 set = 1 unit
1 set = 1 unit 150 ... 240 Cu/Al cables B 3VT9 224-4TD00 1 unit 0.280
1 set = 1 unit 2 x 25 ... 150 Cu/Al cables B 3VT9 215-4TF00 1 unit 0.680
1 set = 1 unit 2 x 150 ... 240 Cu/Al cables B 3VT9 224-4TF00 1 unit 0.680
Terminals for 6 x 6 ... 35 Cu/Al cables B 3VT9 203-4TF00 1 unit 0.100

circular conductors,
for 6 cables
Terminal for rear connection Cu/Al busbars B 3VT9 200-4RC00 1 unit 0.320

Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/9
© Siemens AG 2011

Further accessories

per PU
approx.
kg
Insulating barriers
Included in the scope of supply of the switching unit;
in case the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is fed-in from below
2 (power supply connected to terminals 2, 4, 6), it is necessary in most
cases to install these barriers also on the bottom side
• set of two pieces, for 3-pole version B 3VT9 300-8CE30 1 unit 0.077
• one piece, additionally needed for 4-pole version B 3VT9 300-8CE00 1 unit 0.050
Terminal cover, degree of protection IP20

Increases degree of protection of the connection point to IP20
when using 3VT9 224-4TD30, 3VT9 215-4TF30,
3VT9 224-4TF30 or 3VT9 203-4TF30 block type terminals,
intended for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions.
• 3-pole version B 3VT9 200-8CB30 1 unit 0.098
Locking device for knob B 3VT9 200-3HL00 1 unit 0.013
Enables locking the circuit breaker in „switched off manually“ position.
For locking the device, you can use up to three padlocks with a
shank diameter of max. 6 mm
Bolt sealing inset B 3VT9 200-8BN00 1 unit 0.001

Provides sealing for:
• trip unit
• accessory compartment cover
• terminal cover
• rotary operating mechanism
• motorized operating mechanism
Additional cover for trip units B 3VT9 200-8BL00 1 unit 0.080
Provides protection for trip units
Connecting cable B 3VT9 300-4PL00 1 unit 0.020

For connecting the circuit breaker/switch disconnector accessories in
withdrawable version (can also be used for plug-in and fixed-mounted
version)
Position signalling switch B 3VT9 300-4WL00 1 unit 0.020
For indicating the position of the circuit breaker located in the plug-in
base or withdrawable version base
Coding set B 3VT9 200-4WN00 1 unit 0.002

Prevents insertion of wrong switching unit
into the plug-in base or withdrawable version base
Pushbutton cover B 3VT9 300-3MF20 1 unit 0.054

For motorized operating mechanism

2/10 Siemens LV 36 · 2011
© Siemens AG 2011

■ Design
Installation and connection Recommended cross-sections of cables, busbars and flexibars
for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions
Main circuit
• The main circuit is connected with Cu or Al busbars, or with Rated current Permissible cross-section Busbars
cables and cable lugs. In S WxH
Cu Al Cu Al
• Connecting sets are available for additional connecting op-
tions (see page 2/9). A mm2 mm2 mm mm
• Generally, conductors from the power supply are connected 40 10 16 2

to input terminals 1, 3, 5 and conductors from the load to ter- 50 10 16
minals 2, 4, 6. But it is possible to exchange this connection 63 16 25
(exchanging input and output terminals without limiting rated 80 25 35
short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity Icu).
100 35 50 20 x 2 25 x 2
• In case of feed-in from below, the circuit breakers/switch dis- 125 50 70 25 x 2 25 x 3
connectors must be fitted with 3VT9 300-8CE30 insulating
barriers also next to and between terminals 2, 4, 6. 160 70 95 25 x 3 25 x 4
200 95 120 25 x 4 25 x 5
• We recommend painting the connecting busbars with different
colors. 250 120 150 25 x 5 25 x 6
• Input and output connectors/busbars must be mechanically

reinforced in order to avoid transferring electrodynamic forces
to the circuit breaker during short circuiting. Maximum circuit breaker/switch disconnector loads
in accordance with the ambient temperature
deionizing space of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is 3VT2 circuit breaker/switch disconnector connection to pole
not obstructed (see page 2/43). by 1 x 120 mm2 Cu cable
Auxiliary circuits 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
• Switches, shunt trip units or undervoltage trip units are con- 250 A 250 A 250 A 250 A 250 A
nected using flexible 0.5 ... 1 mm2 Cu conductors.
• Motorized operating mechanism and auxiliary circuits of the
plug-in base or withdrawable version base are connected with
a connector.

Order No. Maximum Maximum permissible conductor cross-section
permitted
current Cable type
Imax Sector-shaped con- Sector-shaped Round Round conductor, Busbars and Technical
ductor, stranded conductor, solid conductor, stranded solid cable lugs information
WxH

3VT9 200-4TA30 250 25 x ...
3VT9 200-4RC30 250 25 x ... 2/47, 2/58
3VT9 200-4TF00
3VT9 200-4TC30 250 16 ... 150 Cu 10 ...150 Cu 16 ... 150 10 ...150 Cu
3VT9 200-4TC00
3VT9 215-4TD30 250 25 ... 150 Cu/Al 16 ...150 Cu/Al 25 ... 150 Cu/Al 16 ... 150 Cu/Al
3VT9 215-4TD00
3VT9 224-4TD30 250 150 ... 240 Cu/Al 120 ... 240 Cu/Al 150 ... 240 Cu/Al 120 ... 240 Cu/Al 2/45, 2/58
3VT9 224-4TD00
3VT9 215-4TF30 250 2 x (25 ... 150) Cu/Al 2 x (16 ... 150) Cu/Al 2 x (25 ... 150) Cu/Al 2 x (16 ... 150) Cu/Al 2/46, 2/58
3VT9 215-4TF00
3VT9 224-4TF00
3VT9 203-4TF00
3VT9 200-4ED30 250 2/47
3VT9 200-4EE30 250 2/48
3VT9 200-4TN30 10/16 1,5 ... 2,54 ... 6 Cu flexible conductor
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/11

© Siemens AG 2011

Description Circuit breakers Switch disconnector
Order numbers 3VT2 725-2AA36/46/56-0AA0, 3VT9 225-6DT00
3VT2 725-3AA36/46/56-0AA0
Standards EN 60947-2, IEC 60947-2 EN 60947-3, IEC 60947-3
Approval marks
2 Number of poles 3, 4
Rated current In A 100, 160, 200, 250 --
Rated uninterrupted current Iu A 250
Rated operational current Ie A -- 250
Rated operational voltage Ue V AC max. 690 AC max. 690
DC max. 440
Utilization category (selectivity) AC 690 V A --
Utilization category (switching mode)
• AC 609 V -- AC-23 B
• DC 440 V -- DC-23 B
Rated short-time withstand current Ue = AC 690 V Icw/t 2,5 kA/1 s 3 kA/5 s
Series Ue 3VT2 N 3VT2 H Ue --
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (rms value) Icu 60 kA 100 kA AC 230 V --
36 kA 65 kA AC 415 V
16 kA 25 kA AC 500 V
10 kA 13 kA AC 690 V
Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity (rms value) Ics/Ue 30 kA 50 kA AC 230 V --
18 kA 36 kA AC 415 V
8 kA 13 kA AC 500 V
5 kA 8 kA AC 690 V
Rated short-circuit making capacity (peak value) Icm/Ue 75 kA 140 kA AC 415 V 4 kA/AC 15 V, 4 kA/AC 440 V
Off-time at Icu ms 10 --
Losses per pole at In = 250 A W 18
Mechanical endurance cycles 30 000
Electrical endurance (Ue = AC 415 V ) cycles 3 000
Switching frequency cycles 120
/hr
Operating force N 80
Pollution degree 3
Plug-in design ✓/+
Withdrawable design ✓/+
Accessories
Switches – auxiliary/relative/signal/leading ✓/✓/✓/✓
Shunt trip unit/with alarm switch ✓
Undervoltage trip unit/with leading switch/with alarm switch ✓/✓
Front rotary operating mechanism/lateral operating mechanism at the ✓/✓
right/left hand side
Mechanical interlocking of rotary operating mechanisms, by Bowden wire ✓/✓
Motorized operating mechanism/with operations counter ✓/✓
Locking-type knob ✓
Bolt sealing inset/additional cover for trip unit ✓/✓
✓ available + in preparation
-- unavailable
2/12 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Schematics
3-pole version
Recommended wiring of the

control circuits
Q3
L+ Plug-in device/Withdrawable device
2 4 1 1 3 5
2
ON -4WA30
SO 1
S
B OFF -4PA30
Motor drive Auxiliary trips/Leading contact Main circuit
3VT9 300-2AJ00
1 3 5
3VT9 300-1U.00
3VT9 300-1U.10
10.Y1
10.Y1
A1
A1
3VT9 300-1S.00
10.Y3
3VT9 2..-6..
A
X3 9 7 3 4 1 5
I>
I>
NC NO
or or or V Q
S5 M P U< U U< B
C
T1
T2
TEST T3
MP
10.Y2
10.Y2
10.Y4
A2
A2
8 6 2 2 1
B2
X3 X4 J 2 4 6
Acc. comp. no.10 -4WA30
NSO0_00089
PE N–
YC SO 2 SO 3
Ext.oper. -4PA30
counter
1 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 6
Plug-in device/Withdrawable device
Connecting cable MP 3VT3 200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 M Motor
P Energy storage device
X2
X3 Connector to connect control circuits
Switches
X4 Connector for external operations counter
signal relative auxiliary auxiliary
S5 Switch to signal AUTO (NO-C) / MANUAL (NC-C) modes
1.3
1.1
1.2
1.4
2.3
2.1
2.2
2.4
3.3
3.1
3.2
3.4
2.3
3.3
2.1
3.3
2.1
3.1
YC 3VT9 300-3MF10 external operations counter

A B Recommended wiring of the control circuits (not included in
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
the scope of supply of the operating mechanism)

ON, OFF Pushbutton
S Switch for energy storage (switched on = automatic storage,
switch may be continuously switched on)
Q3 Motorized operating mechanism circuit breaker
B J 3VT2 725-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit
3VT9 300-2AG10
or or
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AE10
3VT9 300-2AF10
Q Main contacts
T1, T2, T3, T41) Current transformers
V Trip-free mechanism
TEST Pushbutton to test trip unit
or or or or or or or 3VT9 200-4PA30 3-pole plug-in base
NSO0_00090
1.4
1.2
1.1
2.4
2.2
2.1
3.4
3.2
3.1
2.4
3.4
2.2
3.4
2.2
3.2
3VT9 200-4WA30 3-pole withdrawable version base

acc. c. no. 1 acc. c. no. 2 acc. c. no. 3 acc. c. no. 2 + 3 X1, X2 3VT9 300-4PL00 connecting cable
SO1, SO2, SO3 Contacts signalling position of circuit breaker/switch discon-
X1 nector in plug-in base or withdrawable version base
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 (Position signalling switch 3VT9 300-4WL00)
Connecting cable 3VT9 300-14.00 Undervoltage trip unit
3VT9 300-15.00 Shunt trip unit
1)
3VT9 300-14.10 Undervoltage trip unit with leading contact
Only for 4-pole version of 3VT2 725-.AA46-0AA0 switching unit.
3VT9 300-2AJ00 Leading contact
acc. c. no. Accessory compartment number
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/13

© Siemens AG 2011

4-pole version
control circuits
Q3
2 4 1 1 3 5 N
ON -4WA30
S SO 1
2 B OFF -4PA30
Motor drive Auxiliary trips/Leading contact Main circuit
3VT9 2..-6..0 1 3 5 7
3VT9 300-2AJ00
B1
10.Y1
10.Y1
A1
A1
3VT9 300-1U.00
3VT9 300-1U.10
10.Y3
3VT9 300-1S.00
A
X3 9 7 3 4 1 5
I>
I>
NC NO
or or or V Q
S5 M P U< U U< B
C
T1
T2
TEST T3
T4
MP
10.Y2
10.Y2
10.Y4
A2
A2
8 6 2 2 1
B2
X3 X4 J 2 4 6 8
Acc. comp. no. 10 -4WA30
PE N–
NSO0_00091
YC SO 2 SO 3
Ext.oper. -4PA30
counter
1 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 6 N
Connecting cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
X2
Switches
signal relative auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary
1.3
1.1
1.2
1.4
2.3
2.1
2.2
2.4
3.3
3.1
3.2
3.4
2.3
3.3
2.1
3.3
2.1
3.1
4.3
4.1
4.2
4.4
5.3
5.1
5.2
5.4
6.3
6.1
6.2
6.4
A
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
B
3.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3.1 3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
4.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

4.1 3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
5.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
6.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
2.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
2.1 3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
or or
3.4 3VT9 300-2AG10
3.2 3VT9 300-2AE10

3.4 3VT9 300-2AF10
or or or or or or or or or or or or or
NSO0_00092
1.4
1.2
1.1
2.4
3.4
2.4
2.2
2.2
4.4
5.4
5.1
6.4
6.1
acc.c. no. 1 acc. c. no. 2 acc. c. no. 3 acc.c. no. 2 + 3 acc. c. no. 4 acc. c. no. 5 acc. c. no. 6
X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Connecting cable
2/14 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
■ Overview
The electronic trip unit is a separate and interchangeable unit, ETU MP trip units
which has to be ordered in addition to the 3VT2 switching unit.
By exchanging the trip unit, the range of the rated current of the L I
circuit breaker can be easily changed.
Ir
Trip units for 3VT2 switching units are available for current values t
of In = 100, 160 and 250 A. The ETU LP feature rated currents of
160, 200 and 250 A. The trip units (including regulation of -60%)
cover a current range from 40 to 250 A. tr
2
Several different trip units are available. Some have adjustable
characteristics (in order to match the protected device and to
achieve the required selectivity). Ii
ETU LP, DP, MP and MPS trip units are intended for 50 ms
3-pole 3VT2 725-.AA36-0AA0 switching units and 4-pole 3VT2
NSO0_00215
0 ms
725-.AA46-0AA0 switching units with disconnecting of the N
pole.
ETU LP trip units I
ETU MP trip units have more characteristics with adjustable Ir, tr
L I and Ii.
ETU MPS trip units
t
L S I
Ir
t
tr
Isd
NSO0_00502
tsd
I
NSO0_00214
ETU LP trip units have one type of characteristic and fixed-set Ir

and Ii settings.
I
ETU DP trip units
ETU MPS trip units have more characteristics with adjustable Ir,
L I tr, Ii and tv.
Ir ETU DPN trip units
t
ETU DPN trip units are intended for 4-pole 3VT2 725-AA56-0AA0
switching units with protected N pole. They have more charac-
teristics with adjustable Ir , tr , Ii and IN.
L I
Ir
t
Ii IN
tr
NSO0_00506
I
ETU DP trip units have one type of characteristic with adjustable Ii
Ir and Ii.
NSO0_00531
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/15

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
■ Function
Trip units ETU LP, DP, MP and MPS - description of function 1. Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L
Proper functioning of trip units does not depend on the current • The time-dependent trip unit ETU DP is adjusted with the Ir
waveform in the main circuit. The function of the trip unit is sup- switch. The Ir switch adjusts the rated current of the circuit
ported by a microprocessor, which processes a sampled breaker, with the characteristic shifting on the current axis. The
signal of the power circuit and recalculates it to obtain an rms trip unit is set to one type of characteristic.
value. Therefore, the trip units are suitable for protecting circuits • The time-dependent trip units ETU MP, MPS and DPN are ad-
where the sinusoidal current is distorted by high harmonics
2 (e.g. circuits with controlled rectifiers, power factor compensa-
justed with two switches, Ir and tr. The first (Ir) switch adjusts
the circuit breaker’s rated current. The characteristic moves
tors, pulse loading, and the like). along the current axis.
All the trip units protect a circuit against short-circuiting and By turning the other switch (tr), the time is adjusted after which
overloading. The tripping characteristics are independent of the the circuit breaker will trip while passing through 7.2 Ir. The
ambient temperature. The trip unit is fixed to the switching unit tripping characteristic thus moves on the time axis. Using the
by two bolts. The transparent cover over the adjustment controls tr switch, it is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics.
can be sealed (with sealing wire). ETU MP and MPS trip units have 4 characteristics for motor
protection and 4 characteristics for protecting lines.
Setting the tripping characteristic Breaking times correspond to trip unit classes 10, 20, 30. By
changing tr, it is possible to select the trip unit characteristic
The tripping characteristic of the trip units is defined by standard according to the required motor starting characteristic (light,
EN 60947-2. For trip units ETU DP, MP, MPS and DPN, the char- medium, heavy or very heavy starting).
acteristic is adjusted with latched switches located on the trip ETU DPN trip units have 8 characteristics for protecting lines
unit. or transformers.
A visual demonstration on setting the tripping characteristic is It is not possible to turn the circuit breaker back on immedi-
available in the SIMARIS design software (Tool for Dimensioning ately after the time-dependent trip unit has been actuated and
Electrical Power Distribution). the circuit breaker has tripped. The trip unit must be allowed
to cool off (it has a thermal memory). The thermal memory can
L is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal be disabled by turning the switch from the normal “Tt” position
protection. to the “T0” position. In the “T0” position the time-dependent trip
S is a zone of medium overcurrents and includes long-distance unit remains active, and only its thermal memory is deacti-
short-circuit protection for lines. Intentional delay in tripping of vated. Switching off the thermal memory should be used only
these low short-circuit currents can be used to achieve selectiv- in well-justified cases, and with the knowledge that there could
ity of protective devices. For MPS trip units, the delay can be set be rising temperature in the protected device, causing re-
at 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms. peated tripping.
I is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against 2. Delayed time-independent trip unit S
ultimate short-circuit currents. For MP trip units, the time delay This trip unit characteristic is available only in ETU MPS trip
can be set at 0 or 50 ms. units. It is used to set up a selective cascade of circuit breakers.
It is set up using parameters Isd and tv. Isd is an n-multiple of cur-
rent Ir (Isd= n × Ir). Isd is a short-circuit current that, within the
span of Ii to Ii, will trip the circuit breaker with delay tv, where tv is
a delay set up for switching off the trip unit. The delayed time-
independent trip unit actuates the circuit breaker if the current in
the circuit reaches at least the preset n-multiple and lasts at least
the preset delay time tv.
3. Time-independent instantaneous trip unit
(short-circuit trip unit) I
• For trip units ETU DP, MP and DPN, the time-independent in-
stantaneous trip unit is adjusted with the Irm switch. The Irm
switch is used for setting up the short-circuit current that,
when reached or exceeded, causes instantaneous tripping of
the circuit breaker.
2/16 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Tripping characteristics of ETU LP, DP, MP, MPS and DPN Isd = 0 ms, min
trip units with load
IN = 0.5 Ir
The tripping characteristic from the cold state indicates the trip-
ping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment Trip units ETU LP - Lines protection
when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing through the • Provides protection for lines with low starting currents
circuit breaker.
The 3VT9 2..-6AB00 trip unit is intended only for
The tripping characteristic tripped from warm state indicates the 3VT2725 -.AA36-0AA0 or 3VT2725 -.AA46-0AA0 switching unit.
tripping times during which it is assumed that, before the mo- The LP trip unit has a thermal memory that cannot be disabled.
ment when an overcurrent develops, current is flowing through
the circuit breaker.
The rated currents of the trip units are given by their order num-
bers and correspond to a standardized series of currents (see 2
specifications table). The short-circuit trip unit is fixed-set at
Characteristics of electronic trip units are independent of the 4 × In.
ambient temperature and are plotted in a cold state. Digital trip
units enable simulation of a trip unit in warm state. The tripping One of the advantages of the LP trip unit is its simplicity, because
times become shorter in a steady state, as shown in the following it does not require any adjustment. Therefore, it is intended for
diagram. The steady state is a period during which the charac- less complicated applications.
teristic does not change. If the circuit breaker is loaded with a re-
duced current for at least 30 minutes, the tripping times will be Specifications
cut by a half. If the load is less than 70% of Ir , the tripping time Order No. Rated current In Instantaneous short circuit protection
does not become shorter. Ir
NSO0_00217 A A
3VT9 216-6AB00 160 640
1.0
k [-] 3VT9 200-6AB00 200 800
3VT9 250-6AB00 250 1000
0.8
0.6 NSO0_00218
10000
T 5000 Ir
0.4 t [s]
2000
1000
0.2 500
200
L
100
0.0
50 60 70 80 90 100 50
I r [%]
20
Decrease of tripping time with load 10 In = 160 A
5 In = 200 A
T - When tripping from the “warm” state, the tripping time of the In = 250 A
characteristic is cut short during the standstill time tu by coeffi- 2
cient k.
1
Thermal standstill time of the characteristics I
0.5
For all trip units, the thermal standstill time is tu ≥ 30 min. During 0.2
this time, the tripping time tv is cut short from the cold-state char- 0.1
acteristic by the coefficient k.
0.05 Ii
The real tripping time is ts = k x tv
0.02
Example 0.01
0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
The shortening constant can be read from the graph. With
x In
steady current 85% of Ir the real tripping time will be shortened
to:
ts = 0.74 x tv
k [–] time shortening coefficient
Ir [A] adjusted rated current of the trip unit
tv [s] tripping time of the trip unit derived from the characteristic
ts [s] real tripping time of the trip unit tripped from warm state
tu [s] standstill period for particular characteristics
Trip units are preset by the manufacturer
Ir = min
Restart = T(t)
Ii = min, 0 ms
tr = TV, t(t), min
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/17

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Trip units ETU DP - Distribution protection Adjustable specifications
• Provides protection for lines and transformers Order No. Rated current Overload pro- Restart Instantaneous
The 3VT9 2..-6AC00 trip unit is intended only for In tection Ir short circuit
protection Ii
3VT2725-.AA36-0AA0 or 3VT2725-.AA46-0AA0 switching units.
Operation of the trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The A A
trip unit is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled 40
by turning a switch on the front panel from position T(t) to position 43
T(0). After disabling the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit re- 46
mains active. The operational state 70% of Ir is signalled by an
2 LED indicator that flashes green in a 1.5 s interval. As the load 48
50
grows, the blinking frequency of the diode increases. In case of
a load larger than 110% of Ir, this LED will turn red and will begin 55
to blink red just before tripping. 58
Located on the lower part of the DP trip unit cover are two pho- 3VT9 210-6AC00 100 61 T(0) 4 x lr
tocells for communicating with the prospective signalling unit. 63 T(t) 8 x lr
DP trip units have tripping characteristics especially designed 69
for practical purposes that provide for optimal exploitation of 72
transformers up to 1.5 Ir. 76
DP trip units offer simple adjustment of the tripping characteris- 80
tics. Set-up includes only the rated current and the short-circuit 87
tripping level at 4 Ir or 8 Ir. 91
Tripping characteristics 100
NSO0_00219 63
10000
Ir 69
5000 min. max.
x
t [s] Ir Ii 72
2000
80
1000
87
500
91
200 100
L
100 3VT9 216-6AC00 160 110 T(0) 4 x lr
50 115 T(t) 8 x lr
20 120
10 125
In = 100 A
5 In = 160 A 130
3 3
2 In = 250 A 137
1 144
0.5 150
0.2 I 160
0.1 100
0.05 8x 8x
110
In = 100 A 4x 4x Ii
0.02 115
0.01 125
0.1 137
0.05 8x 8x
144
In = 160 A 4x 4x Ii
0.02 160
0.01 3VT9 225-6AC00 250 172 T(0) 4 x lr
0.1 180 T(t) 8 x lr

0.05 190
In = 250 A 8x 8x
4x 4x Ii
200
0.02
0.01 210
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 220
x In 231
243
250
2/18 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Trip units ETU MP - Motor protection Adjustable specifications
• Provides protection for motors and generators Order No. Rated Over- tr (7,2 x Ir) Restart Instantaneous short
• Can protect lines and transformers cur- load circuit protection Ii
rent In protec-
The 3VT9 2..-6AP00 trip unit is intended only for 3VT2725-.AA36- tion Ir
0AA0 and 3VT2725-.AA46-0AA0 switching units. The operation A A s kA ms
of the MP trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The MP trip 40 1 (TV 1) T(0) 0,125
unit is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by
turning a switch on the front panel from position T(t) to position 43 3 (TV 3) T(0 0,25
T(0). After disabling of the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit
remains active.
46
48
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
T(0
T(0)
0,4
0,6 0
2
When one or two phases fail (due to current greater than Ir in the 50 20 (M 20) T(0 0,8
remaining phases), in the M-characteristic mode, the switch will 55 15 (M 15) T(0) 1,0
open with a 4 s delay (so called undercurrent tripping). 58 8 (M 8) T(0 1,25
Another parameter for adjusting the MP trip unit consists of the 3VT9 210-6AP00 100 61 3 (M 3) T(0 1,5
rated current and short-circuit tripping level. The time delay of 63 3 (M 3) T(t) 1,5
the short-circuit trip unit can be set to 0 or 50 ms. The operational 69 8 (M 8) T(t) 1,25
state 70% of Ir is signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green
72 15 (M 15) T(t) 1,0
in a 1.5 s interval. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of
the diode increases. In case of a load larger than 110% of Ir, this 76 20 (M 20) T(t) 0,8 50
LED will turn red and will begin to blink red just before tripping. 80 20 (TV 20) T(t) 0,6
Located on the lower part of the MP trip unit cover are two pho- 87 10 (TV 10) T(t) 0,4
tocells for communicating with the prospective signalling unit. 91 3 (TV 3) T(t) 0,25
MP trip units have tripping characteristics especially designed 100 1 (TV 1) T(t) 0,125
for practical purposes that provide for optimal exploitation of 63 1 (TV 1) T(0) 0,2
transformers up to 1.5 Ir. A total of 8 characteristics can be set
69 3 (TV 3) T(0 0,4
on the trip unit. Mode “M” provides 4 characteristics suitable for
protecting motors and mode “TV” provides 4 characteristics for 72 10 (TV 10) T(0 0,6
protecting transformers and lines. The shape of each character- 80 20 (TV 20) T(0) 1,0
istic can be changed with a selector switch. 87 20 (M 20) T(0 1,3 0
91 15 (M 15) T(0) 1,6
100 8 (M 8) T(0 2,0
3VT9 216-6AP00 160 110 3 (M 3) T(0) 2,4
115 3 (M 3) T(t) 2,0
120 8 (M 8) T(t) 2,0
125 15 (M 15) T(t) 1,6
130 20 (M 20) T(t) 1,3
137 20 (TV 20) T(t) 1,0 50
144 10 (TV 10) T(t) 0,6
150 3 (TV 3) T(t) 0,4
160 1 (TV 1) T(t) 0,2
100 1 (TV 1) T(0) 0,35
110 3 (TV 3) T(0 0,5
115 10 (TV 10) T(0 0,75
125 20 (TV 20) T(0) 1,0 0
137 20 (M 20) T(0 1,25
144 15 (M 15) T(0) 1,5
160 8 (M 8) T(0 2,0
3VT9 225-6AP00 250 172 3 (M 3) T(0) 2,5
180 3 (M 3) T(t) 2,0
190 8 (M 8) T(t) 2,0
200 15 (M 15) T(t) 1,5
210 20 (M 20) T(t) 1,25
220 20 (TV 20) T(t) 1,0 50
231 10 (TV 10) T(t) 0,75
243 3 (TV 3) T(t) 0,5
250 1 (TV 1) T(t) 0,35
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/19

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
NSO0_00220
10000 Ir 10000 Ir M
min. max.
TV min. max.
5000 5000
t [s] Ir tr 0 ms 50 ms t [s] Ir tr 0 ms 50 ms
2000 Ii 2000 Ii
1000 1000
500 500
20
200 200
2 100
L
100
L
50 tr 50 tr
20
20
20 20 20
15 15
10 In = 100 A
10 10 10 In = 100 A 8 8
5 In = 160 A 5 In = 160 A
3 3 3 3
In = 250 A In = 250 A
2 2
1 1 1 1
0.5 0.5
I I
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 0.05
1.25 1.25
In = 100 A 0.125 0.25 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.5 I i [kA] In = 100 A 0.125 0.25 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.5 I i [kA]
0.02 0 0.02 0
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 2.0
0.05 2.0
In = 160 A 0.2 0.4 0.6 1.0 1.3 1.6 2.4 I i [kA] In = 160 A 0.2 0.4 0.6 1.0 1.3 1.6 2.4 I i [kA]
0.02 0 0.02 0
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 0.05
In = 250 A 0.35 0.5
1.25
0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 I i [kA] In = 250 A 0.35 0.5 0.75 1.0
1.25
1.5 2.0 2.5 I i [kA]
0.02 0 0.02 0
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
2/20 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Trip units ETU MPS - Motor protection with timing selectivity Adjustable specifications
• Provides protection for motors and generators Order No. Rated Over- tsd (7.2 x Ir) Restart Short circuit protec-
• Can protect lines and transformers cur- load tion (short time de-
• Enables adjusting time delay of time-independent trip unit rent In protec- layed) Ii
tion Ir
The 3VT9 2..-6AS00 trip unit is intended for 3VT2725-.AA36-
A A S kA ms
0AA0 or 3VT2725-.AA46-0AA0 switching units. The operation of
the trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is 40 1 (TV 1) T(0) 3
equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turn- 43 3 (TV 3) T(0) 5 0
ing a switch on the front panel from position T(t) to position T(0).
After disabling of the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit re-
46
48
10 (TV 10)
20 (TV 20)
T(0)
T(0)
7
9
2
mains active.
50 20 (M 20) T(0) 3
When one or two phases fail (due to current greater than Ir in the 55 15 (M 15) T(0) 5 100
remaining phases), in the M-characteristic mode, the switch will
58 8 (M 8) T(0) 7
open with a 4 s delay (so called undercurrent trip unit).
3VT9210-6AS00 100 61 3 (M 3) T(0) 9
Another parameter for adjusting the MPS trip unit is the rated 63 3 (M 3) T(t) 3
current and tripping level of the delayed short-circuit trip unit.
The time delay (tsd) can be set on the delayed short-circuit trip 69 8 (M 8) T(t) 5 200
unit at 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms. The operational state 70% of Ir is 72 15 (M 15) T(t) 7
signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green in a 1.5 s inter- 76 20 (M 20) T(t) 9
val. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of the diode in- 80 20 (TV 20) T(t) 3
creases. In case of a load larger than 110% of Ir, this LED will turn
87 10 (TV 10) T(t) 5 300
red and will begin to blink red just before tripping.
91 3 (TV 3) T(t) 7
Located on the lower part of the MPS trip unit cover are two pho- 100 1 (TV 1) T(t) 9
tocells for communicating with the prospective signalling unit.
63 1 (TV 1) T(0) 3
MPS trip units have tripping characteristics especially designed 69 3 (TV 3) T(0) 5 0
for practical purposes that provide for optimal exploitation of
72 10 (TV 10) T(0) 7
on the trip unit. Mode “M” provides 4 characteristics suitable for 80 20 (TV 20) T(0) 9
protecting motors, and mode “TV” provides 4 characteristics for 87 20 (M 20) T(0) 3
protecting transformers and lines. The shape of each character- 91 15 (M 15) T(0) 5 100
istic can be changed with a selector switch. 100 8 (M 8) T(0) 7
3VT9216-6AS00 160 110 3 (M 3) T(0) 9
115 3 (M 3) T(t) 3
120 8 (M 8) T(t) 5 200
125 15 (M 15) T(t) 7
130 20 (M 20) T(t) 9
137 20 (TV 20) T(t) 3
144 10 (TV 10) T(t) 5 300
150 3 (TV 3) T(t) 7
160 1 (TV 1) T(t) 9
100 1 (TV 1) T(0) 3
110 3 (TV 3) T(0) 5 0
115 10 (TV 10) T(0 7
125 20 (TV 20) T(0)) 9
137 20 (M 20) T(0) 3
144 15 (M 15) T(0) 5 100
160 8 (M 8) T(0) 7
3VT9225-6AS00 250 172 3 (M 3) T(0) 9
180 3 (M 3) T(t) 3
190 8 (M 8) T(t) 5 200
200 15 (M 15) T(t) 7
210 20 (M 20) T(t) 9
220 20 (TV 20) T(t) 3
231 10 (TV 10) T(t) 5 300
243 3 (TV 3) T(t) 7
250 1 (TV 1) T(t) 9
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/21

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
NSO0_00221 NSO0_00222
10000 Ir 10000 Ir M
min. max.
TV
5000 min.
n max.
5000
t [s] Ir tr Isd t [s] Ir tr Isd
2000 tv 2000 tv
1000 1000 20
15
500 500
8
20
200 200
3
2 100
50
10
L 100
50
L L
20 3 20
20 20
10 In = 100 A 10 In = 100 A 15
10 In = 160 A
5 In = 160 A 5 8
1 tr [s] tr [s]
In = 250 A In = 250 A
2 3 2 3
S S
1 1
1
0.5 0.5
300 300
200 200
0.2 0.2
tv [ms] 100 tv [ms] 100
0.1 I 0.1
In = 250 A
In = 100 A
In = 160 A
I I
In = 250 A
In = 100 A
In = 160 A
3 x Ir
5 x Ir
7 x Ir
9 x Ir
5 x Ir
7 x Ir
9 x Ir
3 x Ir
0.05 0.05
0.02 0 0.02 0
I sd I sd
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
Ir tr I sd tv In Ir tr I sd tv In
2/22 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Trip units ETU DPN - Distribution protection with protected Adjustable specifications
N pole
Order No. Rated Over- tR (7,2 x Ir) Restart Instantaneous short
• Provides protection for lines and transformers in TN-C-S and cur- load circuit protection Ii
TN-S networks rent In protec-
tion Ir
The 3VT9 2..-6BC00 trip unit is intended only for the
A A S kA ms
3VT2 725-.AA56-0AA0 switching unit. The operation of the DPN
trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The DPN trip unit is 40 1 T(0) 3
equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turn- 43 T(0) 5 0
ing a switch located on the front panel from position T(t) to posi-
tion T(0). After disabling of the thermal memory, the thermal trip
46
48
3 T(0)
T(0)
7
9
2
unit remains active.
50 10 T(0) 3
The rated current Ir, delay for switching off the trip unit at 7.2 Ir, 55 T(0) 5 100
and the tripping level of the short-circuit tripping can be ad-
58 20 T(0) 7
justed.
3VT9 210-6BC00 100 61 T(0 9
The operational state is signalled by an LED indicator that 63 20 T(t) 3
flashes green in a 1.5 s interval. As the load grows, the blinking
frequency of the diode increases. In case of a load larger than 69 T(t) 5 200
110% of Ir, this LED will turn red and will begin to blink red just 72 10 T(t) 7
before tripping. 76 T(t) 9
Located on the lower part of the DPN trip unit cover are two pho- 80 3 T(t) 3
tocells for communicating with the prospective signalling unit. 87 T(t) 5 300
The current of the fourth pole (N pole) is adjusted using the IN 91 1 T(t) 7
switch as a multiple of the Ir current. Measuring of current on the 100 T(t) 9
fourth pole can be disabled by turning the button to the “OFF” 63 1 T(0) 3
position. 69 T(0) 5 0
Tripping characteristics 72 3 T(0) 7
NSO0_00223
80 T(0) 9
10000 87 10 T(0) 3
IN = 0.5 x Ir
1 x Ir
0.75 x Ir
5000 IN
t [s] 91 T(0) 5 100
IN Ir tr Ii
2000 Ir 100 20 T(0) 7
N min. max.
1000 20 3VT9 216-6BC00 160 110 T(0) 9
500 10
115 20 T(t) 3
200 120 T(t) 5 200
3
100 125 10 T(t) 7
50 1 130 T(t) 9
20 137 3 T(t) 3
L 20
10 144 T(t) 5 300
10
5 150 1 T(t) 7
t r [ S]
2 3 160 T(t) 9
1 100 1 T(0) 3
1
0.5 110 T(0) 5 0
In = 100 A 115 3 T(0) 7
0.2
In = 160 A I
0.1 In = 250 A 125 T(0) 9
2 x Ir
4 x Ir
7 x Ir
9 x Ir
0.05 Ii 137 10 T(0) 3

0.02 144 T(0) 5 100
0.01 160 20 T(0) 7
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
3VT9 225-6BC00 250 172 T(0) 9
x In
IN Ir tr In Ii 180 20 T(t) 3
190 T(t) 5 200
200 10 T(t) 7
210 T(t) 9
220 3 T(t) 3
231 T(t) 5 300
243 1 T(t) 7
250 T(t) 9
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/23

© Siemens AG 2011

Auxiliary switches
■ Overview
Order number according to contact arrangement
Arrangement Order No. Number of contacts Contact types
of contacts
01 3VT9 300-2AC10 (20) 1 NO
20 3VT9 300-2AE10 (20) 2 NO
01 3VT9 300-2AD10 (20) 1 NC
2 02 3VT9 300-2AG10 (20) 2 NC
11 3VT9 300-2AF10 (20) 1+1 NC + NO
001 3VT9 300-2AH10 (20) 1 NC + NO
Functions and names of switches according to their location in

accessory compartments
Accessory Switch name Switch function
compartment
1 Signalling Signalling switch to indicate the state of
Location of accessory compartments in 3VT2 circuit breakers the circuit breaker by the trip unit
2 Relative Relative switch to indicate tripping of the
circuit breaker by trip units, TEST push-
button or by OFF pushbutton on the mo-
torized operating mechanism
3, (4, 5, 6)1) Auxiliary Auxiliary switch to indicate the position of
the main contacts
10 Leading Leading switch to make/break in advance
of the main contacts
1)
Accessory compartments 4, 5, 6 for 4-pole version only.
■ Function
States of auxiliary switches located in the switching unit accessory compartments
Circuit breaker state Accessory compartment
1 2 3 (4 ... 6)1) 10 2 and 3 2 and 3 2 and 3 1 2 3
Toggle position of circuit breaker
3VT9 300-2AG10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AE10
3VT9 300-2AF10
3VT9 300-2AJ00
3VT9 300-1U.10
State of the main contacts
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
Switched off manually or 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1

electrically by operating
mechanism
Switched off by trip unit 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
Switched off by auxiliary 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

trip unit or by TEST button
or the trip pushbutton on
the motorized operating
mechanism
0 = contact open, 1 = contact closed

1)
Accessory compartments 4, 5, 6 for 4-pole version only.
2/24 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Auxiliary switches
State of switches located in the switching unit accessory compartments
Switches
early contact signaling relative auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary
3VT9 300-2AJ00
10.Y1
10.Y3
1.3
1.1
1.2
1.4
3.3
3.1
3.2
3.4
2.3
3.3
2.1
3.3
2.1
3.1
4.3
4.1
4.2
4.4
5.3
5.1
5.2
5.4
6.3
6.1
6.2
6.4
2.3
2.1
2.2
2.4
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
2.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

2
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
4.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
4.1 3VT9 300-2AD10

3VT9 300-2AH10
5.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
6.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
or or
3.4 3VT9 300-2AG10
3.2 3VT9 300-2AE10

3.4 3VT9 300-2AF10
10.Y2
or or or
10.Y4
or or or or or or or or or or
NSO0_00224
1.4
1.2
1.1
2.1
3.4
3.1
2.4
2.2
2.2
4.4
5.4
5.1
6.4
6.1
2.4
acc. c. no. 10 acc. c. no. 1 acc. c. no. 2 acc. c. no. 3 acc. c. no. 2 + 3 acc. c. no. 4 acc. c. no. 5 acc. c. no. 6
Order No. 3VT9 300-2A.00 3VT9 300-2A.101) 3VT9 300-2AJ00 3VT9 300-2AH10 3VT9 300-2AH201)
Rated operational voltage Ue V AC 60 ... 500 AC 5 ... 60 AC 250 AC 24 ...250 AC 5 ..60
DC 60 ... 500 DC 5 ... 60 DC 24 ...250 DC 5 ...60
Rated isolation voltage Ui V 500 250
• AC-12 -- 0.004 ... 0.5A/5 V -- -- --
• AC-15 6 A/240 V, 4 A/400 V, 0.004 ... 0.5A/5 V 1 A/AC 250 V 1.5 A/AC 250 V --
2A/500 V
• DC-12 -- -- -- -- 0.01 A/DC 60 V
• DC-13 0.4 A/240 V, 0.004 ... 0.01/60 V -- 0.2 A/DC 250 V --
0.3 A/400 V,
0.2 A/500 V
Thermal current Ith A 10 0,5 -- 6 0.5
Arrangement of contacts 01, 10, 02, 11, 20 02, 11, 20 001 001
(connected switch)
1)
3VT9 300-2A.10 is not suitable for controlling electromagnetic loads
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/25

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Overview
Order number of shunt trip units
according to the rated operating voltage
Order No. Ue
3VT9 300-1SC00 AC/DC 4, 40, 48 V
3VT9 300-1SD00 AC/DC 10 V
3VT9 300-1SE00 AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 V
2
Order number of undervoltage trip units
Order No. Rated operating voltage Ue
3VT9 300-1UC00 AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V
3VT9 300-1UD00 AC/DC 110 V
3VT9 300-1UE00 AC 230, 400, 500/DC 220 V
Location of accessory compartments in 3VT2 circuit breakers
The particular rated operating voltage of the shunt trip unit is set up by
jumpers located on the right hand side in the trip unit. Default setting is
always the maximum value.
■ Function
Shunt trip units
Circuit breaker switched off by the shunt trip unit Circuit breaker states and toggle positions of the circuit breaker
NSO0_00226
Circuit breaker state Toggle positions of circuit breaker

Main contacts
Switched on
2 1 20
4 3 1
6 5
0 Switched off by trip units, or by TEST
Auxiliary switch
button or by the trip pushbutton on the
compartment
20 motorized operating mechanism

accessory
1
3.4 3.3 20 Switched off manually or electrically by
0
3
the operating mechanism

Auxiliary switch
20 L+ L+
1
3.2 3.1
0
Relative switch
compartment
30
accessory
1
10.Y1
A1
A1
2.4 2.3
0
3VT9 300-1O.00
2
Relative switch
30
1
3VT9 300-1S.00
2.2 2.1
0
t [ms]
U< or U<
10.Y2
NSO0_00230
A2
A2
N- N-
2/26 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Circuit breaker switched off by the undervoltage trip unit Circuit breaker states and toggle positions of the circuit breaker
Circuit breaker state Toggle positions of circuit breakers
NSO0_00231
Main contacts
Switched on
2 1 20
4 3 1
6 5
0 Switched off by trip units, by TEST
Auxiliary switch
button or by the trip pushbutton on
compartment
20 the motorized operating mechanism
2
accessory
1
3.4 3.3 20 Switched off manually or electrically
0
3
by operating mechanism
Auxiliary switch
20
1
3.2 3.1
0 Arrangement, number and type of contacts
Relative switch
Arrangement of contacts Number of contacts Contact types
compartment
30
accessory
1 02 2 NC
2.4 2.3
0
2
11 1+1 NC + NO
Relative switch
20 2 NO
30
1
2.2 2.1 L+ L+
0
Early switch
compartment
20
accessory
1
10
10.Y2 10.Y1
0
Early switch
10.Y1
A1
A1
10.Y4 10.Y3 3VT9 300-1O.00
20
10.Y2 10.Y1 1
10.Y4 10.Y3
0
3VT9 300-1S.00
t [ms]
U< or U<
10.Y2
NSO0_00230
A2
A2
N- N-
Shunt trip units Undervoltage trip units
Order No. 3VT9 300-1S.00 Order No. 3VT9 300-1U.00 3VT9 300-1U.101)
Rated operating voltage Ue V AC 24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 Rated operating voltage Ue V AC 24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500
DC 24, 40, 48, 110, 220 DC 24, 40, 48, 110, 220
Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60 Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60
Input power at 1.1 Ue AC < 3 VA Input power at 1.1 Ue VA AC <3
DC < 3 W W DC <3
Functional description U ≥ 0,7Ue the circuit breaker must trip Functional description 1)
U ≥ 0.85 Ue
(circuit breaker can switch on)
Time to switch-off ms 20
U ≤ 0.35 Ue
Continuous load Yes
(the circuit breaker must trip)
Connection cross-section S mm2 0.5 ... 1
Time to switch off ms 20
Continuous load Yes
(connected trip unit)
Location in accessory 10
compartment No. Terminal protection IP20
1) (connected trip unit)
Cannot be used in combination with 3VT9200-3M..0 motorized operating
mechanism. Location in accessory 10
compartment No.
Leading switch
Rated operating voltage Ue V -- AC 250
Rated frequency fn Hz -- 50/60
Rated operating current Ie/Ue V -- AC 1 A/259
Arrangement of contacts -- 02, 11, 20
Connector cross-section S mm2 -- 0.5 ... 1
Terminal protection -- IP20
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/27

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Overview
Rotary operating mechanism Mechanical interlocks and mechanical interlock for parallel
switching
The following components of the rotary operating mechanisms
are required: • Mechanical interlocks for fixed-mounted versions require the
following components:
• To switch the switching unit: - 2 x 3VT9 200-3HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism
- 3VT9 300-3HE10 or 3VT9 300-3HE20 black knob - 2 x 3VT9 200-3HE/HF.. knob
- 3VT9 300-3HF20 red knob
2 • To switch the switching unit through the switchgear cabinet
door:
• Mechanical interlocking with Bowden wire is suitable for fixed-
mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions
- 3VT9 300-3HJ..extension shaft • Mechanical interlocking with Bowden wire requires the follow-
- 3VT9 300-3HG/HH.. coupling driver for door-coupling oper- ing components:
ating mechanism - 2 x 3VT9 200-3HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism
- 3VT9 300-3HE/HF.. knob - 1 x 3VT9 200-3HE/HF.. knob
■ Design
circuit breaker:
Operation through the switchgear cabinet door (Fig. 2)
Fig. 1: Rotary operating mechanism with knob Operation through side wall of switchgear cabinet
3VT9 200-3HC/HD10.. rotary operating mechanism
Enhanced safety for operator:
lock the circuit breaker in position “switched off manually“. The
unit and knob of the rotary operating mechanism can be
locked by three padlocks with a shank diameter up to 6 mm
• Each coupling driver prevents the cabinet door from being
opened when the circuit breaker is in on-state or after tripping.
Types 3VT9300-3HG10 and 3VT9300-3HG20 prevent the cab-
inet door from being opened when the circuit breaker is in the
Fig. 2: Rotary operating mechanism with extension shaft, coupling driver
and knob
state "switched off manually" and when the rotary operating
mechanism knob is locked out.
The rotary operating mechanism makes it possible to actuate the • Two circuit breakers with rotary operating mechanisms can be
circuit breaker by turning a knob, e.g. in order to switch ma- provided with mechanical interlocking or with parallel me-
chines on and off. The modular concept of the operating mech- chanical switching (see page 2/30).
anisms allows simple mounting on the switching unit after the ac-
cessory compartment cover is removed. The operating
mechanism and its accessories must be ordered separately,
(see page 2/6).
• The rotary operating mechanism is attached to the switching
unit of the circuit breaker
• The coupling driver is attached to the switchgear door. It pro-
vides degree of protection IP40 or IP66
• The knob is placed on the rotary operating mechanism or on
the coupling driver
• The extension shaft is available in two versions, standard
(length 365 mm - can be shortened) and telescopic (adjust-
able length 245 ... 410 mm).
2/28 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Features
Order No. Description Color Permits operator to Degree of Switchgear cabinet door is locked Length
lock the circuit break- protection when circuit breaker is mm
er in OFF mode
manually and
locked
3VT9 200-3HA10 Rotary operating mechanism grey no -- -- -- --
3VT9 200-3HA20 Rotary operating mechanism grey yes -- -- -- --
3VT9 200-3HB20
3VT9 200-3HC10
yellow
grey
yes
no
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2
3VT9 200-3HD10 Rotary operating mechanism grey no -- -- -- --
3VT9 300-3HE20 Knob, lockable with padlock black yes -- -- -- --
3VT9 300-3HF20 Knob, lockable with padlock red yes -- -- -- --
3VT9 300-3HH10 Coupling driver black -- IP66 yes no --
3VT9 300-3HH20 Coupling driver yellow -- IP66 yes no --
3VT9 300-3HJ10 Extension shaft, can be shortened -- -- -- -- -- 365
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/29

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Function
3VT9 300-8LA00 Mechanical interlocking 3VT9 300-8LB00 Mechanical parallel switching
2
breakers may be switched off simultaneously. Interlocking can between two 3VT2 circuit breakers or between 3VT2 and 3VT3
be used between two 3VT2 circuit breakers or between one circuit breakers. Each circuit breaker must be furnished with a
3VT2 and one 3VT3 circuit breaker. Both circuit breakers must rotary operating mechanism and at least one of them with a
be furnished with rotary operating mechanisms (at least one of knob.
them with a rotary operating mechanism and knob).
When using a mechanical interlock it is required to comply with When using a mechanical interlock for parallel switching it is re-
the dimensions shown in the figure and in the table. quired to comply with the dimensions shown in the figure and in
the table.
1 3 5
L
RP-BD-CK10
PS
PS
PS
X X
TEST TEST
NSO0_00234
NSO0_00233
Left Right switching unit Left Right switching unit

switching switching
3VT2 3VT2 3VT3 3VT3 3VT2 3VT2 3VT3 3VT3
unit unit
3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole1)
X L X L X L X L X L X L X L X L
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
3VT2 3P 105 112 140 145.5 122.5 128.5 181 185.5 3VT2 3P 105+7 112+7 140+7 145.5+7 122.5+7 128.5+7 x x
3VT2 4P 105 112 140 145.5 122.5 128.5 181 185.5 3VT2 4P 105+7 112+7 140+7 145.5+7 122.5+7 128.5+7 x x
3VT3 3P 122.5 128.5 157.5 145.5 140 145.5 185 189 3VT3 3P 122.5+7 128.5+7 157.5+7 145.5+7 140+7 145.5+7 x x
3VT3 4P 122.5 128.5 157.5 145.5 140 145.5 185 189 3VT3 4P 122.5+7 128.5+7 157.5+7 145.5+7 140+7 145.5+7 x x
1)
Switching unit 3VT3 4P (4-pole version) must be located on the right side.
RP-BD-CK10
RP-BD-CK10
PS
PS
PS
SP
SV
PS
PS
PS
SP
SV
TEST
TEST
NSO0_00235
2/30 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

3VT9 300-8LC.0 Mechanical interlocking • Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers/
switch disconnectors, so that they cannot both trip simultane-
ously, but only one of them at a time. Both circuit
breakers may be turned off simultaneously.
• The 3VT9 200-8LC10 mechanical interlocking is intended for
two 3VT2 circuit breakers. 3VT9 300-8LC20 interlocking is in-
tended for one 3VT2 circuit breaker and one 3VT3.
• Circuit breakers can be delivered in fixed-mounted, plug-in
and withdrawable versions.
2
Order No. of mechanical 3VT9 200-8LC10 3VT9 300-8LC20
interlocking
Circuit breaker types 3VT2 3VT3
3VT2 3VT2
Circuit breaker installation in switchgear and controlgear

assemblies
Detailed information is included in the "Instructions for use",
which is available on our website:
www.siemens.com/technical assistance
NSO0_00236
109
ON ON
0
=4
0 ... 700
min
R
OFF OFF
45
TEST TEST
30 min. 80
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/31

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Design
• The mechanism can be furnished with an electromechanical
operations counter that may be installed in the drive cover or
outside of the circuit breaker (e.g. in the switchgear door). A
metal holder included in the scope of supply of the external
operations counter. Connecting is facilitated with connectors.
• The motorized operating mechanism can be locked in off po-
sition using as many as three padlocks with shank diameter
2 max. 4.3 mm.
• A 3VT9 300-3MF20 cover can be attached to the ON-OFF
switch of the motorized operating mechanism, and then
sealed with sealing wire. The cover prevents turning on the cir-
cuit breaker from the drive panel.
• Extension cable 3VT9 300-3MF00 has a connector on one
The motorized operating mechanism is equipped with spring side that connects to the connector located on the motor
storage units. The energy stored in the springs makes it possible mechanism and conductors on the other side that connect, for
to switch the circuit breaker on in less than 50 ms. Releasing the example, to a terminal block.
spring energy storage unit and tripping the circuit breaker is en-
sured by a closing coil. The motorized operating mechanism Order No. 3VT9 200-3M..0
can trip the circuit breaker in 800 ms. This method of tripping is Operational voltage Ue V AC 24, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500
suitable for most technological applications. When faster circuit DC 24, 48, 110, 220
breaker tripping is required (e.g., because an emergency STOP Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60
button was pressed), it is possible to use the motorized mecha-
Control pulse length for storing ms 400 ... ∞1)
nism in combination with an undervoltage trip unit or a shunt trip
unit. Control pulse length ms 20 ... 7001), 400 ... ∞1)
• The motorized operating mechanism front panel contains a Time before switching on ms < 50
selector switch for selecting the drive modes. There is also the Time before switching off ms 800
possibility to remotely indicate the selector switch state. Frequency of cycles ON/OFF 3 contact making/min
- The first mode is automatic remote control (selector switch in Frequency of cycles - 10 contact making
position AUTO). This is the standard position in automatic instant successive ON/OFF
operation. cycles
- The second mode is manual control (selector switch position Mechanical endurance 30000 contact making
MANUAL). In manual mode the motorized operating mecha- Input power AC VA 100
nism does not need any voltage to perform perform open- DC W 100
ing/closing operations. Protection
• Remote switching on and off in position AUTO is carried out
with pushbuttons that must be connected to the motorized op- • AC 24, 48, 110 V; AC 230 V LSN 4C/1; LSN 2C/1
erating mechanism connector. Furthermore, this position • DC 24, 48, 110 V; DC 220 V LSN-DC 4C/1; LSN-DC 2C/1
makes it is possible to control the circuit breaker with the Rated operating current V AC 5 A/250
pushbuttons located on the motorized operating mechanism AUTO/MANUAL switches Ie/Ue DC 0.5A/250
front panel. Order No. 3VT9 300-3MF00
• In MANUAL mode it is possible to switch on and off with the
Number of conductors 12
green and red pushbuttons located on the front panel of the
motorized operating mechanism cover. The function of the re- Conductor cross sections S mm2 0.35
mote control ON button in MANUAL mode is locked out, Conductor lengths cm 60
whereas the function of the remote control OFF button remains 1) For sequence of control pulses, see 2/36.
active for safety reasons.
• The motorized operating mechanism, as opposed to the cir-
cuit breaker, recognizes only two fixed positions. In the first
position the circuit breaker is ON. When the circuit breaker is
tripped in AUTO mode by the trip unit or shunt/undervoltage
trip units, then because of mechanical link between the circuit
breaker and the motor mechanism, a pulse will be generated
to automatically wind up the spring of the storage unit. The
motor mechanism can be wound up automatically by perma-
nent closing switch S. In the second fixed position the circuit
breaker is switched off and the loaded drive is ready to switch
the breaker on after it has received the setting pulse.
• The motorized operating mechanism makes it possible to con-
trol the circuit breaker after the loss of control voltage. In MAN-
UAL and AUTO modes, it is possible to wind up the storage
unit by repeated rotation of the foldable handle. After charging
the spring mechanism with spring energy, it is possible to
switch the circuit breaker on and off with the control buttons lo-
cated on the front panel of the motor mechanism.
• The front panel incorporates a storage unit status indicator to
indicate what state the 3VT3 motor mechanism unit storage is
in and whether it is possible to switch the circuit breaker on.
The 3VT3 motor mechanism is also able to remotely indicate
the storage status. A corresponding signal is issued to the ter-
minal strip. 3VT2 motor mechanism have optional designs,
alternatively with MANUAL/AUTO indication.
2/32 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Function
Circuit breaker switched on/off by the motorized operating mechanism
Circuit breaker switched on by the motorized operating mecha- Circuit breaker switched off by the motorized operating mecha-
nism – electrically by pushbutton ON nism – electrically by pushbutton OFF
NSO0_00239
NSO0_00238
2 1 50 2 1 800
4
6
3
5
1
0
4
6
3
5
1
0
2
Auxiliary switch Auxiliary switch
compartment
compartment
50 800
accessory
accessory
1 1
3.4 3.3 3.4 3.3 20
3
0 0
3
40 800
1 1
3.2 3.1 3.2 3.1
0 0
Relative switch Relative switch
compartment
compartment
accessory
accessory
1 1
2.4 2.3 2.4 2.3
0 0
2
2
1 1
2.2 2.1 2.2 2.1
0 0
Early switch Early switch
compartment
compartment
20 900
accessory
accessory
1 1
10
10
10.Y2 10.Y1 0 10.Y2 10.Y1 0

10.Y4 10.Y3
Early switch 10.Y4 10.Y3
Early switch
20 900
10.Y2 10.Y1 1 10.Y2 10.Y1 1
10.Y4 10.Y3 10.Y4 10.Y3
0 0
t [ms] t [ms]
Wiring diagram Circuit breaker states and toggle positions of the circuit breaker
Recommended wiring of the control circuits Circuit breaker state Toggle positions of circuit breaker
Q3 Switched on
L+
Switched off by trip units, or by TEST

ON button or by the trip pushbutton on the
motorized operating mechanism
S
Switched off manually or electrically by
OF F
B
the operating mechanism
Motor drive
Wiring diagram description
9 7 3 4 1 5 Symbol Description
X3
MP 3VT9 200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
M Motor
P storage mechanism
NC NO
S5
C
S5 Switch indicating AUTO/MANUAL modes
YC external 3VT9300-3MF10 operations counter
M P
B recommended wiring of the control circuits (not included
in operating mechanism order)
ON make pushbutton
MP OFF break pushbutton
S Switch for energy storage
8 6 2 2 1 (switched on = automatic storage, may be
X3 X4
continuously switched on)
Q3 Motorized operating mechanism circuit breaker
PE N-
Ext. oper.
counter
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/33

© Siemens AG 2011

Tripping of the circuit breaker with motorized operating mecha- Wiring diagram
nism by the trip unit (switch S – automatic spring charging)
Circuit breaker switched on by the motorized operating mecha-
nism (electrical ON signal) and switched off by the shunt trip unit
NSO0_00241
Main contacts
2 1 20 Recommended wiring of the
4 3 1 control circuits
6 5
0 Q3
Auxiliary switch
L+
compartment
accessory
20
1
2 3.4 3.3 20 ON
3
0
Auxiliary switch S
OFF
20 B
1
3.2 3.1 Motor drive
0
Relative switch
B1
compartment
A1
accessory
30 520
1
X3 9 7 3 4 1 5
3VT9 300-1O.00
3VT9 300-1S.00
2.4 2.3
2
0
Relative switch
30 520
1
2.2 2.1 NC NO
0
Early switch
or
compartment
S5 M
accessory
30 520 P U< U
1 C
1.4 1.3
1
0
Early switch
30 520
1
1.2 1.1
0 MP
NSO0_00243
t [ms]
A2
8 6 2 2 1
B2
X3 X4 J
Tripping of the circuit breaker with motorized operating mecha- acc. c. no.10
nism by a shunt trip unit or undercurrent trip unit (switch S – PE YC N-
automatic spring charging) N-
Ext. oper.
counter
NSO0_00242
Main contacts
Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanism
2 1 20
4 3 1 (electrical ON signal) and switched off by the undervoltage trip
6 5
0 unit
Auxiliary switch
compartment
20
accessory
1 control circuits
3.4 3.3 20 Q3
0
3
Auxiliary switch L+
20
1 ON
3.2 3.1
0 S
Relative switch
OFF
compartment
B
30 520
accessory
1 Motor drive
2.4 2.3
0
2
Relative switch
B1
A1
30 520
1 X3 9 7 3 4 1 5
3VT9 300-1U.00
3VT9 300-1S.00
2.2 2.1
0
t [ms]
NC NO
or
S5 M P U< U
C
MP
NSO0_00244
A2
8 6 2 2 1
B2
X3 X4 J
acc. c. no.10
PE N-
YC
N-
Ext.oper.
counter
2/34 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Recommended actuating pulses Description of charts
Circuit breaker switched on/off by motorized operating mecha- Symbol Description
nism – switch S permanently closed (automatic spring charging) HK main contacts
or open
PS auxiliary switch
50 RS relative switch
800
1 R OFF circuit breaker closes instantly, by trip unit
HK
0 IMP S pulse to charge spring mechanism
800 > 600

IMP ON
IMP OFF
make pulse for motorized operating mechanism
break pulse for motorized operating mechanism
2
PS 1
0 X random segment of time
> 100
NSO0_00245
> 1400
400 … ∞ 20 … 700
1
IMP OFF IMP ON Circuit breaker states and toggle positions of the circuit breakers
0
t [ms]
Circuit breaker state Toggle positions of circuit breakers
Switched on
Circuit breaker switched off by trip unit or shunt/undervoltage
trip units and switched on by the motorized operating mecha-
nism – switch S permanently closed (automatic spring charging) Switched off by trip units, or by TEST
the motorized operating mechanism
50 Switched off manually or electrically
1 by the operating mechanism
HK
0
520 > 880

RS 1
0
NSO0_00246
> 1400
20 … 700
1
IMP ON
0
t [ms]
R OFF
Circuit breaker switched off by the rip unit or shunt/undervoltage

trip units and switched on by the motorized operating mecha-
nism – S switch closed only for storing
50
HK 1
0
X + 520 > 880

RS 1
0
> 100
NSO0_00247
X > 1400
400 … ∞ 20 … 700
1
IMP S IMP ON
0
t [ms]
R OFF
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/35

© Siemens AG 2011

Use of 3VT9 200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism Recommended control pulses for switching of the 3VT2 circuit
in the automatic standby system breakers by the motorized operating mechanism after their
switching off by a shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit in the
Wiring diagram of the motorized operating mechanism of the automatic standby system
circuit breaker
Control circuit
NSO0_00080
Q3 > 1400
L+ 200 … 700
1
2 ON
0
IMP ON
50
S
OFF 1
B HK
0
Motor drive
520 > 880
1
B1
A1
RS
0
X3 9 7 3 4 1 5
3VT9 300-1U.00
3VT9 300-1S.00
20
200
SV 1
0
NC NO
or SP 1
S5 M P U 100
MP
400 … ∞ 200 … 700
NSO0_00078
1
IMP S IMP ON
0
A2
8 6 2 2 1
B2
X3 X4 J
cav. no.10 50
X > 1400
PE N- 1
YC HK
Cycle 0
counter
X + 520 > 880
RS 1
Symbol Description 0
M Motor 20
>200
P Energy storage device SV 1
X3 Connector for connection of control circuits 0
X4 Connector for external cycle counter
S5 Switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL SP 1
(NC-C) mode
0
YC External 3VT9 300-3MF10 cycle counter t [ms]
B Recommended connection of control circuits
(is not included in the motorized operating
mechanism supply)
Symbol Description
ON Pushbutton
HK Main contacts
OFF Pushbutton
RS Relative switch
S Switch for storage (closed = automatic storage;
it can be closed permanently) SV Pulse for shunt trip unit
Q3 Motorized operating mechanism circuit breaker- SP Pulse for undervoltage trip unit
see page 2/32 IMP ON Motorized operating mechanism make pulse
IMP OFF Motorized operating mechanism storage pulse (generated
by S switch)
In a standby system, if a Bowden cable is used for mechanical Switched on
interlocking, then an auxiliary trip unit should be used to switch
the circuit breaker off. Otherwise, the first attempt of switching a
standby circuit breaker may fail. Switched off by trip units, TEST or REVISION pushbutton
Switched off manually or by motorized operating mecha-

nism electrically (wound up state)
2/36 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

for plug-in version
■ Overview
Plug-in bases Position signalling
3VT9 300-4WL00 position signalling switch
The plug-in base may be provided with a maximum of four

switches (for 4-pole version, max. 6 switches) for signalling the
3VT9 200-4PA30 Locking plug-in base against connected/removed position.
base inserting the circuit breaker/disconnector
States of 3VT9 300-4WL00 switches in the plug-in base
The plug-in version of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is according to the circuit breaker position
intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid ex-
Accessory compartment 11 ... 14 (19, 20)1)
change of the circuit breaker is needed.
Circuit breaker position 1
• The plug-in base includes complete accessories for assem-
bling a circuit breaker/switch disconnector in plug-in design
from the original fixed-mounted version 2 4
• The components of the plug-in base are: Connected 0 1

- supporting part of the plug-in base Removed 1 0
- 2 connection sets (total of 6 terminals) for fitting on to the
switching unit 0 = contact open, 1 = contact closed
1)
- interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switching off Accessory compartments 19 and 20 are for 4-pole version only.
of the circuit breaker for handling – inserting and removal)
Technical specifications
- set of mounting bolts for securing circuit breaker into plug-in
base (to secure plug-in base into switchboard, a set of Order No. 3VT9 300-4WL00
mounting bolts is used that is included in the scope of supply
Rated operational voltage Ue V AC 400
of the 3VT2 725-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit. AC 250
Main circuit Rated isolation voltage Ui V AC 500
• The 3VT9 200-4TA30 connecting set is used for connecting Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60
with busbars or cable lugs and is included in the scope of sup- Rated operational current Ie/Ue
ply of the 3VT9 275-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit 3 A/400 V
AC-13
• For connecting in another way, it is necessary to use connect-
DC-15 0.15 A/250 V, 3 A/125 V, 4 A/30 V
ing sets (see page 2/9)
• The type of connections must comply with our recommenda- Thermal current Ith A 6
tions (see page 2/11). Arrangement of contacts 001
Auxiliary circuits Connector cross-section S mm2 0.5 ... 1
(connected switch)
A wiring diagram showing the circuit breaker situated in a plug-

in mounting base and outfitted with accessories, is shown on
These are connected using a 3VT9 300-4PL00 15-wire cable. page 2/13.
Coding
3VT9 200-4WN00 coding set Plug-in base with motorized operating mechanism
The plug-in base and the circuit breaker can be provided with a
coding set, which prevents inserting any other circuit breaker Circuit breaker, plug-in version, with motorized operating mechanism
into the plug-in base.
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/37

© Siemens AG 2011

for plug-in version
Recommended wiring of the circuit breaker in plug-in design
Symbol Description
Motor drive control circuits M Motor

P energy storage device
Q3
L+ X3 terminal strip to connect control circuits
X4 terminal strip for external operations counter
ON S5 Switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL (NC-C) modes
2 B OFF
S YC 3VT9 300-3MF10 external operations counter
B recommended wiring of the control circuits (control circuits
not included in motorized operating mechanism delivery)
Motor drive ON make pushbutton
OFF break pushbutton
S Switch to store energy
X3 9 7 3 4 1 5 Q3 Motorized operating mechanism circuit breaker for
AC 24 V LSN 4C/1
AC 48 V LSN 4C/1
AC 110 V LSN 4C/1
AC 230 V LSN 2C/1
DC 24 V LSN-DC 4C/1
DC 48 V LSN-DC 4C/1
NC NO
DC 110 V LSN-DC 4C/1
S5 M P DC 230 V LSN-DC 2C/1
C
Unplugging the circuit breaker with motorized operating

mechanism
MP • Each time before removing the circuit breaker, we recommend
first to turn the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the motorized oper-
NSO0_00208
ating mechanism to the MANUAL position

8 6 2 2 1 • More operating information is available in the operating in-
X3 X4
structions
PE N– • Not adhering to this procedure or failing to follow the recom-
YC
mended wiring, could mean that the circuit breaker will not
Operating successfully switch on at the first attempt.
counter
2/38 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

for plug-in version
Changes in states of switches when inserting and withdrawing the circuit breaker
State of switches before removing State of switches after removing
inserted position → withdrawn position
Accessory compartment Accessory compartment
1 2 3 (4,5,6)1) 1 2 3 (4,5,6)1)
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT 9300-2AC10
2
Knob position of
circuit breaker
main contacts
State of the
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 4 4 2
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 3 3 1
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
Manually switched off or switched off 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

by motorized operating mechanism
Switched off by trip units 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
Switched off from switched-on state: 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

by means of auxiliary trip unit,
TEST pushbutton or by OFF pushbutton lo-
cated on the motorized operating mecha-
nism

1)
Accessory compartments 4, 5, 6 are for 4-pole version only.
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/39

© Siemens AG 2011

for withdrawable version
■ Design
Withdrawable version mounting base Position signalling
The withdrawable version can be provided with switches for sig-

nalling the position of the circuit breaker, see table.
Circuit breaker installed 3VT9 200-4WA30 Technical specifications
in withdrawable version base withdrawable version base
Order No. 3VT9 300-4WL00
The withdrawable version of the circuit breaker/switch-discon-
nector is intended for demanding industrial applications where Rated operational voltage Ue V AC 400,
rapid exchange of the circuit breaker and frequent checking of AC 250
the circuit are needed. Rated isolation voltage Ui V AC 500
• The withdrawable version base includes all parts needed to Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60
convert a circuit breaker or switch disconnector from fixed- Rated operational current Ie/Ue
mounted version to withdrawable version.
AC-13 3 A/400 V
• The components of the withdrawable version are:
DC-15 0.15 A/250 V, 3 A/125 V, 4 A/30 V
- supporting part of the withdrawable version
- 2 movable side plates Thermal current Ith A 6
- 2 connection sets (total of 6 terminals) for fitting onto the Arrangement of contacts 001
switching unit Connector cross-section S mm2 0.5 ... 1
- interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switching off
of the circuit breaker for handling, inserting and withdrawing) Terminal protection IP20
(connected switch)
- a set of mounting bolts is used to fasten the withdrawable
version mounting base into the switchboard For wiring diagram of the circuit breaker in plug-in base with ac-
Main circuit cessories, see page 2/13.
• The 3VT9 200-4TA30 connecting set is used for connecting States of 3VT9 300-4WL00 switches in withdrawable device
with busbars or cable lugs and is included in the scope of sup- according to circuit breaker and lockout positions
ply of the 3VT2 725-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit
Accessory compartment
ing sets (see page 2/9) 11,12,13,14 15,17 16,18
(19, 20)1) (19, 20)1)
• The type of connections must comply with our recommenda-
tions (see page 2/11). Circuit breaker and lockout 1 1 1
position
Auxiliary circuits 2 4 2 4 2 4
Connected and unlocked 0 1 1 0 0 1

1 1 1 0 1 0
Withdrawn and unlocked 1 0 0 1 0 1
1 0 0 1 1 0
These are connected using the 3VT9 300-4PL00 15-wire cable.
Removed and unlocked 1 0 1 0 0 1
Coding 1 0 1 0 1 0
3VT9 200-4WN00 coding set 0 = contact open; 1 = contact closed
1) Accessory compartments 19 and 20 are for 4-pole version only.
• Operating state is always in locked-out position
• In locked-out position, it is possible to lock the withdrawable
device, so that the circuit breaker cannot be switched on (for
more detailed information, see “Advantages and enhanced
safety for operator”)
The withdrawable version mounting base and the circuit breaker

can be provided with a coding set, which prevents inserting an-
other circuit breaker into the withdrawable version mounting
base.
2/40 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Locking Description
Symbol Description
M Motor
P energy storage device
X3 terminal strip to connect control circuits
X4 terminal strip for external operations counter
S5
YC
Switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL (NC-C) modes
3VT9 300-3MF10 external operations counter
2
B recommended wiring of the control circuits (control cir-
Locking the circuit breaker Locking the withdrawable version cuits not included in motorized operating mechanism
in withdrawable version base against inserting the circuit breaker delivery)
base against tampering ON make pushbutton
Withdrawable version with motorized operating mechanism OFF break pushbutton
S Switch to charge spring mechanism
Q3 Motorized operating mechanism circuit breaker for
AC 24 V LSN 4C/1
AC 48 V LSN 4C/1
AC 110 V LSN 4C/1
AC 230 V LSN 2C/1
DC 24 V LSN-DC 4C/1
DC 48 V LSN-DC 4C/1
Inserting and withdrawing the circuit breaker

Recommended wiring of the circuit breaker in withdrawable with motorized operating mechanism
version with motorized operating mechanism • Each time before inserting or withdrawing the circuit breaker,
we recommend placing the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the mo-
Motor drive control circuits torized operating mechanism to MANUAL position
Q3 • More operating information is available in the operating
L+
instructions
• Not adhering to this procedure or failing to follow the recom-
ON mended wiring, could mean that the circuit breaker will not
S successfully switch on at the first attempt.
B OFF
Motor drive
X3 9 7 3 4 1 5
NC NO
S5 M P
C
MP
NSO0_00208
8 6 2 2 1
X3 X4
PE N–
YC
Operating
counter
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/41

© Siemens AG 2011

Switches in the accessory compartments of the switching unit
Changes in states of the switches when inserting and withdrawing the circuit breaker
1
State before inserted/withdrawn position State after inserted/withdrawn position

Circuit breaker before insertion State of switches before insertion State of switches after insertion
- withdrawn position → - connected position
Circuit breaker before withdrawal State of switches before withdrawal State of switches after withdrawal
- connected position → - withdrawn position
Accessory compartment 1 2 3 (4,5,6)1) 1 2 3 (4,5,6)1)
2
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
3VT9300-2AC10
3VT9300-2AD10
Knob position of circuit
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
breaker
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
Manually switched off or by 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

Switched off from switched-on 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

state: by means of auxiliary trip unit,
TEST pushbutton or by OFF push-
button on the motorized operating
mechanism

1)
2/42 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Overview
Use of insulating barriers and terminal covers with circuit • Terminals 2, 4, 6
breakers and switch disconnectors - If the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is connected to the
source with terminals 2, 4, 6 and if Ue = AC 415 V, it is nec-
Fixed-mounted version essary to use 3VT9 300-8CE30 insulating barriers or a
Front connection 3VT9 200-8CB30 terminal cover.
• Terminals 1, 3, 5 - If insulated conductors are not used for connecting the main
- If Ue = AC 415 V, it is necessary to use 3VT9 300-8CE30 circuit to terminals 2, 4, 6, and flexibars or rear connections
insulating barriers or 3VT9 200-8CB30 terminal covers.
- If insulated conductors are not used for connecting the main
are not used, then it is necessary to use 3VT9 300-8CE30 in-
sulating barriers or 3VT9 300-8CB30 terminal covers.
2
circuit to terminals 1, 3, 5, flexibars or rear connection, it is Rear connection
necessary to use 3VT9 300-8CE30 insulating barriers or a • Neither insulating barriers nor terminal covers have to be
3VT9 200-8CB30 terminal cover. used.
Plug-in and withdrawable versions
Neither insulating barriers nor terminal covers have to be used.
D 1 1 B = 105 C = 80
1 3VT9 200-8CB30
100 … 150
A2
A1
A
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
B=0 C=0
ON ON ON
225
OFF OFF OFF
TEST TEST TEST

NSO0_00105
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
20
B = 20
105 105 105 B = 20
A Minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switch-

disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for con-
nections using insulated conductors, cables, flexibars or with
rear connection)
A1 Minimum insulation length of bare conductors (using
100 mm, or by adding additional insulation for the conductors
with barriers to obtain at least A1 value)
A2 Minimum distance:
• between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and uninsulated
earthed wall (applicable for uninsulated conductors and bus-
bars)
• between circuit breaker/switch disconnector and busbar
• between two circuit breaker/switch disconnectors situated ver-
tically above one another
• between uninsulated connections of two circuit breakers/switch
disconnectors above one another
B, C Minimum distance between circuit breaker/switch disconnector
and uninsulated earthed wall
D Minimum distance between uninsulated conductors
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/43

© Siemens AG 2011

D
Busbar
max. 3 mm
> 15 mm
max. 3 mm
Cable
Flexibar
NSO0_00106
2
AC Ue 230 V 415 V 500 V 690 V

3VT2 H wired with Ik 1) ≤ 100 kA > 36 ... 65 kA ≤ 36 kA ≤ 25 kA ≤ 13 kA
3VT2 N wired with Ik ≤ 60 kA ≤ 36 kA ≤ 16 kA ≤ 10 kA
C < 80 mm A (mm) 50 50 50 50 50
D ≥ 10 mm A1 (mm) 100 150 100 150 150
A2 (mm) 200 250 200 250 250
A (mm) 50 50 50 50 50
D ≥ 30 mm A1 (mm) 100 150 100 150 150
A2 (mm) 150 200 150 200 200
C ≥ 80 mm A (mm) 50 50 50 50 50
D ≥ 10 mm A1 (mm) 100 150 100 150 150
A2 (mm) 150 200 150 200 200
1)
Ik = max. short-circuit current in the protected circuit (rms).
2/44 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Dimensional drawings - 3-pole, fixed-mounted version

35 35 103
150 ... > AC 415 V
100 ... < AC 415 V

2
25 4
Drilling pattern 2
18
35
48 4 x Ø 5.5
60
ON 26°
17°
65
225
154
162
193
167
213
162
2°
29.5
OFF
TEST R 88
121
NSO0_00503
35.5
31.5
16 Ø 8.5
20 35 35
26 105
105 117 5
Fixed-mounted version, front connection (3VT9 224-4TD30 connecting set)
42
35 35 25
35
ON
335
225
248
273
162
193
223
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00107
30
105 Ø 22
105
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/45

© Siemens AG 2011

35 35 40 24
25
2 35
ON
335
244
225
301
162
193
281
224
261
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00109
25
105 Ø 18
Ø 18
105

58
35 35 47
24
24 36
24
35
ON
335
223
269
225
246
287
162
193
213
236
259
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00113
11
25
105 6 x Ø 8.4
105
2/46 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Fixed-mounted version, rear connection (3VT9 200-4RC30 connecting set) Drilling pattern
2
7.5
35
4
35 35 46 105
8.5
21
20
35
48
2
ON
154
162
65
193
225
162
193
OFF
TEST
4 x Ø 5.5
1.5
Ø 8.5
6
NSO0_00115
28
16
16
105 36 35
98
Fixed-mounted version, front connection (3VT9 200-4ED30 connecting set)

105
50 50
35 35
29 4
24
35
ON
273
193
162
225
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00121
36.5
Ø1
1
32 32
12.5
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/47

© Siemens AG 2011

Fixed-mounted version, front connection (3VT9 200-4EE30 connecting set)
35 35
25
3 29 4
2
35
ON
360
308
225
162
193
OFF
TEST
105
Ø 11
32 32
81.5
NSO0_00123
15 25
70 70
Fixed-mounted version, with rotary operating mechanism
42.5 1
NSO0_00118
1 3VT2
2 2 3VT9 200-3HA.0,-3HB.0
1 3 5
3 3 3VT9 300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
50 37
TEST
133
2 4 6
°
90
140 50
25°
2/48 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

1 2
1 3VT2
NSO0_00126
5
2 3VT9 200-3HA.0,-3HB.0
1 3 5 4
3 3 3VT9 300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
70
4 3VT9 300-3HG.0,-3HH.0
37
5 3VT9 300-3HJ.0
6 Outside surface of 2
70
cabinet door
50
TEST
133
2 4 6
6
°
90
140
25° 180 … 495 (-3HJ10)
375 … 540 (-3HJ20)
Cabinet door cut-out

min. 145 27.5
Fixed-mounted version, 3VT9 200-3M..0 motorized operating
4 x Ø 6.5
mechanism
Opening dimensions in switchgear door
for external operation cycle
0
Ø5
55
NSO0_00128
55
Hinge of cabinet door
7.9
R 48
1
14
ax
m
R
MANUAL
AUTO
27
195
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
138
82
NSO0_00129
247
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/49

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Dimensional drawings - 3-pole, plug-in version

Plug-in base 3VT9 200-4PA30 Drilling patterns
25 4
35 35 18
145
1 3 5
227
140
290
227
258
232
278
162
193
140
L R
Ø 4+8 mm 4 x Ø 5.5
2 4 6
20 4 x Ø 5.5
26
75
75
35
NSO0_00132
31.5
31.5
16 Ø 8.5 20 35 35 35 35
26 35
105 105
2/50 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Plug-in base, 3VT9 200-8CB30 terminal cover
1 3 5
105
2
11 12 13 14
400
L R
Ø 4+6 mm
2 4 6
NSO0_00136
105 35
70
103
Plug-in version
ON
290
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00520
105 105
140
157
182
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/51

© Siemens AG 2011

Plug-in version Drilling patterns
2
7.5
46 105 98 98
21
21
4
20
52
8.5
2
ON
258
290
227
258
140
258
OFF
TEST
4 x Ø 5.5
4 x Ø 5.5
1.5
45
Ø 8.5
6
75
R
NSO0_00139
31.5
28
28
16
16
105 36 35 35 35 35
Plug-in version, rotary operating mechanism
TEST
NSO0_00142
175
225
2/52 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Plug-in version, 3VT9 200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
MANUAL
AUTO
2
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
NSO0_00143
282 31
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/53

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Dimensional drawings - 3-pole, withdrawable version

Withdrawable version 3VT9 200-4WA30 Drilling patterns
25 4
35 35 18
2 4 x Ø 5.5
145
1 3 5
4 x Ø 5.5
140
227
290
227
258
232
278
162
193
140
L R
Ø 4+8 mm
2 4 6
20
26
75
75
NSO0_00148
35
31.5
31.5
16 Ø 8.5 20 35 35
26 35
105 105
Withdrawable version, 3VT9 200-8CB30 terminal cover

180
130
105
35
1 3 5
140
400
L R
Ø 4+8 mm
2 4 6
NSO0_00151
105 70
179 103
140 27.5
2/54 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Withdrawable version
Operating position Maintenance position
179 30
65
75
75
65
2
ON
140
140
290
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00153
105 105 105
180 140 170
157 187
182 212
Withdrawable version, rotary operating mechanism

30
75
75
140
140
TEST
NSO0_00156
175 205
225 255
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/55

© Siemens AG 2011

Withdrawable version, 3VT9 200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
30
75
75
2 MANUAL
AUTO
140
140
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
NSO0_00159
282 31 312 31
Withdrawable device, rear connection (3VT9 200-4RC00 connecting sets) Drilling pattern
2
7.5
46 105 98
21
4
20
52
ON
258
140
258
OFF
TEST
4 x Ø 5.5
45
Ø 8.5
75
NSO0_00166
28
16
17
37 35 35
2/56 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Withdrawable device, rear connection (3VT9 200-4RC00 connecting sets) Drilling pattern
35 35 35 103
150 ... > AC 415 V
100 ... < AC 415 V

2
25 4
18
2
35
48 4 x Ø 5.5
60
ON
26°
17°
65
225
154
162
193
167
213
162
2°
29.5
OFF
TEST
R 88
121
NSO0_00169
35.5
31.5
16 Ø 8.5
20 70 35 35
26 105
140 117 5
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/57

© Siemens AG 2011


Fixed-mounted version, front connection (connecting set 3VT9 224-4TD30 + 3VT9 224-4TD00)
35 35 35
2 N 1 3 5
35
ON
335
225
248
273
162
193
OFF
TEST
N 2 4 6
30
140
Fixed-mounted version, front connection (connecting set 3VT9 215-4TF30 + 3VT9 215-4TF00)
35 35 35 40 24
25
35
ON
335
244
225
301
162
193
281
224
261
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00174
25
140 Ø 18
Ø 18
105
2/58 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

105
42 28
35 35 35
25
35
2
ON
294
335
225
248
162
193
319
219
269
OFF
TEST
30 Ø22 Ø22
140
58
35 35 35 47
36
24
35
ON
335
223
269
225
246
287
162
193
213
236
259
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00178
25
11
140 6 x Ø 8.4
105
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/59

© Siemens AG 2011

2
7.5
35
4
35 35 35 46 105
8.5
21
20
35
48
2
ON
65
154
162
193
225
162
193
OFF
TEST
4 x Ø 5.5
1.5
Ø 8.5
6
NSO0_00180
28
16
16
140 36 35
133
77.5 1
NSO0_00183
1 3VT2
2 3VT9 200-3HA.0,-3HB.0
N 1 3 5 2
3 3 3VT9 300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
50 37
TEST
133
N 2 4 6
°
90
140 50
25°
1 2
1 3VT2
NSO0_00185
5
2 3VT9 200-3HA.0,-3HB.0
N 1 3 5 4 3 3VT9 300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
70 3
4 3VT9 300-3HG.0,-3HH.0
37
5 3VT9 300-3HJ.0
70
cabinet door
50
TEST
133
N 2 4 6
6
°
90
140
25° 180 … 495 (-3HJ10)
375 … 540 (-3HJ20)
2/60 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

min. 145 27.5
4 x Ø 6.5
0
Ø5
55
2
NSO0_00128
55
Fixed-mounted version, 3VT9 200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism

Opening dimensions in switchgear door for external operation cycle
7.9
R 48
14
ax
m
R
MANUAL
AUTO
27
195
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
138
82
NSO0_00187
140 247
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/61

© Siemens AG 2011


Plug-in base 3VT9 200-4PA40 Drilling patterns
35 35 35 25 4
35 18
145
N 1 3 5
227
140
227
258
290
232
278
162
193
140
L R
Ø 4+8 mm 4 x Ø 5.5
N 2 4 6
20 4 x Ø 5.5
26
75
75
NSO0_00189
31.5
31.5
16 Ø 8.5 20 35 35 35 35
26 35
140 105
Plug-in base, 3VT9 200-8CB40 terminal cover
105
N 1 3 5
400
L R
Ø 4+8 mm
N 2 4 6
NSO0_00193
140 35
70
103
2/62 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Plug-in version
ON
2
290
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00138
140 105
140
157
182
Plug-in version, rear connection

(connecting set 3VT9 200-4RC30 + 3VT9 200-4RC00) Drilling pattern
7.5
2
46 105
21
4
20
52
ON
258
290
140
258
OFF
TEST
4 x Ø 5.5
45
Ø 8.5
75
NSO0_00195
16
28
16
140 36 35
2
35 35
140
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/63

© Siemens AG 2011

Plug-in version, rotary operating mechanism
2
290
TEST
NSO0_00196
140 175
225
Plug-in version, 3VT9 200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
MANUAL
AUTO
290
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
NSO0_00198
140 282 31
2/64 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011


Withdrawable version, 3VT9 200-4WA40 Drilling pattern
214 25 4
35 35 35 18
4 x Ø 5.5
2
145
N 1 3 5
4 x Ø 5.5
227
140
290
227
258
232
278
162
193
140
L R
Ø 4+8 mm
N 2 4 6
20
26
75
75
NSO0_00202
31.5
35.5
16 Ø 8.5 20 35 35
26 35
140 105
215
Withdrawable version, 3VT9 200-8CB40 terminal cover

130
105
35
N 1 3 5
140
400
L R
Ø 4+8 mm
N 2 4 6
NSO0_00200
140 70
215 103
140 27.5
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/65

© Siemens AG 2011

213 30
65
75
75
65
2
ON
140
140
290
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00203
140 105 105
215 140 170
157 187
182 212
Withdrawable version, rear connection (connecting set 3VT9 200-4RC30 + 3VT9 200-4RC00)
2
7.5
213 46 105 21 133

4
20
65
52
ON
258
290
140
OFF
NSO0_00204
TEST
4 x Ø 5.5
45
Ø 8.5
75
28
16
17
140 37 35
2
215 35 35
2/66 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Withdrawable version, rotary operating mechanism
213 30
65
65
75
75
2
140
140
290
TEST
NSO0_00206
140 175 205
215 225 255
Withdrawable version, 3VT9 200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
213 30
NSO0_00207
75
75
65
65
290
MANUAL
AUTO
290
140
140
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
140 282 31 312 31

215
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 2/67

© Siemens AG 2011

Notes
■ Notes
2/68 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

3
© Siemens AG 2011

up to 630 A

up to 630 A
3/2 General data
3/5 Auxiliary switches · Auxiliary trip units
3/6 Manual/motorized operating mechanism

up to 630 A
3/16 Trip units
3/31 Mechanical interlocking and
parallel switching
3/38 Mounting accessories for plug-in version
3/41 Mounting accessories for withdrawable
version
© Siemens AG 2011

Catalog
General data
■ Overview
Connecting sets
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Switching unit
3
11
12 3
Accessories for plug-in and withdrawable devices

1
13
19 20 21
14
15
17 18 22 23 24 25
Accessories
16
26 NSO0_00211a
27 28 29 30
1 Molded case circuit breaker 11 Rotary operating mechanism 22 Auxiliary switch NC/NO
2 Plug-in device 12 Lateral rotary operating mechanism 23 Auxiliary switch NC/NO
3 Withdrawable device 13 Mechanical parallel switching 24 Auxiliary switch, change-over contact
4 Box terminals 14 Mechanical interlocking 25 Auxiliary switch, early
5 Circular conductor terminal 15 Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire 26 Lockingtype lever
6 Multiple feed-in terminal 16 Motor operating mechanism 27 Sealing inset
7 Multiple feed-in terminal 17 Shunt trip unit 28 Additional cover for
8 Rear connection 18 Undervoltage trip unit overcurrent releases
9 Front connection 19 Connecting cable 29 Terminal cover
10 Auxiliary conductor terminal 20 Position signalling 30 Insulating barriers
21 Keying pins
3/2 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Catalog
■ Overview
Switching unit For recommended cross-sections of cables, busbars and flexi-
bars for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions, see
The switching unit includes: page 3/11.
• Two 3VT9 300-4TA30 connecting sets – for connecting
busbars or cable lugs Circuit breaker
• 3VT9 300-8CE30 insulating barriers
• A set of 4 installation bolts (M5 x 25) The circuit breakers consist of a 3- or 4-pole switching unit and
a trip unit which is available with a choice of different character-
The switching unit must be fitted with a trip unit (circuit breaker) istics.
or a 3VT9 363-6DT00 switch disconnector unit
(switch disconnector) Switch disconnector
For maximum circuit breaker/switch disconnector loads in The switch disconnector consists of a switching unit and a
accordance with the ambient temperature, see page 3/11. switch disconnector unit.

Rated current In Breaking capacity Icu DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU
approx.
3
A kA kg
Switching units
3-pole version
630 36 B 3VT3 763-2AA36-0AA0 1 unit 7.400
630 65 B 3VT3 763-3AA36-0AA0 1 unit 7.400
4-pole version, unprotected N
630 36 B 3VT3 763-2AA46-0AA0 1 unit 7.400
630 65 B 3VT3 763-3AA46-0AA0 1 unit 7.400
4-pole version, protected N
630 36 B 3VT3 763-2AA56-0AA0 1 unit 7.400
630 65 B 3VT3 763-3AA56-0AA0 1 unit 7.400

Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/3
© Siemens AG 2011


Rated current In Current setting of the inverse- time DT Order No. PS* Weight
delayed overload trip units „L“ Ir per PU
approx.
kW A kg
ETU trip units
Line protection, ETU LP, LI function 1)
• for protecting lines with low starting currents
• without Ir regulation
250 250 B 3VT9 325-6AB00 1 unit 0.345
315 315 B 3VT9 331-6AB00 1 unit 0.345
400 400 B 3VT9 340-6AB00 1 unit 0.345
500 500 B 3VT9 350-6AB00 1 unit 0.345
630 630 B 3VT9 363-6AB00 1 unit 0.345
Distribution protection, ETU DP, LI function 1)
• for protecting lines and transformers
3 250
400
100 ... 250
160 ... 400
B
B
3VT9 325-6AC00
3VT9 340-6AC00
1 unit
1 unit
0.261
0.318
630 250 ... 630 B 3VT9 363-6AC00 1 unit 0.320
Distribution protection with N-pole protection,
ETU DPN, LIN function 2)
• for protecting lines and transformers in TN-C-S and TN-S networks
250 100 ... 250 B 3VT9 325-6BC00 1 unit 0.355
400 160 ... 400 B 3VT9 340-6BC00 1 unit 0.355
630 250 ... 630 B 3VT9 363-6BC00 1 unit 0.355
Motor/generator protection, ETU MP, LI function 1)
• for direct protection of motors and generators
• suitable also for protecting lines and transformers
250 100 ... 250 B 3VT9 325-6AP00 1 unit 0.261
400 160 ... 400 B 3VT9 340-6AP00 1 unit 0.321
630 250 ... 630 B 3VT9 363-6AP00 1 unit 0.323
Motor/generator protection, ETU MPS, LSI function 1)
• for direct protection of motors and generators.
• suitable also for protecting lines and transformers
• enables setting time delay of time-independent trip unit
to 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms
250 100 ... 250 B 3VT9 325-6AS00 1 unit 0.260
400 160 ... 400 B 3VT9 340-6AS00 1 unit 0.260
630 250 ... 630 B 3VT9 363-6AS00 1 unit 0.323
630 Switch disconnector unit1) B 3VT9 363-6DT00 1 unit 0.252
1)
Use only with switching unit 3VT3763-.AA36-0AA0 or
3VT3763-.AA46-0AA0.
2)
Use only with switching unit 3VT3763-.AA56-0AA0

3/4 Siemens LV 36 · 2011
© Siemens AG 2011

■ Overview
The circuit breakers can be equipped with Shunt trip units can trip the circuit breaker from a remote loca-
• alarm switches, An undervoltage trip unit trips the circuit breaker automatically
• shunt trip units, when the circuit voltage drops below 70 % Ue. The undervoltage
• undervoltage trip units. trip unit protects motors and other equipment in case of under-

per PU
approx.
AC 50/60 Hz, DC kg
Auxiliary switches and alarm switches
Single NO contacts
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V B 3VT9 300-2AC10 1 unit 0.020
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V B 3VT9 300-2AC20 1 unit 0.120 3
Single NC contacts
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V B 3VT9 300-2AD10 1 unit 0.130
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V B 3VT9 300-2AD20 1 unit 0.130
Double contacts (2 x NO)

AC/DC 60 ... 500 V B 3VT9 300-2AE10 1 unit 0.260
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V B 3VT9 300-2AE20 1 unit 0.260
Double contacts (NO and NC)
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V B 3VT9 300-2AF10 1 unit 0.250
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V B 3VT9 300-2AF20 1 unit 0.250
Double contacts (2 x NC)
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V B 3VT9 300-2AG10 1 unit 0.240
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V B 3VT9 300-2AG20 1 unit 0.240
Changeover contacts
AC/DC 60 ... 250 V B 3VT9 300-2AH10 1 unit 0.013
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V B 3VT9 300-2AH20 1 unit 0.013
Leading contacts
AC/DC 60 ... 250 V B 3VT9 300-2AJ00 1 unit 0.040
Shunt trip units

AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V B 3VT9 300-1SC00 1 unit 0.140
AC/DC 110 V B 3VT9 300-1SD00 1 unit 0.140
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 V B 3VT9 300-1SE00 1 unit 0.140

AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V B 3VT9 300-1UC00 1 unit 0.110
AC/DC 110 V B 3VT9 300-1UD00 1 unit 0.110
with leading contact1)
AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V B 3VT9 300-1UC10 1 unit 0.120
AC/DC 110 V B 3VT9 300-1UD10 1 unit 0.120
1) Not to be used with 3VT9 300-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism.

Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/5
© Siemens AG 2011

■ Overview
Rotary operating mechanisms - 3VT9 300-3HG/HH.. coupling driver for door-coupling
operating mechanism
The rotary operating mechanism must be combined from: - 3VT9 300-3HE/HF.. knob
• For rotary operation of the circuit breaker:
- 3VT9 300-3HA.0 or 3VT9 300-3HB.0 for frontside operation Mechanical interlocks and interlock for parallel switching
- 3VT9 300-3HE10 or 3VT9 300-3HE20 black knob or • Mechanical interlocks for fixed-mounted version must be
- 3VT9 300-3HF20 red knob combined from the following parts:
• For operation through the switchgear cabinet door: - 2 x 3VT9 300-3HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism
- 3VT9 300-3HA.0 or 3VT9 300-3HB.0 for frontside operation - 2 x 3VT9 300-3HE/HF.. knob
- 3VT9 300-3HJ.. extension shaft • Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire is intended for
- 3VT9 300-3HG/HH.. coupling driver fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions
- 3VT9 300-3HE/HF.. knob.
• For operation through side wall of cabinet: • Mechanical interlocks must be combined from the following
- 3VT9 300-3HC10 for right side operation OR parts:
- 3VT9 300-3HD10 for left side operation - 2 x 3VT9 300-3HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism
- 3VT9 300-3HJ..extension shaft - 1 x 3VT9 300-3HE/HF.. knob
3 ■ Selection and ordering data

kg
• lockable with padlock yellow label B 3VT9 300-3HB20 1 unit 0.243

• mounted on the right side,
grey
N B 3VT9 300-3HC10 1 unit 0.300
• not lockable

• mounted on the left side,
grey
N B 3VT9 300-3HD10 1 unit 0.300
• not lockable
Knobs for rotary operating mechanism


To be used with the
3VT9 300-3HE10 or 3VT9 300-3HE20
black knob
Is used in combination with the
3VT9 300-3HF20 red knob
Extension shaft B 3VT9 300-3HJ10 1 unit 0.205

length 365 mm, may be shortened
Extension shaft, telescopic, B 3VT9 300-3HJ20 1 unit 0.255

length 245 ... 410 mm

3/6 Siemens LV 36 · 2011
© Siemens AG 2011

Version DT Order No. PS* Weight per

PU approx.
kg
The mechanical interlocks additionally require the following parts:
• 2 x 3VT9 300-3HA../HB.. rotary operating mechanisms,
• 2 x 3VT9 300-3HE../HF.. knobs
Mechanical interlocks B 3VT9 300-8LA00 1 unit 0.136

Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wirer

• for two 3VT3 circuit breakers B 3VT9 300-8LC10 1 unit 0.393
• for one 3VT2 and one 3VT3 circuit breaker B 3VT9 300-8LC20 1 unit 0.393
3
Motorized operating mechanisms with storage spring
Rated control supply voltage Us
AC/DC 24 V B 3VT9 300-3MJ00 1 unit 1.691
AC/DC 48 V B 3VT9 300-3ML00 1 unit 1.750
AC/DC 110 V B 3VT9 300-3MN00 1 unit 1.752
with operations counter
AC/DC 24 V B 3VT9 300-3MJ10 1 unit 1.750
AC/DC 48 V B 3VT9 300-3ML10 1 unit 1.750
AC/DC 110 V B 3VT9 300-3MN10 1 unit 1.708
Accessories for motorized operating mechanisms
Operations counter with cable, B 3VT9 300-3MF10 1 unit 0.003
length 110 cm
Extension cable for motorized operating mechanism, B 3VT9 300-3MF00 1 unit 0.060
12 wires, length 60 cm

Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/7
© Siemens AG 2011

■ Overview
Plug-in version Withdrawable version
• The plug-in base includes: • The withdrawable version base includes complete accesso-
- complete accessories for assembling circuit breakers/ ries for assembling circuit breakers/switch disconnectors in
switch disconnectors in plug-in design withdrawable version.
- a set of four installation bolts (M5 x 30) for fixing the switching • The circuit breaker inside the withdrawable version base can
unit to the plug-in base be moved between an operating position and a checking po-
• The plug-in base must be outfitted with: sition (withdrawn).
- 3-pole version: 3VT3 763-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit • The withdrawable version base must be fitted with:
- 4-pole version: 3VT3 763-.AA46-0AA0 or - 3-pole version: 3VT3 763-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit or
3VT3 763-.AA56-0AA0 switching unit - 4-pole version: 3VT3 763-.AA46-0AA0 or
For mounting the plug-in version on busbars or cable lugs, 3VT3 763-.AA56-0AA0 switching unit
3VT9 300-4TA30 connecting sets are available. These are in-
cluded in the scope of supply of the 3VT3 763-.AA36-0AA0 3-
pole version ; 3VT3 763-.AA46/56-0AA0... 4-pole version switch-
ing unit. For other types of connection, other connecting sets are
available.
3
Version Max. permissible cross-section S DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU
approx.
mm2 kg
Plug-in bases
4-pole version B 3VT9 300-4PA40 1 unit 3,400
Withdrawable version bases

3-pole version B 3VT9 300-4WA30 1 unit 5,040
4-pole version B 3VT9 300-4WA40 1 unit 4,500

3/8 Siemens LV 36 · 2011
© Siemens AG 2011


Version Max. permissible Type of connection DT Order No. PS* Weight
cross-section S per PU
approx.
mm2 kg
Connecting Sets
Connecting sets for 3-pole version
Box terminals 35 ... 240 Cu Cables, B 3VT9 300-4TC30 1 unit 0.433
flexibars
Terminals for circular 25 ... 150 Cu/Al cables B 3VT9 315-4TD30 1 unit 0.302
conductors
For enhancing termination 2 x 25 ... 150 Cu/Al cables B 3VT9 315-4TF30 1 unit 0.800
point protection to degree of 2 x 150 ... 240 Cu/Al cables B 3VT9 324-4TF30 1 unit 0.721
protection IP20, use the 3VT9
300-8CB30 terminal cover
6 x 6 ... 35 Cu/Al cables B 3VT9 303-4TF30 1 unit 0.300 3

Terminals for rear connec- Cu/Al busbars B 3VT9 300-4RC30 1 unit 0.567
tion cable lugs
1 set = 3 units
Terminals for front connec- Cu/Al busbars, B 3VT9 300-4TA30 1 unit 0.186
tion cable lugs,
1 set = 3 units flexibars
Potential terminals 1.5 ... 2.5; 4 ... 6 Cu flexible B 3VT9 300-4TN30 1 unit 0.021
conductors
Front connection bars

for increased pole Cu/Al busbars B 3VT9 300-4ED30 1 unit 0.490
spacing cable lugs,
flexibars
for increased pole Cu/Al busbars B 3VT9 300-4EE30 1 unit 0.628

spacing cable lugs,
flexibars
Single terminals for 3- or 4-pole version

Box terminal 35 ... 240 Cu Cables, B 3VT9 300-4TC00 1 unit 0.580
1 set = 1 unit flexibars
Terminals for circular con- 25 ... 150 Cu/Al cables B 3VT9 315-4TD00 1 unit 0.400
ductors
1 set = 1 unit
Terminal for rear connection Cu/Al busbars B 3VT9 300-4RC00 1 unit 0.500

Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/9
© Siemens AG 2011

Further accessories

per PU
approx.
kg
Insulating barriers
Included in the scope of supply of the switching unit;
in case the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is fed-in from below
(power supply connected to terminals 2, 4, 6), it is necessary in most
cases to install these barriers also on the bottom side
• set of two pieces, for 3-pole version B 3TV9 300-8CE30 1 unit 0.077
• one piece, additionally needed for 4-pole version B 3VT9 300-8CE00 1 unit 0.050
Terminal cover, degree of protection IP20

Increases degree of protection of the connection point to IP20
when using 3VT9 224-4TD30, 3VT9 215-4TF30,
3 3VT9 224-4TF30 or 3VT9 203-4TF30 block type terminals,
intended for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions.
Enables locking the circuit breaker in „switched off manually“ position.
For locking the device, you can use up to three padlocks with a
shank diameter of max. 6 mm
Bolt sealing insert B 3VT9 200-8BN00 1 unit 0.001

• trip unit
• accessory compartment cover
• terminal cover
• rotary operating mechanism
• operating mechanism
Additional cover for trip unit B 3VT9 200-8BL00 1 unit 0.080
Provides protection for trip units

For connecting the circuit breaker/switch disconnector accessories in
withdrawable version (can also be used for plug-in and fixed-mounted
versions)
Position signalling switch B 3VT9 300-4WL00 1 unit 0.020
For indicating the position of the circuit breaker in the plug-in base or
withdrawable version base
Coding set B 3VT9 300-4WN00 1 unit 0.002

Prevents insertion of the wrong switching unit
into the plug-in base or withdrawable version base
Pushbutton cover B 3VT9 300-3MF20 1 unit 0.054

For motorized operating mechanism

3/10 Siemens LV 36 · 2011
© Siemens AG 2011

■ Design
Installation and connection Recommended cross-sections of cables, busbars and flexibars
for fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions
Main circuit
• Is connected using Cu or Al busbars or cables, and possibly Rated current Permissible cross-section Dimensions of busbars
cables with cable lugs In S WxH
• For further connecting options, connecting sets are available Cu AI Cu Al
(see page 3/9) A mm2 mm2 mm mm
• Generally, conductors from the power supply are connected
100 35 50 20 x 2 25 x 2
to input terminals 1, 3, 5, (N) and conductors from the load to
terminals 2, 4, 6, (N). However, it is possible to reverse this 125 50 70 25 x 2 25 x 3
connection (exchanging input and output terminals) without 160 70 95 25 x 3 32 x 3
limiting the rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity Icu) 200 95 120 25 x 4 25 x 5
• In case of feed-in from below, the circuit breakers/switch dis-
connectors must be fitted with 3VT9 300-8CE30 insulating 250 120 150 25 x 5 32 x 5
barriers on the bottom side of the circuit breaker/switch dis- 315 150 185 32 x 5 32 x 6
connector 400 185 240 32 x 6 32 x 8
• We recommend painting the connecting busbars in different
colors
• Input and output conductors/busbars must be mechanically
500
630
2 x120
2 x185
2 x185
2 x240
32 x 8
32 x 12
32 x 12
32 x 16
3
reinforced to avoid transmitting electrodynamic force to the
circuit breaker/switch disconnector during short-circuiting
• The power circuit must be connected in such a way that the Maximum circuit breaker/switch disconnector loads
deionizing space of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is in accordance with the ambient temperature
not obstructed (see page 3/44).
3VT3 circuit breaker/switch disconnector connection to pole
Auxiliary circuits by 1 x 185 mm2 Cu cable
• Auxiliary switches, shunt trip units or undervoltage trip units
50°C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
are connected to terminals using flexible 0.5 ... 1 mm2 Cu
conductors. 630 A 630 A 600 A 570 A 540 A
• The motorized operating mechanism and auxiliary circuits of
the plug-in base or withdrawable version base are connected
with a connector.

Order No. Maximum Maximum permissible conductor cross-section S
permitted
current Cable type
Imax Sector-shaped Sector-shaped Round conductor, Round conductor, Busbars and Technical infor-
conductor, stranded conductor, solid stranded solid cable lugs mation
WxH

3VT9 300-4TA30 630 32 x...
3VT9 300-4TD00
3VT9 300-4RC30 630 32 x... 3/47, 3/58,
3/58, 3/58
3VT9 300-4RC00
3VT9 300-4TC30 400 35 ... 240 Cu 35 ... 240 Cu 35 ... 240 Cu 35 ... 240 Cu --
3VT9 300-4TC00
3VT9 324-4TD30 400 150 ... 240 Cu/Al 120 ... 240 Cu/Al 150 ... 240 Cu/Al 120 ... 240 Cu/Al
3VT9 324-4TD00
3VT9 315-4TD30 315 25 ... 150 Cu/AI 16 ... 150 Cu/AI 25 ... 150 Cu/AI 16 ... 150 Cu/AI
3VT9 315-4TD00
3VT9 324-4TF00
3VT9 315-4TF00
3VT9 303-4TF00
3VT9 300-4ED30 400 3/48
3VT9 300-4EE30 630 3/48
3VT9 300-4TN30 10/16 1.5 ... 2.54 ... 6 flexible conductor
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/11

© Siemens AG 2011

Description Circuit breakers Switch disconnector unit
Order number 3VT3 763-2AA36/46/56-0AA0, 3VT9 363-6DT00
3VT3 763-3AA36/46/56-0AA0
Standards EN 60 947-2, IEC 947-2 EN 60 947-3, IEC 947-3
Approval marks
Number of poles 3, 4
Rated current In A 250, 315, 400, 500, 630 --
Rated uninterrupted current Iu A 630
DC max. 440
3 Rated insulation voltage Ui

Utilization category
V 690
Selectivity AC 690 V A --
Switching mode AC 690 V -- AC-23 B
DC 440 V -- DC-23 B
Rated short-time withstand current Ue = AC 690 V Icw/t 8 kA/50 ms, 7 kA/300 ms, 6.5 kA/1 s 7,5 kA/5 s
Series Ue 3VT3 N 3VT3 H Ue --
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking 60 kA 100 kA AC 230 V --
capacity (rms value)1) Icu 36 kA 65 kA AC 415 V
20 kA 35 kA AC 500 V
15 kA 20 kA AC 690 V
Rated short-circuit breaking 40 kA 75 kA AC 230 V --
capacity (rms value) Ics/Ue 18 kA 36 kA AC 415 V
10 kA 20 kA AC 500 V
8 kA 15 kA AC 690 V
Rated short-ckt making capacity (peak value) Icm/Ue 75 kA 140 kA AC 415 V 14 kA/AC 415 V, 14 kA/AC 440 V
Mechanical endurance cycles 20000
Electrical endurance (Ue = AC 415 V ) cycles 5000
Switching frequency cycles/ 120
hr
Plug-in design ✓/+
Withdrawable design ✓/+
Accessories
Switches-auxiliary/relative/signal/leading ✓/✓/✓/✓
Shunt trip unit ✓
Undervoltage trip unit/with leading switch, with alarm switch ✓/✓
Front rotary oper. mechanism/lateral oper. mech. right/left ✓/✓
Mechanical interlocking to the rotary oper. mechanism, ✓
by Bowden wire
Motorized oper. mechanism with operations counter ✓
Bolt sealing insert/additional cover for trip unit ✓/✓
✓ available, 1) If the circuit breaker connection is reversed (input terminals 2, 4, 6 ,
-- unavailable output terminals 1, 3, 5), Icu does not change.
+ in preparation
3/12 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Schematics
3-pole version

control circuits
Q3
2 4 1 1 3 5
ON 3VT9 300-4PA.0
S SO 1
OFF
B 3VT9 300-4WA.0
Motor drive Auxiliary trip/Leading Main circuit
3VT9 325-6..00 1 3 5
3VT9 300-2AJ00
B1
10.Y1
10.Y1
A1
A1
3VT9 300-1U.00
3VT9 300-1U.10
3VT9 300-1U.10
10.Y3
3VT9 300-1S.00
X3 12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5
I>
A
3
I>
NC NO
NC NO
or or or
S6 S5 V Q
M P U< U U< B
C C
T1
T2
TEST T3
MP
10.Y2
10.Y2
10.Y4
A2
A2
11 8 6 2 2 1
B2
X3 X4 J 2 4 6
acc.comp. no. 10 3VT9 300-4PA.0
NSO0_00249
PE N- YC SO 2 SO 3 3VT9
300-
Ext.oper. 4WA.0
counter
1 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 6
Connecting cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
X2
Switches
signal relative auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary
1.3
1.1
1.2
1.4
2.3
2.1
2.2
2.4
3.3
3.1
3.2
3.4
4.3
4.1
4.2
4.4
5.3
5.1
5.2
5.4
2.3
3.3
2.1
3.3
2.1
3.1
A
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
B
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
5.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
or or
3.4 3VT9 300-2AG10
3.2 3VT9 300-2AE10

3.4 3VT9 300-2AF10
or or or or or or or or or or or
NSO0_00250
1.4
1.2
1.1
2.4
2.2
2.1
3.4
3.2
3.1
4.4
4.2
4.1
5.4
5.1
2.4
2.2
2.2
acc.c. no. 1 acc.c. no. 2 acc.c. no. 3 acc.c. no. 4 acc.c. no. 5 acc.c. no. 2 + 3
X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Connecting cable
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/13

© Siemens AG 2011

4-pole version
control circuits
Q3
2 4 1 1 3 5 N
ON 3VT9 300-4PA.0
S SO 1
OFF
B 3VT9 300-4WA.0
Motor drive Auxiliary trip/Leading Main circuit
3VT9 325-6..0 1 3 5 7
3VT9 300-2AJ00
B1
10.Y1
10.Y1
A1
A1
3VT9 300-1U.00
3VT9 300-1U.10
10.Y3
3VT9 300-1S.00
A
X3 12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5
I>
I>
NC NO
3 NC NO
or or or
V Q
S6 S5 M P U< U U< B
C C
T1
T2
TEST T3
T4
MP
10.Y2
10.Y2
10.Y4
A2
A2
11 8 6 2 2 1
B2
X3 X4 J 2 4 6 8
acc.comp. no. 10 3VT9 300-4PA.0
NSO0_00251
PE N- YC SO 2 SO 3 3VT9
300-
Ext.oper. 4WA.0
counter 1 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 6 N
Connecting cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
X2
Switches
signal relative auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary
7.3
7.1
7.2
7.4
1.3
1.1
1.2
1.4
9.3
9.1
9.2
9.4
3.3
3.1
3.2
3.4
4.3
4.1
4.2
4.4
5.3
5.1
5.2
5.4
2.3
3.3
2.1
3.3
2.1
3.1
6.3
6.1
6.2
6.4
2.3
2.1
2.2
2.4
8.3
8.1
8.2
8.4
A
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
B or or
2.2 3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
4.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
5.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
6.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
7.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
8.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
9.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3.4 3VT9 300-2AG10
3.2 3VT9 300-2AE10

3.4 3VT9 300-2AF10
or or
NSO0_00252
or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or
7.4
7.1
9.4
9.1
1.4
1.2
1.1
3.4
3.1
4.4
4.1
5.4
5.1
2.4
2.2
2.2
6.4
6.1
2.4
2.1
8.4
8.1
acc.c. no. 1 acc.c. no. 2 acc.c. no. 3 acc.c. no. 4 acc.c. no. 5 acc.c. no. 2 + 3 acc.c. no. 6 acc.c. no. 7 acc.c. no. 8 acc.c. no. 9
X1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Connecting cable
3/14 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011


M Motor
S5 Switch to signal AUTO (NO-C) / MANUAL (NC-C) modes
S6 Switch to signal full storage (ready to switch on: NO-C)
YC External operations counter, 3VT9 300-3MF10
B Recommended wiring of the control circuits - not includ-
ed with drive
ON, OFF Pushbutton
S Switch for energy storage (switched on = automatic stor-
age, switch may be continuously switched on)
Q3 Circuit breaker for motorized operating mechanism
J 3VT3 switching unit
Q
T1, T2, T3, T41)
Main contacts
Current transformers
3
3VT9 325-6..00 3VT9 363-6DT00 circuit breaker - trip unit - ETU LP, DP,
MDP switch-disconnector - switch-disconnector unit
TEST Pushbutton to test trip unit
3VT9 300-4PA30 3-pole plug-in base
3VT9 300-4WA30 3-pole withdrawable version base
X1, X2 3VT9 300-4PL00 connecting cable
SO1, SO2, SO3 Contacts signalling position of circuit breaker/switch dis-
connector in plug-in base or withdrawable version base
(Position signalling switch 3VT9 300-4WL00)
3VT9 300-1U.00 Undervoltage trip unit
3VT9 300-1S.00 Shunt trip unit
3VT9 300-1U.10 Undervoltage trip unit with leading contact
3VT9 300-2AJ00 Leading contact
acc. c. no. Accessory compartment number
1)
Only for 4-pole version of the 3VT3 763-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit.
■ Functions
States of auxiliary switches located in the switching unit accessory compartment
Circuit breaker state Accessory compartment
1 2 3, 4, 5 10 2 and 3 2 and 3 2 and 3 1 2 3, 4, 5
(6 ... 9)1) (6 ... 9)1)
Lever position of circuit breaker
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AE10
3VT9 300-2AG10
3VT9 300-2AF10
3VT9 300-2AJ00
3VT9 300-1U.10
Switched no 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
Switched off manually or 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1

mechanism
Switched off by trip unit 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
Switched off by auxiliary 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

trip unit or by TEST button
or the trip pushbutton on
the motorized operating
mechanism

1)
Accessory compartment 6, 7, 8, 9 are only for 4.pole design.
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/15

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
■ Overview
The electronic trip unit is a separate and interchangeable unit, ETU MP trip units
which has to be ordered in addition to the 3VT3 switching unit.
By exchanging the trip unit, the range of the circuit breaker’s L I
rated current can be easily changed.
Ir
Trip units for 3VT3 switching units are available for current values t
of In = 250, 400 and 630 A. The ETU LP trip units feature rated
currents of 250, 315, 400, 500 and 630A. The trip units (including
regulation of -60%) cover a current range from 100 to 630 A. tr
Several different trip units are available. Some have adjustable
characteristics (in order to match the protected device and to
achieve the required selectivity): Ii
50 ms
ETU LP trip units
NSO0_00354
0 ms
L I
3
t I
Electronic trip units ETU LP have have more characteristics with
adjustable Ir, tr and Irm.
ETU MPS trip units
L S I
Ir
t
tr
NSO0_00502
I
Electronic trip units ETU LP have one type of characteristic and Isd
tsd
fixed In and Irm settings.
ETU DP trip units
NSO0_00214
L I
Ir
t I
Electronic trip units ETU MPS have more characteristics with ad-
justable Ir, tr, Isd and tsd.
ETU LP, DP, MP and MPS trip units are intended for 3-pole 3VT3
763-.AA36-0AA0 switching units and 4-pole
3VT3 763-.AA46-0AA0 switching units with disconnecting of the
N pole.
Ii
ETU DPN trip units
L I
NSO0_00353
Ir
t
I
IN
Electronic trip units ETU DP have one type of characteristic with tr
adjustable Ir and Irm.
Ii
NSO0_00531
I
ETU DPN trip units are intended for 4-pole 3VT3 763-.AA56-
0AA0 switching units with protected N pole. They have more
characteristics with adjustable Ir, tr, Irm and IN.
3/16 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Trip units ETU LP, DP, MP and MPS - description of function 1. Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L
Proper functioning of trip units does not depend on the current • The time-dependent trip unit ETU DP is adjusted using one Ir
waveform in the main circuit. The function of the trip unit is switch. The Ir switch adjusts the circuit breaker’s rated current,
supported by a microprocessor, which processes a sampled with the characteristic shifting on the current axis. The trip unit
signal of the main circuit and recalculates it to obtain an rms is set to one type of characteristic.
value. Therefore, the trip units are suitable for protecting circuits • The time-dependent trip units ETU MP, MPS and DPN are ad-
where the sinusoidal current is distorted by high harmonics justed with two switches, Ir and tr. The first ( Ir) switch adjusts
(e.g. circuits with controlled rectifiers, power factor compensa- the circuit breaker’s rated current. The characteristic moves
tors, pulse loading, and the like). along the current axis.
All the trip units protect a circuit against short-circuiting and By turning the other switch (tr), the time is adjusted after which
overloading. Tripping characteristic of the trip units is indepen- the circuit breaker will trip while passing through 7.2 Ir. The
dent of the ambient temperature. The trip unit is attached to the tripping characteristic thus moves along the time axis. Using
switching unit by two bolts. The translucent cover over the the tr switch, it is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics.
adjustment controls can be sealed (with sealing wire). ETU MP and MPS trip units have 4 characteristics for motor
protection and 4 characteristics for protecting lines.
Setting the tripping characteristics Breaking times correspond to trip unit classes 10 A, 10, 20, 30.
By changing tr, it is possible to select the trip unit characteris-
The tripping characteristic of the trip units is defined by standard tic according to the required motor starting characteristic
EN 60947-2. For trip units ETU DP, MP, MPS and DPN, the char- (light, medium, heavy or very heavy starting).
acteristic is adjusted with latched switches located on the trip
unit.
ETU DPN trip units have 8 characteristics for protecting lines 3
or transformers. It is not possible to turn the circuit breaker
A visual demonstration on setting the tripping characteristic is back on immediately after the time-dependent trip unit has
available in the SIMARIS design software (Tool for Dimensioning been actuated and the circuit breaker has tripped. The trip
Electrical Power Distribution). unit must be allowed to cool off (it has a thermal memory). The
thermal memory can be disabled by turning the switch from
L is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal the normal “Tt” position to the “T0” position. In the “T0” position
protection. the time-dependent trip unit remains active, and only its ther-
S is a zone of medium overcurrents and includes long-distance mal memory is deactivated. Switching off the thermal memory
short-circuit protection for lines. Intentional delay in tripping of should be used only in well-justified cases, and with the knowl-
these low short-circuit currents can be used to achieve selectiv- edge that there could be rising temperature in the protected
ity of protective devices. For ETU MPS trip units, the delay can device, causing repeated tripping.
be set at 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms. 2. Delayed time-independent trip unit S
I is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against This trip unit characteristic is available only in ETU MPS trip
ultimate short-circuit currents. For ETU MP trip units, the time de- units. It is used to set up a selective cascade of circuit breakers.
lay can be set at 0 or 50 ms. It is set up using parameters Isd and tsd. Isd is an n-multiple of
current Ir (Isd= n × Ir). Isd is a short-circuit current that, within the
span of Ii to Ii, will trip the circuit breaker with delay tsd, where tsd
is a delay set up for switching off the trip unit. The delayed time-
independent trip unit actuates the circuit breaker if the current in
the circuit reaches at least the preset n-multiple and lasts at least
the preset delay time tsd.
3. Time-independent instantaneous trip unit (short-circuit trip
unit) I
• For trip units ETU DP, MP and MPS, the time-independent in-
stantaneous trip unit is adjusted with the Ii switch. The Ii switch
is used for setting up the short-circuit current that, when
reached or exceeded, causes instantaneous tripping of the
circuit breaker.
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/17

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Tripping characteristics of ETU LP, DP, MP, MPS and DPN Trip units ETU LP - Lines protection
trip units with load • Provides protection for lines with low starting currents
The tripping characteristic from the cold state indicates the The 3VT9 3..-6AB00 trip unit is intended for the
tripping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment 3VT3763-.AA36-0AA0 and 3VT3763-.AA46-0AA0 switching
when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing through the units. The LP trip unit has a thermal memory that cannot be dis-
circuit breaker. The tripping characteristic tripped from warm abled. The rated currents of the trip units are given by their order
state indicates the tripping times during which it is assumed that, numbers and correspond to a standardized series of currents
before the moment when an overcurrent develops, current is (see specifications table). The short-circuit trip unit is fixed-set at
flowing through the circuit breaker. Characteristics of electronic 4 × In.
trip units are independent of the ambient temperature and are
plotted in a cold state. Digital trip units enable simulation of trip- One of the advantages of the LP trip unit is its simplicity, because
ping in warm state. The tripping times become shorter in a it does not require any adjustment. Therefore, it is intended for
steady state, as shown in the following diagram. The steady less complicated applications.
state is a period during which the characteristic does not Specifications
change. If the circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for
at least 30 minutes, the tripping times will be cut by a half. If the Order No. Rated current In Instantaneous short circuit
load is less than 70% of Ir , the tripping time does not become protection Irm
shorter. A A
3 NSO0_00355
3VT9 325-6AB00 250 1000
1.0 3VT9 331-6AB00 315 1260
k [-]
3VT9 340-6AB00 400 1600
3VT9 350-6AB00 500 2000
0.8
3VT9 363-6AB00 630 2520
0.6
T
NSO0_00356
0.4 10000
5000 Ir
t [s]
2000
0.2
1000
500
0.0
50 60 70 80 90 100 200
L
Ir [%] 100
50
Decrease of tripping time with load
20
T - When tripping from the trip unit’s “warm” state, the tripping
time of the characteristic is cut short during the standstill time tu 10
by coefficient k. 5
In = 250 A
Thermal standstill time of the characteristics 2
In = 315 A
For all trip units, the thermal standstill time is tu ≥ 30 min. During 1 In = 400 A
this time, the tripping time tsd is cut short from the cold-state 0.5 In = 500 A I
characteristic by the coefficient k. In = 630 A
0.2
In = 500 A
In = 400 A
In = 630 A
In = 250 A
In = 315 A
Ii
The real tripping time is ts = k . tsd 0.1
Example 0.05
The shortening constant can be read from the diagram. With 0.02
steady current 85% of Ir the real tripping time will be decreased 0.01
to: 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In
ts = 0.74 . tsd
k [–] time shortening coefficient
Ir [A] adjusted rated current of the trip units
tsd [s] tripping time of the trip unit, derived from the characteristic
ts [s] real tripping time of the trip unit, tripped from warm state
Trip units are preset by the manufacturer
Ir = min
Restart = T(t)
Ii = min, 0 ms
tr = TV, t(t), min
Isd = 0 ms, min
IN = 0.5 Ir
3/18 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
• Provides protection for lines and transformers Order No. Rated Overload Restart Instanta-
The 3VT9 3..-6AC00 trip unit is intended for 3VT3763-.AA36- current In protection Ir neous short
circuit pro-
0AA0 and 3VT3763-.AA46-0AA0 switching units. Operation of A A tection Ii
the trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is
equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turn- 100
ing a switch on the front panel from position T(t) to position T(0). 110
After disabling the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit remains 115
active. The operational state 70% of Ir is signalled by an LED in-
125
dicator that flashes green in a 1.5 s interval. As the load grows,
the blinking frequency of the diode increases. In case of a load 137
larger than 110% of Ir, this LED will turn red and just before trip- 144
ping will begin to blink red. 160
Located on the lower part of the trip unit cover are two photocells 3VT9 325-6AC00 250 172 T(0) 4 x Ir
for communicating with the signalling unit. 180 T(t) 12,5 x Ir
The trip units have tripping characteristics especially designed 190
for practical purposes, in order to provide optimal exploitation of 200
transformers up to 1.5 Ir.
210 3
The trip units have simple adjustment of the tripping character- 220
istic. Set-up includes only the rated current and the short-circuit
tripping level at 4 Ir or 8 Ir. 231
243
250
NSO0_00357
10000 Ir 160
min. max.
5000 172
t [s] Ir Ii
2000 180
1000 190
500 200
200 210
100 220
L
50 3VT9 340-6AC00 400 231 T(0) 4 x Ir
20 243 T(t) 12,5 x Ir
10 250
In = 250 A
5 In = 400 A 3 3
275
2 In = 630 A
290
1 315
0.5
345
I
0.2 360
0.1 12.5x 12.5x 400
4x 4x Ii
0.05
In = 250 A 250
0.02 260
0.01 275
0.1 12.5x 12.5x
4x 4x 290
0.05
In = 400 A Ii 305
0.02
345
0.01
315
0.1
4x 4x
12.5x 12.5x
360 T(0) 4 x Ir
0.05
In = 630 A Ii 3VT9 363-6AC00 630 400 T(t) 12,5 x Ir
0.02
I r = 575 A.630 A ~ I i = 7 kA 435
0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 455
xI n 480
500
550
575
630
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/19

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Trip units ETU MP - Motor protection Adjustable specifications
• Provides protection for motors and generators Order No. Rated Overload tr (7.2 x Ir) Restart Instantaneous
• Can protect lines and transformers current protection short circuit
In Ir protection Ii
The 3VT9 3..-6AP00 trip unit is intended for 3VT3763-.AA36-
A A s kA ms
0AA0 and 3VT3763-.AA46-0AA0 switching units. The operation
of the MP trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The MP trip 100 1 (TV 1) T(0) 0,32
unit is equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by 110 3 (TV 3) T(0) 0,6
turning a switch located on the front panel from position T(t) to 115 10 (TV 10) T(0) 1,0
position T(0). After disabling of the thermal memory, the thermal
trip unit remains active. 125 20 (TV 20) T(0) 1,5 0
137 20 (M 20) T(0) 2,0
When one or two phases fail (due to current greater than Ir in the
remaining phases), in the M-characteristic mode, the switch will 144 15 (M 15) T(0) 2,5
open with a 4 s delay (so-called undercurrent trip unit). 160 8 (M 8) T(0) 3,1
Another parameter for adjusting the trip unit consists of the rated 3VT9 325-6AP00 250 172 3 (M 3) T(0) 3,75
current and short-circuit tripping level. The time delay of the 180 3 (M 3) T(t) 3,75
short-circuit trip unit can be set to 0 ms or 50 ms. The operational 190 8 (M 8) T(t) 3,1
state 70% of Ir is signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green
3 in a 1.5 s interval. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of
the diode increases. In case of a load larger than 110% of Ir, this
200
210
15 (M 15)
20 (M 20)
T(t)
T(t)
2.5
2,0 50
LED will turn red and just before tripping will begin to blink red. 220 20 (TV 20) T(t) 1,5
Located on the lower part of the trip unit cover are two photocells 231 10 (TV 10) T(t) 1,0
for communicating with the signalling unit.
243 3 (TV 3) T(t) 0,6
The trip units have tripping characteristics especially designed 250 1 (TV 1) T(t) 0,32
for practical purposes that provide for optimal exploitation of
transformers up to 1.5 Ir. A total of 8 characteristics can be set 160 1 (TV 1) T(0) 0,5
on the trip unit. Mode “M” provides 4 characteristics suitable for 172 3 (TV 3) T(0) 1,0
protecting motors and in mode “TV” are 4 characteristics for pro- 180 10 (TV 10) T(0) 1,6
tecting transformers and lines. The shape of each characteristic
190 20 (TV 20) T(0) 2,4
can be changed using a selector switch.
200 20 (M 20) T(0) 3,2 0
210 15 (M 15) T(0) 4,0
220 8 (M 8) T(0) 5,0
3VT9 340-6AP00 400 231 3 (M 3) T(0) 6,0
243 3 (M 3) T(t) 6,0
250 8 (M 8) T(t) 5,0
275 15 (M 15) T(t) 4,0
290 20 (M 20) T(t) 3,2
315 20 (TV 20) T(t) 2,4 50
345 10 (TV 10) T(t) 1,6
360 3 (TV 3) T(t) 1
400 1 (TV 1) T(t) 0,5
250 1 (TV 1) T(0) 0,8
260 3 (TV 3) T(0) 1,4
275 10 (TV 10) T(0 2
290 20 (TV 20) T(0)) 3 0
305 20 (M 20) T(0) 4
315 15 (M 15) T(0) 5,1
345 8 (M 8) T(0) 6,3
3VT9 363-6AP00 630 360 3 (M 3) T(0) 7
400 3 (M 3) T(t) 6,3
435 8 (M 8) T(t) 6,3
455 15 (M 15) T(t) 5,1
480 20 (M 20) T(t) 4
500 20 (TV 20) T(t) 3 50
550 10 (TV 10) T(t) 2
575 3 (TV 3) T(t) 1,4
630 1 (TV 1) T(t) 0,8
3/20 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Tripping characteristic 3VT9 ...-6AP00-ETU MP
NSO0_00358
10000 Ir 10000 Ir M
min. max.
TV min. max.
5000 5000
2000 Ii 2000 Ii
1000 1000
500 500
20
200 200
L tr L tr
100 100
50 20 50
20
20 20 20
15 15
10 In = 250 A
10 10 10 In = 250 A 8 8
5 In = 400 A 5 In = 400 A
3 3 3 3
In = 630 A In = 630 A
2 2
1 1 1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2
I
0.2
I 3
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 0.05
3.1 3.1
In = 250 A 0.32 0.6 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.75 Ii [kA] In=250 A 0.32 0.6 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.75 Ii [kA]
0.02 0 0.02 0
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 5.0
0.05
In = 400 A Ii [kA] In=400 A 5.0 Ii [kA]
0.5 1.0 1.6 2.4 3.2 4.0 6.0 0.5 1.0 1.6 2.4 3.2 4.0 6.0
0.02 0 0.02 0
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 6.3 0.05 6.3
In = 630 A 0.8 1.4 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.1 7.0 Ii [kA] In=630 A 0.8 1.4 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.1 7.0 Ii [kA]
0.02 0 0.02 0
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/21

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Trip units ETU MPS - Motor protection, setting timing selectivity
• Provides protection for motors and generators Adjustable specifications
• Can protect lines and transformers
• Enables adjusting time delay of time-independent trip units Order No. Rated Overload tr (7.2 x Ir) Restart Instantaneous
current protection short circuit
The 3VT9 3..-6AS00 trip unit is designed for 3VT3763-.AA36- In Ir protection Ii
0AA0 and 3VT3763-.AA46-0AA0 switching units. The operation A A S kA ms
of the trip unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is 100 1 (TV 1) T(0) 3
equipped with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turn-
ing a switch on the front panel from position T(t) to position T(0). 110 3 (TV 3) T(0) 5 0
After disabling of the thermal memory, the thermal tipping func- 115 10 (TV 10) T(0) 7
tion remains active. 125 20 (TV 20) T(0) 9
When one or two phases fail (due to current greater than Ir in the 137 20 (M 20) T(0) 3
remaining phases), in the M-characteristic mode, the switch will 144 15 (M 15) T(0) 5 100
open with a 4 s delay (so-called undercurrent trip unit).
160 8 (M 8) T(0) 7
Another parameter for adjusting the trip unit consists of the rated 3VT9 325-6AS00 250 172 3 (M 3) T(0) 9
current and tripping level of the delayed short-circuit trip unit.
The time delay (tv) can be set on the delayed short-circuit trip 180 3 (M 3) T(t) 3
3 unit at 0, 100, 200 or 300 ms. The operational state 70% of Ir is

signalled by an LED indicator that flashes green in a 1.5 s inter-
190
200
8 (M 8)
15 (M 15)
T(t)
T(t)
5
7
200
val. As the load grows, the blinking frequency of the diode in-
210 20 (M 20) T(t) 9
creases. In case of a load larger than 110% of Ir, this LED will
turn red and just before tripping will begin to blink red. Located 220 20 (TV 20) T(t) 3
on the lower part of the trip unit cover are two photocells for com- 231 10 (TV 10) T(t) 5 300
municating with the signalling unit. 243 3 (TV 3) T(t) 7
The trip units have tripping characteristics especially designed 250 1 (TV 1) T(t) 9
for practical purposes that provide for optimal exploitation of 160 1 (TV 1) T(0) 3
on the trip unit. Mode “M” provides 4 characteristics suitable for 172 3 (TV 3) T(0) 5 0
protecting motors, and mode “TV” incorporates 4 characteristics 180 10 (TV 10) T(0) 7
for protecting transformers and lines. The shape of each charac- 190 20 (TV 20) T(0) 9
teristic can be changed with a selector switch.
200 20 (M 20) T(0) 3
210 15 (M 15) T(0) 5 100
220 8 (M 8) T(0) 7
% 3VT9 340-6AS00 400 231 3 (M 3) T(0) 9
243 3 (M 3) T(t) 3
250 8 (M 8) T(t) 5 200
275 15 (M 15) T(t) 7
290 20 (M 20) T(t) 9
315 20 (TV 20) T(t) 3
345 10 (TV 10) T(t) 5 300
360 3 (TV 3) T(t) 7
400 1 (TV 1) T(t) 9
250 1 (TV 1) T(0) 3
260 3 (TV 3) T(0) 5 0
275 10 (TV 10) T(0) 7
290 20 (TV 20) T(0) 9
305 20 (M 20) T(0) 3
315 15 (M 15) T(0) 5 100
345 8 (M 8) T(0) 7
3VT9 363-6AS00 630 360 3 (M 3) T(0) 9
400 3 (M 3) T(t) 3
435 8 (M 8) T(t) 5 200
455 15 (M 15) T(t) 7
480 20 (M 20) T(t) 9
500 20 (TV 20) T(t) 3
550 10 (TV 10) T(t) 5 300
575 3 (TV 3) T(t) 7
630 1 (TV 1) T(t) 9
3/22 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
3VT9 3..-6AS00 Tripping characteristics Trip units ETU DPN-distribution protection with protected
N pole
NSO0_00359
10000 Ir TV • For protecting lines and transformers in TN-C-S and TN-S
min. max.
5000 networks
t [s] Ir tr Isd
2000 tv The 3VT9 3..-6BC00 trip unit is only intended for the
1000 3VT3 763-AA56-0AA0 switching unit. The operation of the trip
500 unit is controlled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is equipped
20 with a thermal memory that can be disabled by turning a switch
200
L on the front panel from position T(t) to position T(0). After dis-
100 10 abling of the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit remains
50 active.
20 3 The rated current Ir, delay for switching off the trip unit at 7.2 Ir,
20
10 and the tripping level of the short-circuit trip unit can be ad-
In = 250 A 10
5 tr [s] justed.
In = 400 A 1
2 In = 630 A 3 The operational state is signalled by an LED indicator that
S
1 flashes green in a 1.5 s interval. As the load grows, the blinking
1
0.5 frequency of the diode increases. In case of a load larger than
0.2
tv [ms]
300
200
110% of Ir this LED will turn red and will begin to blink red just
before tripping. Located on the lower part of the trip unit cover
3
100
0.1 are two photocells for communicating with the signalling unit.
In = 400 A
In = 630 A
In = 250 A
3 x Ir
5 x Ir
7 x Ir
9 x Ir
0.05 I The current of the fourth pole (N pole) is adjusted using the IN
0.02 0 switch as a multiple of the Ir current. Measuring of current on the
I sd
0.01 fourth pole can be disabled by turning the button to the “OFF”
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 position.
x In
Ir tr I sd tv In Tripping characteristics
NSO0_00361
10000
1 x Ir
IN = 0.5 x Ir
0.75 x Ir
5000 IN
t [s] IN Ir tr Ii
2000 Ir
min. max.
1000 20
500 N 10
200
3
100
50 1
20
L 20
10
10
5
t r [ S]
2 3
1 I
1
0.5
In = 400 A
I n = 250 A
In = 630 A
In = 250 A
0.2
I n = 400 A
2 x Ir
4 x Ir
7 x Ir
9 x Ir
0.1 I n = 630 A
0.05
Ii
0.02
0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In
IN Ir tr In Ii
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/23

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Adjustable specifications
Order No. Rated current In Overload protection Ir tr (7.2 x Ir) Restart Instantaneous short circuit
protection Ii
A A S kA ms
100 1
110 2 0,5
115 3 T(0)
125
137 10
144 4 0,75
160 20
3VT9 325-6BC00 250 172
180 20
190 7 1
200 10 T(t)
3 210
220 3
231 9 OFF
243 1
250
160 1
172 2 0,5
180 3 T(0)
190
200 10
210 4 0,75
220 20
3VT9 340-6BC00 400 231
243 20
250 7 1
275 10 T(t)
290
315 3
345 9 OFF
360 1
400
250 1
260 2 0,5
275 3 T(0)
290
305 10
315 4 0,75
345 20
3VT9 363-6BC00 630 360
400 20
435 7 1
455 10 T(t)
480
500 3
550 9 OFF
575 1
630
3/24 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Auxiliary switches
■ Overview
Order number according to contact arrangement
Arrangement Order No. Number of contacts Contact types
of contacts
01 3VT9 300-2AC10 (20) 1 NO
20 3VT9 300-2AE10 (20) 2 NO
01 3VT9 300-2AD10 (20) 1 NC
02 3VT9 300-2AG10 (20) 2 NC
11 3VT9 300-2AF10 (20) 1 + 1 NC + NO
001 3VT9 300-2AH10 (20) 1 NC + NO

accessory compartments
Accessory Switch name Switch function
compartment 3
1 Signalling Signal to indicate the state of the circuit
breaker by the trip unit
2 Relative Relative to indicate tripping of the circuit
breaker by trip units, TEST pushbutton or
by OFF pushbutton on the motorized op-
erating mechanism
3, 4, 5, (6 ... 9)1) Auxiliary Auxiliary to indicate the position of the
main contacts
10 Leading Leading to make/break in advance of the
main contacts
1)
Accessory compartments 6 ... 9 for 4-pole version only.
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/25

© Siemens AG 2011

Auxiliary switches
■ Function
State of switches located in the switching unit accessory compartment
Switches
early contact signal relative auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary
3VT9 300-2AJ00
6.3
6.1
6.2
6.4
7.3
7.1
7.2
7.4
1.3
1.1
1.2
1.4
9.3
9.1
9.2
9.4
3.3
3.1
3.2
3.4
4.3
4.1
4.2
4.4
5.3
5.1
5.2
5.4
2.3
3.3
2.1
3.3
2.1
3.1
10.Y1
10.Y3
2.3
2.1
2.2
2.4
8.3
8.1
8.2
8.4
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
2.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
4.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
5.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
6.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
7.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
8.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
9.2 3VT9 300-2AC10

3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AH10
or or
3.4 3VT9 300-2AG10
3.2 3VT9 300-2AE10

3.4 3VT9 300-2AF10
3
10.Y2
or or
10.Y4
NSO0_00362
or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or or
6.4
6.1
7.4
7.1
9.4
9.1
1.4
1.2
1.1
3.4
3.1
4.4
4.1
5.4
5.1
2.4
2.2
2.2
2.4
2.1
8.4
8.1
acc.c. no. 10 acc.c. no. 1 acc.c. no. 2 acc.c. no. 3 acc.c. no. 4 acc.c. no. 5 acc.c. no. 2 + 3 acc.c. no. 6 acc.c. no. 7 acc.c. no. 8 acc.c. no. 9
Order No. 3VT9 300-2A.10 3VT9 300-2A.201) 3VT9 300-2AJ00 3VT9 300-2AH10 3VT9 300-2AH201)
Rated operational voltage Ue V AC 60 ... 500 AC 5 ... 60 AC 250 AC 24 ...250 AC 5 ..60
DC 60 ... 500 DC 5 ... 60 DC 24 ...250 DC 5 ...60
Rated isolation voltage Ui V 500 250
• AC-12 -- 0.004 ... 0.5 A/5V -- -- --
• AC-15 6 A/240 V,4 A/400 V, -- 1 A/AC 250 V 1.5 A/AC 250 V --
2 A/500 V
• DC-12 -- 0.004 ... 0.5 A/5V -- -- 0.01 A/DC 60 V
• DC-13 0.4 A/240 V, 0.3 A/400 V, 0.004 ... 0.01/60 V -- 0.2 A/DC 250 V --
0.2 A/500 V
Thermal current Ith A 10 0.5 -- 6 0.5
Arrangement of contacts 01, 10, 02, 11, 20 02, 11, 20 001
(connected switch)
1)
3VT9 300-2A.20 is not suitable for controlling electromagnetic loads.
3/26 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Overview
Order number of shunt trip units
Ue Order No.
AC/DC 24, 40, 48 V 3VT9 300-1SC00
1AC/DC 10 V 3VT9 300-1SD00
AC 230, 400, 500 V/DC 220 3VT9 300-1SE00
Order number of undervoltage trip units

Ue Order No.
AC 24,40 48 V 3VT9 300-1SC00
AC/DC 110 V 3VT9 300-1SD00
AC 230,400,500/DC 220 V 3VT9 300-1SE00
3
The particular rated operating voltage of the trip unit is set up by
jumpers located in the trip unit. Default setting is always the max-
imum value.
■ Function
Shunt trip units
Circuit breaker switched off by the shunt trip unit Circuit breaker states and lever positions of the circuit breaker
NSO0_00364
Circuit breaker state Lever positions of circuit breakers

Main contacts
Switched on
2 1 20
4 3 1
6 5
0 Switched off by trip units, or by TEST
Auxiliary switch
button or by the tripping pushbutton
compartment
located on the operating mechanism

accessory
5.4 5.3 20
4.4 4.3 1
3…5
3.4 3.3 20 Switched off manually or electrically

0 by operating mechanism
Auxiliary switch
5.2 5.1 30
4.2 4.1 1 L+
3.2 3.1
0
Relative switch
compartment
20
accessory
1
3VT9 300-1S.00
2.4 2.3
B1
2
0
Relative switch
30
1
2.2 2.1
0 U
t [ms]
NSO0_00518
B2
N-
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/27

© Siemens AG 2011

Circuit breaker switched off by the undervoltage trip unit Circuit breaker states and lever positions of the circuit breaker
NSO0_00365
Main contacts Circuit breaker state Lever positions of circuit breakers
Switched on
2 1 20
4 3 1
6 5
0
Auxiliary switch Switched off by trip units, or by TEST
compartment
accessory
5.4 5.3 30 the motorized operating mechanism
1
3…5
4.4 4.3
3.4 3.3 Switched off manually or electrically
0
Auxiliary switch by operating mechanism
5.2 5.1 30 Arrangement, number and type of contacts

4.2 4.1 1
3.2 3.1
0 Arrangement of contacts Number of contacts Contact types
Relative switch
compartment
2 2 NC
accessory
30
1 11 1+1 NC + NO
2.4 2.3
2
0 20 2 NONO
3 Relative switch
30
1 L+ L+
2.2 2.1
0
Early switch
compartment
accessory
3VT9 300-1U.00
20
A1
10.Y1
A1
1
3VT9 300-1U.10
10
10.Y2 10.Y1 0
10.Y4 10.Y3
Early switch
U< U<
20
10.Y2 10.Y1 1
10.Y2
NSO0_00519
10.Y4 10.Y3
0
A2
A2
t [ms]
N- N-
Shunt trip units Undervoltage trip units
Order No. 3VT9 300-1S.00 Order No. 3VT9 300-1U.00 3VT9 300-1U.101)
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V Rated operating voltage Ue AC 24, 40, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500 V
DC 24, 40, 48, 110, 220 V DC 24, 40, 48, 110, 220 V
Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60 Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60
Input power at 1.1 Ue AC < 3 VA Input power at 1.1 Ue AC < 3 VA < 3 VA
DC <3W DC <3W <3W
Functional description U ≥ 0,7 Ue the circuit breaker must trip Functional description U 0.85 Ue
(circuit breaker can switch on)
Time to switch-off ms 20 U 0.35 Ue
Continuous load Yes (the circuit breaker must trip)
Connector cross-section S mm2 0.5 ... 1 Time to switched-off ms 20
Terminal protection IP20 Continuous load Yes
(connected trip unit) Connector cross-section S mm2 0.5 ... 11)
Location in accessory com- 10 Terminal protection IP20
partment No. (connected trip)
compartment No.
Earl switch --
Rated operating voltage Ue V -- AC 250
Rated frequency fn Hz -- 50/60
Rated operating current Ie/Ue V -- AC 1 A/AC 250
Arrangement of contacts -- 02, 11, 20
Connector cross-section S mm2 -- 0.5 ... 11)
Terminal protection -- IP20
1)
Cannot be used in combination with motorized operating mechanism
3VT9 300-3M..0.
3/28 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Overview
Rotary operating mechanism Mechanical interlocks and mechanical interlock for parallel
switching
The following components of the rotary operating mechanisms
are required: • Mechanical interlocks for fixed-mounted versions require the
following components:
• To switch the switching unit: - 2 x 3VT9 300-3HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism
- 3VT9 300-3HE10 or 3VT9 300-3HE20 black knob - 2 x 3VT9 300-3HE/HF.. knob
- 3VT9 300-3HF20 red knob
• Mechanical interlocking with Bowden wire is intended for
• To switch the switching unit through the switchgear cabinet fixed-mounted, plug-in and withdrawable versions
door:
- 3VT9 300-3HJ..extension shaft • Mechanical interlocking with Bowden wire requires the follow-
- 3VT9 300-3HG/HH.. coupling driver for door-coupling oper- ing components:
ating mechanism - 2 x 3VT9 300-3HA/HB.. rotary operating mechanism
- 3VT9 300-3HE/HF.. knob - 1 x 3VT9 300-3HE/HF.. knob
■ Design
circuit breaker: 3
Operation through the switchgear cabinet door (Fig. 2)
Fig. 1: Rotary operating mechanism with knob
Operation through side wall of switchgear cabinet
3VT9 300-3HC/HD10.. rotary operating mechanism
Enhanced safety for operator:
lock the circuit breaker in position “switched off manually“. The
unit and knob of the rotary operating mechanism can be
locked by three padlocks with a shank diameter up to 6 mm
• Each coupling driver for door-coupling operating mechanism
Fig. 2: Rotary operating mechanism with extension shaft, coupling driver prevents the cabinet door from being opened when the circuit
and knob breaker is in on-state or after tripping. Types 3VT9300-3HG10
The rotary operating mechanism makes it possible to actuate the and 3VT9300-3HG20 prevent the cabinet door from being
circuit breaker by turning a knob, e.g. in order to switch ma- opened when the circuit breaker is in the state "switched off
chines on and off. The modular concept of the operating mech- manually" and when the rotary operating mechanism knob is
anisms makes allows simple mounting on the switching unit after locked out.
the accessory compartment cover is removed. The operating • Two circuit breakers with rotary operating mechanisms can be
mechanism and its accessories must be ordered separately provided with mechanical interlocking or with parallel me-
(see page 3/6). chanical switching (see page 3/31).
• The rotary operating mechanism is fixed right on the switching
unit of the circuit breaker.
• The rotary operating mechanism coupling driver is fixed onto
the switchgear door and it provides protection IP40 or IP66.
• The rotary operating mechanism knob is placed on the rotary
operated mechanism unit or on the rotary operating mecha-
nism coupling driver
• The extension shaft is available in two versions, standard
(length 365 mm - can be shortened) and telescopic (adjust-
able length 245 ... 410 mm).
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/29

© Siemens AG 2011

Features
Order No. Description Color Permits operator to Degree of Switchgear cabinet door is locked Length in
lock the circuit break- protection when circuit breaker is mm
er in OFF mode
manually and
locked
3VT9 300-3HA10 Rotary operating mechanism grey no -- -- -- --
3VT9 300-3HA20 Rotary operating mechanism grey yes -- -- -- --
3VT9 300-3HB20 Rotary operating mechanism yellow yes -- -- -- --
3VT9 300-3HC10 Rotary operating mechanism grey no -- -- -- --
3VT9 300-3HD10 Rotary operating mechanism grey no -- -- -- --
3VT9 300-3HE20 Knob black yes -- -- -- --
3VT9 300-3HF20 Knob red yes -- -- -- --
3 3VT9 300-3HH10 Coupling driver black -- IP66 yes no --
3VT9 300-3HH20 Coupling driver yellow -- IP66 yes no --
3VT9 300-3HJ10 Extension shaft, can be shortened -- -- -- -- -- 365
3/30 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Function
3VT9 300-8LA00 mechanical interlocking 3VT9 300-8LB00 mechanical parallel switching
breakers may be switched off simultaneously. Interlocking can between two 3VT3 circuit breakers or between 3VT3 and 3VT2
be used between two 3VT3 circuit breakers or between one circuit breakers. Each circuit breaker must be furnished with a
3VT3 and one 3VT2 circuit breaker. Both circuit breakers must rotary operating mechanism and at least one of them with a
be furnished with rotary operating mechanisms (at least one of knob.
them with a rotary operating mechanism and knob).
When using a mechanical interlock it is required to comply with
the dimensions shown in the figure and in the table.
When using a mechanical interlock for parallel switching it is re-
quired to comply with the dimensions shown in the figure and in
3
the table.
1 3 5
L
RP-BD-CK10
PS
PS
PS
X X
TEST
TEST
NSO0_00234
NSO0_00233
Left Right switching unit Left Right switching unit

switching switching
3VT2 3VT2 3VT3 3VT3 3VT2 3VT2 3VT3 3VT3
unit unit
3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole1)
X L X L X L X L X L X L X L X L
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
3VT2, 3P 105 112 140 145.5 122.5 128.5 181 185.5 3VT2, 3P 105+7 164.5+7 122.5+7 164.5+7 122.5+7 164.5+7 x x
3VT2, 4P 105 112 140 145.5 122.5 128.5 181 185.5 3VT2, 4P 105+7 164.5+7 122.5+7 164.5+7 122.5+7 164.5+7 x x
3VT3, 3P 122.5 128.5 157.5 145.5 140 145.5 185 189 3VT3, 3P 122.5+7 164.5+7 140+7 164.5+7 140+7 164.5+7 x x
3VT3, 4P 122.5 128.5 157.5 145.5 140 145.5 185 189 3VT3, 4P 122.5+7 164.5+7 140+7 164.5+7 140+7 164.5+7 x x
1)
Switching unit 3VT3, 4P (4-pole version) must be located on the right side.
RP-BD-CK10
RP-BD-CK10
PS
PS
PS
SP
SV
PS
PS
PS
SP
SV
TEST
TEST
NSO0_00235
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/31

© Siemens AG 2011

3VT9 300-8LC.0 Mechanical interlocking • Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit break-
ers/switch-disconnectors so that they cannot both trip simulta-
neously, but only one of them at a time. Both circuit breakers
may be turned off simultaneously.
• 3VT9 300-8LC10 mechanical interlocking is intended for two
3VT3 circuit breakers. 3VT9 300-8LC20 interlocking is in-
tended for one BH630 circuit breaker and one 3VT2.
• Circuit breakers may be in fixed, plug-in and withdrawable
designs.
Order No. of mechanical 3VT9 300-8LC10 3VT9 300-8LC20

interlocking
Circuit breaker types 3VT3 3VT2
3VT3 3VT3
Circuit breaker installation in switchgear and controlgear

3 assemblies
Detailed information is included in the "Instructions for use",
which is available on our website:
www.siemens.com/technical assistance.
NSO0_00366
148
0
ON ON
=4
0 ... 700
min
OFF OFF
R
45
TEST TEST
30 min. 80
3/32 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Design
• The motorized operating mechanism can be locked in off po-
sition using as many as three padlocks with shank diameter
max. 4.3 mm.
• A 3VT9 300-3MF20 cover can be attached to the ON-OFF
switch of the motorized operating mechanism, and then
sealed with sealing wire. The cover prevents turning on the cir-
cuit breaker from the drive panel.
• Extension cable 3VT9 300-3MF00 has a connector on one
side that connects to the connector located on the motor
mechanism and conductors on the other side that connect, for
example, to a terminal block.
The motorized operating mechanism is equipped with spring

storage units. The energy stored in the springs makes it possible Order No. 3VT9 300-1S.00
to switch the circuit breaker on in less than 60 ms. Releasing the
Operational voltage Ue AC V 24 ,48, 110, 230
spring energy storage unit and tripping the circuit breaker is en- DC V 24, 48, 110, 220
sured by a closing coil. The motor mechanism can trip the circuit
breaker in 900 ms. This method of tripping is suitable for most
technological applications. When faster circuit breaker tripping
Rated frequency fn
Control pulse length for storing
Hz
ms
50/60
400 ∞1)
3
is required (e.g., because an emergency STOP button was Control pulse length
pressed), it is possible to use the mechanism in combination
for switching on ms 20 ... 700 1)
with an undervoltage trip unit or a shunt trip unit.
for switching off ms 400 ...∞1)
• The motorized operating mechanism front panel contains a
selector switch for selecting the drive modes. There is also the Time before switching on ms < 60
possibility to remotely indicate the selector switch state. Time before switching off ms 900
- The first mode is automatic remote control (selector switch in Frequency of cycles ON/OFF 3 contact making/min
position AUTO). This is the standard position in automatic
operation. Frequency of cycles - instant suc- 10 contact making
cessive ON/OFF cycles
- The second mode is manual control (selector switch position
MANUAL). The motorized operating mechanism does not Mechanical endurance 20000 contact making
need any voltage to perform its function. Input power AC VA 100
• Remote switching on and off in position AUTO is carried out DC W 100
with pushbuttons that must be connected to the drive unit con- Protection
nector. Furthermore, this position makes it is possible to con-
• AC 24, 48, 110 V; AC 230 V LSN 4C/1; LSN 2C/1
trol the circuit breaker with the pushbuttons located on the
drive unit front panel. • DC 24, 48, 110 V; DC 220 V LSN-DC 4C/1; LSN-DC 2C/1
• In MANUAL mode it is possible to switch on and off with the Rated operating current V AC 5 A/250
green and red pushbuttons located on the front panel of the AUTO / MANUAL switches Ie/Ue DC 0.5 A/250
motorized operating mechanism cover. The function of the re- Order No. 3VT9 300-3MF00
mote control ON button in MANUAL mode is locked out,
Number of conductors 12
whereas the function of the remote control OFF button remains
active for safety reasons. Conductor cross sections S mm2 0.35
• The motorized operating mechanism, as opposed to the cir- Conductor lengths cm 60
cuit breaker, recognizes only two fixed positions. In the first 1)
position the circuit breaker is ON. When the circuit breaker is For sequence of control pulses, see page 3/34.
tripped in AUTO mode by the trip unit or shunt/undervoltage
trip units, then because of mechanical link between the circuit
breaker and the motor mechanism, a pulse will be generated
to automatically wind up the spring of the storage unit. The
motor mechanism can be wound up automatically by perma-
nent closing switch S. In the second fixed position the circuit
breaker is switched off and the loaded drive is ready to switch
the breaker on after it has received the setting pulse.
• The motorized operating mechanism makes it possible to con-
trol the circuit breaker after the loss of control voltage. In MAN-
UAL and AUTO modes, it is possible to wind up the storage
unit by repeated rotation of the foldable handle. After charging
the spring mechanism with spring energy, it is possible to
switch the circuit breaker on and off with the control buttons lo-
cated on the front panel of the motor mechanism.
• The front panel incorporates a storage unit status indicator to
indicate what state the 3VT3 motor mechanism unit storage is
in and whether it is possible to switch the circuit breaker on.
The 3VT3 motor mechanism is also able to remotely indicate
the storage status. A corresponding signal is issued to the ter-
minal strip. 3VT2 motor mechanism have optional designs,
alternatively with MANUAL/AUTO indication.
• The motorized operating mechanism can be furnished with an
electromechanical operations counter that may be installed in
the drive cover or outside of the circuit breaker (e.g. in the
switchgear door). A metal holder included in the scope of sup-
ply of the external operations counter. Connecting is facilitated
with connectors.
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/33

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Function
Circuit breaker switched on/off by the motorized operating mechanism
Circuit breaker switched on by the motorized operating Circuit breaker switched off by the motorized operating
mechanism – electrically by pushbutton ON mechanism- electrically by pushbutton OFF
NSO0_00368
NSO0_00369
2 1 50 2 1 900
4 3 1 4 3 1
6 5 6 5
0 0
compartment
compartment
5.4 5.3 50 900
accessory
accessory
5.4 5.3
4.4 4.3 1 4.4 4.3 1
3…5
3…5
3.4 3.3 3.4 3.3
0 0
5.2 5.1 50 5.2 5.1 900
4.2 4.1 1 4.2 4.1 1
3.2 3.1 3.2 3.1
0 0
3
compartment
compartment
accessory
accessory
1 1
2.4 2.3 2.4 2.3
0 0
2
2
1 1
2.2 2.1 2.2 2.1
0 0
compartment
compartment
20 900
accessory
accessory
1 1
10
10
10.Y2 10.Y1 0 10.Y2 10.Y1

0
10.Y4 10.Y3
10.Y4 10.Y3
20 900
10.Y2 10.Y1 1 10.Y2 10.Y1 1
10.Y4 10.Y3 10.Y4 10.Y3
0 0
t [ms] t [ms]
Circuit breaker states and toggle positions of the circuit breaker
Wiring diagram Circuit breaker state Toggle positions of circuit breaker

Switched on
Motor drive control circuits
Q3 Switched off by trip units, or by TEST
L+ button or by the trip pushbutton on the
ON Switched off manually or electrically by
S the operating mechanism
B OFF
Motor drive
Wiring diagram description
Symbol Description
X3 12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5
MP Motorized operating mechanism 3VT9 300-3M..0
M Motor
NC NO NO
S6 NC M P
C C
S5 S5 Switch indicating AUTO/MANUAL modes
S6 Switching indicating energy storage
(ready to on: NO-C)
YC External operations counter 3VT9 300-3MF10
MP
B recommended wiring of the control circuits
NSO0_00370
(not included in delivery)

11 8 6 2 2 1
X3 X4 ON Make pushbutton
PE N- OFF Break pushbutton
YC
S Switch for energy storage
Operations (switched on = automatic storage, may be
counter continuously switched on)
3/34 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Tripping of the circuit breaker with a motorized operating mech- Wiring diagram
anism by the trip unit (switch S – automatic spring charging)
(electrical ON signal) and switched off by the shunt trip unit
NSO0_00527
Main contacts
2 1 20 Control circuit
4 3 1
6 5 Q3
0 L+
Auxiliary switch
compartment
accessory
20 ON
1 S
3.4 3.3 20
3
0 B OFF
Auxiliary switch
30 Motor drive
1
3.2 3.1
0
B1
A1
Relative switch
3VT9 300-1U.00
3VT9 300-1S.00
X3 12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5
compartment
accessory
20 650
1
2.4 2.3
2
0
Relative switch NC NO
1
30 650
NC NO
or
3
2.2 2.1 S6 S5 M P U< U
0 C C
Early switch
compartment
accessory
20 650
1
1.4 1.3
1
0 MP
Early switch
NSO0_00371
30 650
A2
11 8 6 2 2 1
B2
1 X3 X4 J
1.2 1.1 acc.c. no.10
0
PE N- YC N-
t [ms]
Operations
counter
Tripping of the circuit breaker with motorized operating mecha-
nism by a shunt trip unit or undercurrent trip unit (switch S – Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanism
automatic spring charging) (electrical ON signal) and switched off by undervoltage trip unit
NSO0_00242
Main contacts Motor drive control circuits

2 1 20 Q3
4 3 1
6 5 L+
0
Auxiliary switch
compartment
20 ON
accessory
1 S
3.4 3.3 20
0
3
B OFF
Auxiliary switch
20
1 Motor drive
3.2 3.1
0
Relative switch
A1
B1
compartment
30 520
accessory
1
2.4 2.3
X3 12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5
0
2
Relative switch
SP-BHD-X...
SV-BHD-X...
30 520 NC NO
1
2.2 2.1
0 NC NO
t [ms] or
S6 S5
M P U< U
C C
MP
NSO0_00372
11 8 6 2 2 1
A2
B2
X3 X4 J
acc.c. 10
PE N- N-
YC
Operations
counter
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/35

© Siemens AG 2011

Recommended actuating pulses Description of charts
Circuit breaker switched on/off by motorized operating mecha- Symbol Description
nism - switch S permanently closed (automatic spring charging)
HK Main contacts
or open
PS Auxiliary switch
50 RS Relative switch
1 R OFF Circuit breaker closes instantly, by trip unit
HK
0 IMP S Pulse to charge spring mechanism
520 > 880 IMP ON Make pulse for motorized operating mechanism
RS 1 IMP OFF Break pulse for motorized operating mechanism
0 X Random segment of time
NSO0_00246
> 1400
20 … 700
1
IMP ON
0 Circuit breaker states and toggle positions of the circuit breakers
t [ms]
Circuit breaker state lever positions of circuit breakers
R OFF
Switched on
3
Circuit breaker switched off by trip unit or shunt/undervoltage Switched off by trip units, or by TEST
trip units and switched on by the motorized operating mecha- button or by the trip pushbutton on the
nism - switch S permanently closed (automatic spring charging) motorized operating mechanism
50 the operating mechanism
HK 1
0
520 > 880

RS 1
0
NSO0_00246
> 1400
20 … 700
1
IMP ON
0
t [ms]
R OFF
Circuit breaker switched off by trip unit or shunt/undervoltage

trip units and switched on by motorized operating mechanism -
switch S closed only for storing
50
HK 1
0
X + 520 > 880

RS 1
0
> 100
NSO0_00247
X > 1400
400 … ∞ 20 … 700
1
IMP S IMP ON
0
t [ms]
R OFF
3/36 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Use of 3VT9 200-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism in the Recommended control pulses for switching the 3VT3 circuit
automatic standby system breakers by the motorized operating mechanism after Circuit
breaker was switched off by a shunt trip unit or by an undervolt-
Wiring diagram of the motorized operating mechanism of the age trip unit in the automatic standby system
circuit breaker
Control circuit
NSO0_00080
Q3
> 1400
L+ 200 … 700
1
IMP ON
0
ON
S 50
B OFF 1
HK
0
Motor drive 520 > 880

RS 1
B1
A1
X3 12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5 20
200
3
3VT9 300-1U.00
3VT9 300-1S.00
SV 1
0
NC NO
NC NO
SP 1
S6 S5 or 0
M P U 100
MP 400 … ∞ 200 … 700
1
NSO0_00079
IMP S IMP ON
0
A2
11 8 6 2 2 1
B2
X3 X4 J 50
X > 1400
acc.c. 10 1
PE N - N- HK
YC 0
Cycle
counter X + 520 > 880
RS 1
0
Symbol Description 20
>200
M Motor SV 1
0
X3 Connector for connection of control circuits

X4 Connector for external cycle counter SP 1
0
S5 Switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL
(NC-C) mode t [ms]
YC External 3VT9 300-3MF10 cycle counter
B Recommended connection of control circuits
(is not included in the motor drive supply) Symbol Description
ON Pushbutton HK Main contacts
OFF Pushbutton RS Relative switch
S Switch for storage (closed = automatic storage; SV Pulse for shunt trip unit
it can be closed permanently) SP Pulse for undervoltage trip unit
Q3 Circuit breaker for motorized operating IMP ON Motorized operating mechanism make pulse
mechanism
IMP OFF Motorized operating mechanism storage pulse
In a standby system, if a Bowden cable is used for mechanical (generated by S switch)
interlocking, then an auxiliary trip unit should be used to switch Switched on
the circuit breaker off. Otherwise, the first attempt of switching a
standby circuit breaker may fail.
Switched off by trip units, TEST or REVISION pushbutton
Switched off manually or by motorized operating

mechanism electrically (wound up state)
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/37

© Siemens AG 2011

for plug-in version
■ Overview
Plug-in bases Position signalling
The plug-in base may be provided with a maximum of four

switches (for 4-pole version, max. 6 switches) for signalling the
3VT9 200-4PA30 Locking plug-in base against connected/removed position.
plug-in base inserting the circuit breaker/disconnector
States of 3VT9 300-4WL00 switches in plug-in base
3 The plug-in version of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is according to the circuit breaker position
intended for demanding industrial applications where rapid ex-
change of the circuit breaker is needed. Accessory compartment 11, 12, 13, 14 (19, 20)1)
• The plug-in base includes complete accessories for assem- Circuit breaker position 1 1
bling circuit breaker/switch-disconnector in plug-in design
from the original fixed-mounted version 2 4 2 4
• The components of the plug-in base are: Inserted 0 1
- supporting part of the plug-in base
Removed 1 0
- 2 connection sets (total of 6 terminals) for fitting on to the
switching unit 0 = contact open, 1 = contact closed
- interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switching off 1)
Accessory compartments 19 and 20 are for 4-pole version only.
of the circuit breaker for handling – inserting and removal)
- set of mounting bolts for securing circuit breaker into plug-in Technical specifications
base (to secure plug-in base into switchboard, a set of
mounting bolts is used that is included in delivery of the Order No. 3VT9 300-4WL00
3VT3 763-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit Rated operational voltage Ue V AC 400
AC 250
Main circuit
Rated isolation voltage Ui V AC 500
• The 3VT9 300-4TA30 connecting set is used for connecting
with busbars or cable lugs and is included in the scope of
supply of the 3VT3 of switching unit , 3 pole Rated operational current Ie/Ue
• for connecting in another way, it is necessary to use connect- AC-13 3 A/AC 400 V
ing sets (see page 3/9) DC-15 0.15 A/250 V, 3 A/125 V, 4 A/30 V
• connections must comply with our recommendations (see
page 3/44). Thermal current Ith A 6
Arrangement of contacts 001
Auxiliary circuits
(connected switch)
A wiring diagram showing the circuit breaker situated in a plug-

in mounting base and outfitted with accessories, is shown on
These are connected using a 15-wire 3VT9 300-4PL00 cable. page 3/13.
Coding
3VT9 300-4WN00 coding set Plug-in base with motorized operating mechanism
The plug-in base and the circuit breaker can be provided with a
coding set, which prevents inserting any other circuit breaker
into the plug-in base.
Circuit breaker in plug-in version with motorized operating mechanism
3/38 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

for plug-in version
Recommended wiring of the circuit breaker in plug-in design
Symbol Description
Motor drive control circuits M Motor
Q3 P Energy storage device
L+ X3 Terminal strip to connect control circuits
X4 Terminal strip for external operations counter
ON
S5 Switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL (NC-C) modes
S S6 Switch to indicate full storage (ready to switch on: NO-C)
OFF
B
Motor drive B Recommended wiring of the control circuits (control circuits not
included in motorized operating mechanism delivery)
ON Make pushbutton
OFF Break pushbutton
X3 12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5
S Switch to store energy
AC 24V LSN 4C/1
AC 48V LSN 4C/1 3
AC 110V LSN 4C/1
NC NO NO AC 230V LSN 2C/1
DC 24V LSN-DC 4C/1
S6 NC M P DC 48V LSN-DC 4C/1
C C
S5 DC 110V LSN-DC 4C/1
DC 220V LSN-DC 2C/1
MP Unplugging the circuit breaker with motorized operating

mechanism
• Each time before removing the circuit breaker, we recommend
11 8 6 2 2 1 turning first of all the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the
X3 X4
motorized operating mechanism to the MANUAL position
PE N- • More operating information is available in the operating
YC
instructions
NSO0_00350
Operating • Not adhering to this procedure or failing to follow the recom-

counter mended wiring, could mean that the circuit breaker will not
successfully switch on at the first attempt.
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/39

© Siemens AG 2011

for plug-in version
Changes in states of switches when inserting and withdrawing the circuit breaker
State of circuit breaker before removing State of switches before removing State of switches after removing
inserted position → withdrawn position
Accessory compartment 1 2 3, 4, 5 1 2 3, 4, 5
(6 ... 9)1) (6 ... 9)1)
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AH10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AH10
the circuit breaker
Lever position of
main contacts
State of the
-
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
3 Manually switched off or switched off by

0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
Switched off from switched-on state: 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

by means of auxiliary trip unit, TEST pushbutton
or by OFF pushbutton located on the motorized
operating mechanism

1)
3/40 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Design
Withdrawable version mounting base Position signalling
The withdrawable version can be provided with switches for sig-

nalling the position of the circuit breaker, see table.
Circuit breaker installed 3VT9 300-4WA30 Technical specifications
in withdrawable version base withdrawable version base
The withdrawable version of the circuit breaker/switch-discon-
nector is intended for demanding industrial applications where
Order No.
Rated operational voltage Ue V
3VT9 300-4WL00
AC 400
3
rapid exchange of the circuit breaker and frequent checking of AC 250
the circuit are needed. Rated isolation voltage Ui V AC 500
• The withdrawable version base includes all parts needed to Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60
convert a circuit breaker or switch disconnector from fixed- Rated operational current Ie/Ue
mounted version to withdrawable version.
AC-13 3 A/AC 400 V
• The components of the withdrawable version are: DC-15 0.15 A/DC 250 V, 3 A/DC 125 V,
- withdrawable version base 4 A/DC 30 V
- 2 movable side plates
Thermal current Ith A 6
- 2 connection sets (total of 6 terminals) for fitting onto the
switching unit Arrangement of contacts 001
- interlocking connecting rod (ensures automatic switching off Connector cross-section S mm2 0.5 ... 1
of the circuit breaker when handling, inserting and withdraw- Terminal protection IP20
ing) (connected switch)
- a set of mounting bolts needed to fasten the withdrawable
version mounting base into the switchboard For wiring diagram of the circuit breaker in withdrawable device
with accessories, see page 3/13.
Main circuit
• The 3VT9 300-4TA30 connecting set is used for connecting States of 3VT9 300-4WL00 switches in withdrawable version
with busbars or cable lugs and is included in delivery of the according to circuit breaker and lockout positions
3VT3 763-.AA36-0AA0 switching unit State of switch Accessory compartment
11 ... 14 15,17 16, 18
ing sets (see page 3/9) (19, 20)1) (19, 20)1)
• The type of connections must comply with our recommenda-
tions (see page 3/44). Circuit breaker and lockout 1 1 1
position
Auxiliary circuits
2 4 2 4 2 4
Inserted and unlocked 0 1 1 0 0 1
0 1 1 0 1 0
Withdrawn and unlocked 1 0 0 1 0 1
These are connected using the 3VT9 300-4PL00 15-wire cable. 1 0 0 1 1 0

Removed and unlocked 1 0 1 0 0 1
Coding
1 0 1 0 1 0
3VT9 300-4WN00 coding set
1)
Accessory compartments 19 and 20 are for 4-pole version only.
• Operating state is always in locked-out position
• In locked-out position, it is possible to lock the withdrawable
device, so that the circuit breaker cannot be switched on (for
more detailed information, see “Advantages and
enhanced safety for operator”).
The withdrawable version mounting base and the circuit breaker

can be provided with coding set, which prevents inserting an-
other circuit breaker into the withdrawable version mounting
base.
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/41

© Siemens AG 2011

Locking Wiring diagram description
Symbol Description
M Motor
X3 Terminal strip to connect control circuits
X4 Terminal strip for external operations counter
S5 Switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL (NC-C) modes
S6 Switch to indicate full storage (ready to switch on: NO-C)
B Recommended wiring of the control circuits (control circuits
not included in motorized operating mechanism delivery)
Locking the circuit breaker Locking the withdrawable version
in withdrawable version base against inserting the circuit ON Make pushbutton
base against tampering breaker OFF Break pushbutton
Withdrawable version with motorized operating mechanism S Switch to charge spring mechanism
3 Q3 Circuit breaker for motorized operating mechanism
AC 24 V LSN 4C/1
AC 48 V LSN 4C/1
AC 110 V LSN 4C/1
AC 230 V LSN 2C/1
DC 24 V LSN-DC 4C/1
DC 48 V LSN-DC 4C/1
Inserting and withdrawing the circuit breaker

Recommended wiring of the circuit breaker in withdrawable with motorized operating mechanism
version with motorized operating mechanism
• Each time before inserting or withdrawing the circuit breaker,
Motor drive control circuits we recommend placing the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the mo-
Q3
torized operating mechanism to MANUAL position
L+ • More operating information is available in the operating
instructions
ON • Not adhering to this procedure or failing to follow the recom-
S mended wiring could mean that the circuit breaker will not
OFF successfully turn on at the first attempt.
B
Motor drive
X3 12 10 9 7 3 4 1 5
NC NO NO
S6 NC M P
C C
S5
MP
11 8 6 2 2 1
X3 X4
PE N-
YC
NSO0_00350
Operating
counter
3/42 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Changes in states of switching unit when inserting and withdrawing circuit breaker
State before inserted/withdrawn position State after inserted/withdrawn position
Circuit breaker before insertion State of switches before insertion State of switches after insertion
- withdrawn position → - inserted position
Circuit breaker before withdrawal State of switches before withdrawal State of switches after withdrawal
- inserted position → - withdrawn position
Accessory compartment 1 2 3, 4, 5 (6 ... 9)1) 1 2 3,4,5 (6 ... 9)1)
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
3VT9 300-2AC10
3VT9 300-2AD10
Lever position of circuit
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
breaker
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
3
Manually switched off or by 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
operating mechanism
Switched off from switched-on 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

state: by means of auxiliary trip unit,
TEST pushbutton or by OFF push-
button on the motorized operating
mechanism

1)
Accessory compartments 6 to 9 are for 4-pole version only.
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/43

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Overview
Use of insulating barriers and terminal covers for circuit • Terminals 2, 4, 6
breakers and switch disconnectors - If the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is connected to the
the power supply with terminals 2, 4, 6 and if Ue = AC 415 V,
Fixed-mounted version it is necessary to use 3VT9 300-8CE30 insulating barriers or
Front connection a 3VT9 300-8CB30 terminal cover.
• Terminals 1, 3, 5 - If insulated conductors are not used for connecting the main
- If Ue = AC 415 V, it is necessary to use 3VT9 300-8CE30 circuit to terminals 2, 4, 6, and flexibars or rear connections
insulating barriers or 3VT9 300-8CB30 terminal covers. are not used, then it is necessary to use 3VT9 300-8CE30 in-
- For the connection of the main circuit to terminals 1, 3, 5, insulating barriers or 3VT9 300-8CB30 terminal covers.
sulated conductors, flexibars or rear connection terminals Rear connection
are not used. It is necessary to use 3VT9 300-8CE30 insulat- • Neither insulating barriers nor terminal covers have to be
ing barriers or 3VT9 300-8CB30 terminal cover. used.
Plug-in and withdrawable versions
Neither insulating barriers nor terminal covers have to be used.
3 B = 105 C = 80
1 1
D
1 3VT9 300-8CE30
A2
100 … 150
A1
A
B=0 C=0
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
ON ON ON
275
OFF OFF OFF
TEST TEST TEST

NSO0_00259
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
20
B = 20
140 140 140 B = 20
A Minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switch-

disconnector and uninsulated earthed wall (applicable for con-
necting using insulated conductors, cables, flexibars or with rear
connection)
A1 Minimum insulation length of bare conductors (using
150 mm, or by adding additional insulation for the conductors
with barriers to obtain at least A1 value)
A2 Minimum distance:
• between the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector and uninsulat-
ed earthed wall (applicable for uninsulated conductors and
busbars)
• between the circuit breaker/switch-disconnector and busbar
• between two circuit breaker/switch-disconnectors situated ver-
tically above one another
• between uninsulated connections of two circuit break-
ers/switch-disconnectors above one another
B, C Minimum distance between the circuit breaker/switch-discon-
nector and uninsulated earthed wall
D Minimum distance between uninsulated conductors
3/44 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

D
NSO0_00260
Busbar
max. 3 mm
> 15 mm
max. 3 mm
Cable
Flexibar
AC Ue 230 V 415 V 500 V 690 V

3VT3 H wired with Ik 1) ≤ 100 kA > 36 ... 65 kA ≤ 36 kA > 20 ... 35 kA ≤ 20 kA > 15 ... 20 kA ≤ 15 kA
3VT3 N wired with Ik ≤ 60 kA ≤ 36 kA ≤ 20 kA ≤ 10 kA ≤ 15 kA
C < 80 mm A (mm) 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
D ≥ 10 mm A1 (mm) 150 200 100 200 150 150 150 3
A2 (mm) 250 300 200 300 250 250 250
A (mm) 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
D ≥ 30 mm A1 (mm) 100 150 100 150 150 150 150
A2 (mm) 150 200 150 200 200 200 200
A (mm) 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
C ≥ 80 mm D ≥ 10 mm A1 (mm) 100 150 100 150 150 150 150
A2 (mm) 150 200 150 200 200 200 200
1)
Ik = max. short-circuit current in the protected circuit (rms).
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/45

© Siemens AG 2011


45 45 103
150 ... < AC 415 V
100 ... < AC 415 V

2
25 6
18
75.5
1 3 5
45
4 x Ø 6.5
60
60
ON
25°
194
17°
3
154
194
201
234
259
275
65
2°
33
OFF
TEST R 94
134.5
NSO0_00507
2 4 6
45.5
40.5
25 Ø 11 20
33 105 47.5 45 47.5
140 117 5
Drilling pattern
Fixed-mounted version, front connection with 3VT9 324-4TF30, 3VT9 315-4TF30 connecting set
42 28
45 45 25
1 3 5
45
ON
194
234
275
298
344
369
269
319
435
OFF
TEST
2 4 6
NSO0_00261
32
140 Ø 22 Ø 22 3VT9-324-4TF30
Ø 18 Ø 18 3VT9-315-4TF30
105
3/46 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

60
45 45 49
34 38
34 26
45
ON
194
234
262
275
285
308
326
251
274
297
435
OFF
TEST
3
NSO0_00262
11
25
140 6 x Ø 8.4
105
3
45 45 53 105
9
11.5
26
6
20
45
60 4 x Ø 5 (M 5 x 25)
ON
234
194
234
154
194
275
65
OFF
TEST
2.5
Ø 11
R
7
NSO0_00264
25
35
140 40.5 45
20.5
45
125
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/47

© Siemens AG 2011

Fixed-mounted version, front connection (3VT9 300-4ED30 connecting set)
45 45 31 6
19.5
45
ON
194
234
275
314
OFF
3 TEST
NSO0_00267
Ø 13
32
32
12.5
50 50
140
Fixed-mounted version, front connection (3VT9 300-4EE30 connecting set)
45 45 3 31 6
16.5
25
45
140
ON
194
234
275
308
OFF
TEST
2 x Ø 11
NSO0_00269
56.5
15 25
32 32
70 70
3/48 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Fixed-mounted version, rotary operating mechanism
60 1
1 3VT3
NSO0_00271
2 3VT9 300-3HA.0,-3HB.0
1 3 5 3 3VT9 300-3HE.0,-3HF-0
2
3
37
51
TEST
143
2 4 6
3
°
90
25° 140 50
1 2
1 3VT3
NSO0_00273
2 3VT9 300-3HA.0,-3HB.0
1 3 5 5 3 3VT9 300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
70 4 4 3VT9 300-3HG.0,-3HH.0
3
5 3VT9 300-3HJ.0
37
cabinet door
70
51
TEST
143
2 4 6
6
°
90
25° 140
180 … 495 (-3HJ10)
375 … 540 (-3HJ20)
min. 100 27.5
4 x Ø 6.5
0
Ø5
55
NSO0_00275
55
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/49

© Siemens AG 2011

Fixed-mounted version, with 3VT9 300-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
MANUAL
275
AUTO
204
TEST
149
92
NSO0_00276
2 4 6
140 247 31
3
Opening dimensions in cabinet door for external operations counter
1
14
ax
m
R
NSO0_00332
27
3/50 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011


3VT9 300-4PA30 plug-in base Drilling patterns
25 6
45 45 18
4 x Ø 6.5
4 x Ø 6.5
179
1 3 5
45
358
234
284
342
277
277
166
194
166
317
L R
Ø 4+8 mm 3
2 4 6
20
26
96
96
NSO0_00279
40.5
40.5
25 Ø 11 20 45 47.5 45 47.5
33 35
140 105
Plug-in version, 3VT9 300-8CB30 motorized operating mechanism
1 3 5 105
518
L R
Ø 4+8 mm
2 4 6
NSO0_00283
140 35
70
103
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/51

© Siemens AG 2011

Plug-in version
ON
358
OFF
TEST
3
NSO0_00285
140 105
140
157
187
Plug-in version, rear connection with 3VT9 300-4RC30 connecting set

Drilling pattern
3
53
9
26
6
20
4 x Ø 6.5
67
ON
317
317
166
OFF
TEST
58
Ø 11
96
25
35
NSO0_00287
40.5 105 45
3
20.5
45 47.5
125
3/52 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Plug-in version, with rotary operating mechanism
TEST
3
NSO0_00290
175
225
Plug-in version, with 3VT9 300-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
1 3 5
MANUAL
AUTO
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
2 4 6
NSO0_00292
282 31
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/53

© Siemens AG 2011


3VT9 300-8CB30 withdrawable version base Drilling pattern
25 6
45 45 18
4 x Ø 6.5
4 x Ø 6.5
179
1 3 5
45 234
358
284
342
277
166
194
277
317
166
L R
Ø 4+8 mm
3 2 4 6
20
26
96
96
NSO0_00298
40.5
40.5
25 Ø 11 20 45 47.5
33 35
140 105
Withdrawable version base, with 3VT9 300-8CB30 terminal cover
215
204
1 3 5 105
518
140
L R
Ø 4+8 mm
2 4 6
NSO0_00302
140 35
214 70
103
140 27.5
3/54 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Operating position Checking position
213 30
124
124
1 3 5 65
ON
358
140
140
OFF
TEST
2 4 6
3
NSO0_00304
140 105 105
215 140 170
157 187
187 217
Withdrawable version, rear connection with 3VT9 300-4RC30 connecting set

3
213 53 105
9
26
6
20
4xØ6.5
67
1 3 5
65
ON
317
317
358
166
PS
SP PS
SV PS
PS OFF PS
TEST
2 4 6
58
Ø11
96
NSO0_00307
25
35
140 45
3
20.5
215 53 140 45 47.5

125
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/55

© Siemens AG 2011

Withdrawable version, with rotary operating mechanism
30
124
124
140
140
TEST
NSO0_00309
175 205
225 255
Withdrawable version, with motorized operating mechanism

30
124
124
1 3 5
MANUAL
AUTO
140
140
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
2 4 6
NSO0_00312
282 31 312 31
3/56 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011


45 45 45 103
150 ... > AC 415 V
100 ... < AC 415 V

2
25 6
18
75.5
N 1 3 5
45
4 x Ø 6.5
60
60
ON 25°
194
17°
3
154
194
201
234
259
275
65
2°
33
OFF
TEST R 94
134.5
NSO0_00319
N 2 4 6 45.5
40.5
25 Ø 11 20
33 105 92.5 45 47.5
185 117 5

with 3VT9 324-4TF30 + 3VT9 324-4TF00, 3VT9 315-4TF30 + 3VT9 315-4TF00 connecting set
42 28
45 45 45 25
45
ON
194
234
275
298
344
369
269
319
435
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00322
32
Ø 22 Ø 22 (-3HJ10)
Ø 18 Ø 18 (-3HJ20)
105
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/57

© Siemens AG 2011

Fixed-mounted version, front connection with 3VT9 303-4TF30 + 3VT9 303-4TF00 connecting set
38 11
11
45 45 45 26
45
ON
194
234
262
275
285
308
326
251
274
297
435
OFF
TEST
3
NSO0_00324
25
11
185 6 x Ø 8.5
105
Fixed-mounted version, rear connection with 3VT9 300-4RC30 + 3VT9 300-4RC00 connecting set
3
53 105
9
11.5
26
6
20
45
60 4 x Ø 6.5
ON
234
194
234
154
194
275
65
OFF
TEST
2.5
Ø 11
R
7
NSO0_00326
25
35
185 40.5
20.5
45 45 40 7.5
170
3/58 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

105 1
1 3VT3
NSO0_00272
2 3VT9 300-3HA.0,-3HB.0
N 1 3 5 3 3VT9 300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
2
3
51 37
TEST
N 2 4 6 143
3
°
90
25° 140 50
Fixed-mounted version, with door-coupling operating mechanism
1 2
1 3VT3
NSO0_00274
2 3VT9 300-3HA.0,-3HB.0
N 1 3 5 5 3 3VT9 300-3HE.0,-3HF.0
70 4 4 3VT9 300-3HG.0,-3HH.0
3
5 3VT9 300-3HJ.0
37
70
cabinet door
51
TEST
143
N 2 4 6
6
°
90
25° 140
180 … 495 (-3HJ10)
375 … 540 (-3HJ20)
min. 145 27.5
4 x Ø 6.5
0
Ø5
55
NSO0_00329
55
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/59

© Siemens AG 2011

Fixed-mounted version, 3VT9 300-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
MANUAL
AUTO
204
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
149
92
NSO0_00330
247 31
3
Opening dimensions in cabinet door for external operations counter
1
14
ax
m
R
NSO0_00332
27
3/60 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011


3VT9 300-4PA40 plug-in base
Drilling patterns
25 6
45 45 45 18
4 x Ø 6.5
4 x Ø 6.5
179
N 1 3 5
45
234
284
342
277
277
166
194
358
166
317
L R
3
3
Ø 4+8 mm
N 2 4 6
20
26
96
96
NSO0_00333
40.5
40.5
25 Ø 11 20 45 47.5 45
33 35
185 105
Plug-in base, with 3VT9 300-8CB40 terminal cover
N 1 3 5 105
L R
518
Ø 4+8 mm
N 2 4 6
NSO0_00336
185 35
70
103
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/61

© Siemens AG 2011

Plug-in version
ON
358
OFF
TEST
3
NSO0_00337
185 105
140
157
187
Plug-in version, rear connection with 3VT9 300-4RC30 + 3VT9 300-4RC00 connecting set
Drilling pattern
3
53
9
26
6
20
67
ON
317
358
OFF
166
TEST 4 x Ø 6.5
58
Ø 11
96
NSO0_00338
25
35
185 40.5 105 45

3
20.5
45 47.5
170
3/62 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Plug-in version with rotary operating mechanism
358
TEST
3
NSO0_00339
185 175
225
Plug-in version, with 3VT9 300-3M..0 motorized operating mechanism
N 1 3 5
358
MANUAL
AUTO
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
N 2 4 6
NSO0_00293
185 282 31
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/63

© Siemens AG 2011


3VT9 300-4WA40 withdrawable version base
Drilling pattern
258 25 6
45 45 45 18
4 x Ø 6.5
179
N 1 3 5
45
358
234
284
342
277
166
166
194
317
L R
3
Ø 4+8 mm
N 2 4 6
20
26
96
96
NSO0_00340
40.5
25 Ø 11 20 45 47.5
33 35
185 105
260
Withdrawable version with 3VT9 300-8CB40 terminal cover

204
N 1 3 5 105
140
L R
518
Ø 4+8 mm
N 2 4 6
NSO0_00342
185 35
260 70
103
140 27.5
3/64 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

258 30
124
124
65
ON
358
140
140
OFF
TEST
NSO0_00344
185 105 105
260 140 170
157 187
187 217
Withdrawable version, rear connection with 3VT9 300-4RC30 + 3VT9 300-4RC00 connecting set
Drilling pattern
3
258 53 105
9
26
6
20
67
65
ON
358
317
166
OFF
TEST 4 x Ø 6.5
58
Ø 11
96
NSO0_00345
25
35
185 45
3
20.5
260 53 140 45 47.5

170
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 3/65

© Siemens AG 2011

Withdrawable version, with rotary operating mechanism
258 30
124
124
65
358
140
140
TEST
NSO0_00347
185 175 205
260 225 255
Withdrawable version, with 3VT9 300-3M.. motorized operating mechanism

258 30
124
124
65
MANUAL
AUTO
358
140
140
Ø 4,3 max.
TEST
NSO0_00348
185 282 31 312 31

260
3/66 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

4
© Siemens AG 2011

up to 1000 A
Catalog
up to 1000 A
4/2 General data
4/4 Trip units, switch-disconnector units,
signalling unit, auxiliary switches, shunt
trip units, undervoltage trip units
4/5 Manual/motorized operating
mechanisms

up to 1000 A
4/9 Trip units
© Siemens AG 2011

Catalog
General data
■ Overview
Connecting sets
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Switching unit 9
10
4 11
1
12
16
14 15
13
Accessories
NSO0_00228a
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
1 Molded case circuit breaker 10 Rotary operating mechanism 19 Extension cable

2 Multiple box terminals 11 Mechanical interlocking 20 Terminal cover
3 Box terminals 12 Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire 21 Terminal cover
4 Circular conductor terminal 13 Motor operating mechanism 22 Insulating barriers
5 Multiple feed-in terminal 14 Shunt trip unit 23 Insulating barriers
6 Multiple feed-in terminal 15 Undervoltage trip unit 24 Insulating grommets
7 Rear connection 16 Switch 25 Mounting bolts
8 Front connection 17 Lockingtype lever
9 Rear connection 18 Sealing inset
4/2 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Catalog
■ Overview
The switching unit includes: The circuit breakers consist of a 3-pole switching unit (fixed-
• 3VT9 500-8CE30 insulating barriers mounted or withdrawable version) and a trip unit, which is avail-
able with a choice of different characteristics.
• connecting sets for front connection - busbars connection
Switch disconnector
The switching unit must be outfitted with:
• a trip unit ETU DP, MP or UP (circuit breaker) or The switch disconnector consists of a switching unit (fixed-
mounted or withdrawable version) and a switch disconnector
• 3VT9 410-6DT00 switch disconnector unit unit.
For the withdrawable version, the 3VT4 710-3AA38-0AA0
switching unit requires
• 3VT9 500-4WA30 withdrawable version base.
The withdrawable version base must be fitted with:
- 2 x 3VT9 500-4EF30 connection set (front connection) or
- 3VT9 500-4RD30 (rear connection)
• We recommend fitting the switching unit with:
- 3VT9 500-4SA40 mounting bolts set (4 x M8 x 60)

Rated current In Switching capacity Icu DT Order No. PS* Weight
per PU
approx.
A kA kg
Switching units
Fixed-mounted version, 3-pole
4
1000 65 B 3VT4 710-3AA30-0AA0 1 unit 23.000
Withdrawable version, 3-pole

1000 65 B 3VT4 710-3AA38-0AA0 1 unit 23.000

Siemens LV 36 · 2011 4/3
© Siemens AG 2011


Rated current In Set current of the inverse- DT Order No. PS* Weight
time delayed overload trip per PU
units „L“ Ir approx.
A A kg
Distribution protection, ETU DP, LI function
• Provides protection for lines and transformers
315 125 ... 315 B 3VT9 431-6AC00 1 unit 0.500
630 250 ... 630 B 3VT9 463-6AC00 1 unit 0.500
800 315 ... 800 B 3VT9 480-6AC00 1 unit 0.500
1000 400 ... 1000 B 3VT9 410-6AC00 1 unit 0.586
Motor/generator protection, ETU MP, LI function
• Provides protection for motors and generators
• Suitable also for protecting lines and transformers
315 125 ... 315 B 3VT9 431-6AP00 1 unit 0.500
630 250 ... 630 B 3VT9 463-6AP00 1 unit 0.500
800 315 ... 800 B 3VT9 480-6AP00 1 unit 0.500
1000 400 ... 1000 B 3VT9 410-6AP00 1 unit 0.590
Universal protection, ETU UP, LSI function
• For protecting complicated loads or those not specified in advance
315 125 ... 315 B 3VT9 431-6AD00 1 unit 0.500
630 250 ... 630 B 3VT9 463-6AD00 1 unit 0.500
800 315 ... 800 B 3VT9 480-6AD00 1 unit 0.500
4 1000 400 ... 1000 B 3VT9 410-6AD00 1 unit 0.500
Switch-disconnector unit
1000 Switch-disconnector unit B 3VT9 410-6DT00 1 unit 0.474
Signalling unit
Signalling unit for trip units ETU, LP and UP B 3VT9 500-6AE00 1 unit 0.670

approx.
kg
Auxiliary switches
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V/DC 60 ... 240 V B 3VT9 500-2AF10 1 unit 0.041
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V B 3VT9 500-2AF20 1 unit 0.041
Shunt trip units

AC/DC 24 V B 3VT9 500-1SF00 1 unit 0.199
AC/DC 48 V B 3VT9 500-1SG00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 110 V B 3VT9 500-1SH00 1 unit 0.220
AC 230 V/DC 220 V B 3VT9 500-1SJ00 1 unit 0.201
AC/DC 400 V B 3VT9 500-1SK00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 500 V B 3VT9 500-1SL00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 24 V B 3VT9 500-1UF00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 48 V B 3VT9 500-1UG00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 110 V B 3VT9 500-1UH00 1 unit 0.220
AC 230 V/DC 220 V B 3VT9 500-1UJ00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 400 V B 3VT9 500-1UK00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 500 V B 3VT9 500-1UL00 1 unit 0.220

4/4 Siemens LV 36 · 2011
© Siemens AG 2011

■ Overview
Rotary operating mechanism In order to operate the circuit breaker through the switchgear
cabinet door the following components are additionally needed:
The rotary operating mechanism assembly consists of:
• 3VT9 500-3HJ10 extension shaft
• 3VT9 500-3HA10 rotary operating mechanism
• 3VT9 500-3HG10/HG20 coupling driver
• 3VT9 500-3HE/HF10 hand drive lever

per PU
approx.
kg
(hand drive unit)
• lockable with padlock B 3VT9 500-3HA10 1 unit 0.230
Hand drive lever

Coupling driver
• Degree of protection IP44
• Degree of protection IP66
B
B
3VT9 500-3HG10
3VT9 500-3HG20
1 unit
1 unit
0.265
0.140
4
length 365 mm
Mechanical Interlocks
Mechanical interlocks for the rotary operating mechanism B 3VT9 500-8LA00 1 unit 0.120
for circuit breakers/switch disconnectors, fixed-mounted version
Both circuit breakers must be equipped with a rotary operating mecha-
nism and a knob.
Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire
Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire is intended for fixed-mounted
• For circuit breakers/switch disconnectors, fixed-mounted version B 3VT9 500-8LC10 1 unit 0.400
• For one fixed-mounted and one withdrawable circuit breaker/switch B 3VT9 500-8LC30 1 unit 0.400
disconnector
• For circuit breaker/switch disconnector, withdrawable version B 3VT9 500-8LC40 1 unit 0.500
Motorized operating mechanism;
Rated control voltage
AC/DC 110 V B 3VT9 500-3MN00 1 unit 4,350
AC 230 V/DC 220 V B 3VT9 500-3MQ00 1 unit 4,454
Motorized operating mechanism with
operations counter;
AC/DC 110 V B 3VT9 500-3MN10 1 unit 4,400

Siemens LV 36 · 2011 4/5
© Siemens AG 2011

■ Overview
Withdrawable version - 2 x 3VT9 500-4EF30 connection set (front connection) or
3VT9 500-4RD30 (rear connection)
When connecting the main circuit, the recommendations on
page 5/10 as well as the deionizing space (see page 5/34) must • We recommend attaching the withdrawable version base to
be observed the switchboard with:
- 3VT9 500-4SA40 mounting bolt set (4 x M8 x60)
• The withdrawable version base must be fitted with:
- 3VT4 710-3AA38-0AA0 switching unit, 3-pole version;

Version Max. permissible Type of cables DT Order No. PS* Weight
approx.
mm2 kg
Withdrawable version base for 3-pole circuit breaker/switch B 3VT9 500-4WA30 1 unit 13,000
disconnector
Connecting sets
Box terminals, double 2 x 70 ... 240 Cu/Al cables B 3VT9 524-4TG30 1 unit 1.470
4 For connecting four 70 ... 240 mm2 cables, it is possible to use two
3VT9 524-4TG30 connecting sets. Not for
3VT4 710-3AA30-0AA0 switching unit.
Box terminals, 70 ... 240 Cu/Al cables B 3VT9 524-4TF30 1 unit 0.663
For connecting three 70 ... 240 mm2 cables, it is possible to combine
the 3VT9 524-4TG30 connecting set with the 3VT9 524-4TF30
connecting set. Not for 3VT4 710-3AA30-0AA0 switching unit.
Rear connection Busbars

• Up to 1000 A B 3VT9 400-4RC30 1 unit 1.430
• Up to 1600 A B 3VT9 500-4RC30 1 unit 2.678
Front connection Busbars B 3VT9 500-4EF30 1 unit 2.730

Rear connection Busbars B 3VT9 500-4RD30 1 unit 3,420

Terminals for circular 150 ... 300 Cu/Al cables

conductors
• for 2 cables B 3VT9 532-4TF30 1 unit 1.000

4/6 Siemens LV 36 · 2011
© Siemens AG 2011

Further accessories

per PU
approx.
kg
Accessories
Insulating barriers
In case of reversed connection (supply to terminals 2, 4, 6), the insu-
lating barriers must also be installed on the bottom side.
Not included in standard scope of delivery of switching units in fixed-
mounted version.
• For switching unit, fixed-mounted version B 3VT9 500-8CE30 1 unit 0.264
• For withdrawable version B 3VT9 500-8CF30 1 unit 0.142
Terminal cover protection

Increases degree of protection of connection point to IP20.
Intended for withdrawable version with front connection.
4
We recommend installation of terminal cover protection on both sides
of the withdrawable device for increasing safety when maintaining the
electrical device.
• For circuit breakers/switch disconnectors, fixed-mounted version B 3VT9 500-8CD30 1 unit 0.287
with rear connection
• For withdrawable version with front connection B 3VT9 500-8CC30 1 unit 0.168
Insulating grommets
Intended for fixed-mounted version of switching unit and withdraw-
able version with rear connection.
The insulating connecting sets insulate connecting sets of rear con-
nection from switchgear structure. We recommend installation on all
connecting sets with rear connection.
• For rear connection B 3VT9 500-8CG30 1 unit 0.100
Enables locking circuit breaker in “switched off manually” position.
For locking, up to three padlocks with a max. shank diameter of
6 mm may be used

• Accessory compartment cover

• For connecting circuit breaker accessories to withdrawable version
(15 wire)
Position indicator B 3VT9 500-4WL00 1 unit 0.020
Signals circuit breaker/switch disconnector position in withdrawable
version
Mounting bolts B 3VT9 500-4SA40 1 unit 0.144
• For withdrawable version
ON button cover B 3VT9 500-3MF20 1 unit 0.019

• For motorized operating mechanism, cover can be sealed with
sealing wire

Siemens LV 36 · 2011 4/7
© Siemens AG 2011

Description 3VT4 Circuit breakers Switch disconnector
Order number 3VT4 710-3AA30-0AA0 3VT9 410-6DT00
3VT4 710-3AA38-0AA0
Approval marks
Number of poles 3
Rated normal current Iu A 1000
Rated operational voltage Ue V AC max. 690 AC max. 690,
DC max. 440
Utilization category (selectivity) AC 690 V A, B --
Utilization category (switching mode) AC 690 V -- AC-23 B
DC 440 V -- DC-23 B
Rated short-time withstand current Ue=AC 690 V Icw/t kA/1 s 15 15
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (rms value)1) Icu/Ue AC 85 kA/230V --
AC 65 kA/415V
AC 45 kA/500V
4 Off-time at Icu ms
AC 20 kA/690V
30 --
Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity (rms value) Ics/Ue AC 45 kA/230V --
AC 36 kA/415V
AC 30 kA/500V
AC 20 kA/690V
Rated short-circuit making capacity (peak value) Icm/Ue 140 kA/AC 415 V 30 kA/AC 415 V,
30 kA/DC 440 V
Electrical endurance (Ue = AC 415 V ) cycles 4000
Switching frequency cycles/hr 120
Ambient temperature range -40 ... +55
Plug-in design --
Withdrawable design ✓
Accessories
Switches-auxiliary/relative/signal/early ✓/✓/--/--
Shunt trip unit ✓
Undervoltage trip unit ✓
Manual front operating mechanism ✓
Mechanical interlocking to the rotary operating mechanism, by Bowden wire ✓
Bolt sealing inset/additional cover for trip unit ✓/--
✓ available, 1) If the circuit breaker connection is reversed (input terminals 2, 4, 6, output
-- unavailable terminals 1, 3, 5), Icu does not change.
4/8 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Trip units ETU DP, MP and UP - description of function
■ Overview
Proper functioning of trip units does not depend on the wave-
The electronic trip unit is a separate and interchangeable unit, form of the current in the main circuit. The function of the trip unit
which has to be ordered in addition to the 3VT4 710-3AA..-0AA0 is supported by a microprocessor, which processes a sampled
switching unit. By exchanging the trip unit, the range of the cir- signal of the power circuit and recalculates it to obtain an rms
cuit breaker’s rated current can be easily changed. value. Therefore, digital trip units are suitable for protecting cir-
Trip units for the 3VT4 710-3AA30-0AA0 switching unit are avail- cuits where the sinusoidal current is distorted by high harmonics
able in four current ranges In = 315, 630, 800 and 1000 A. (e.g. circuits with controlled rectifiers, power factor compensa-
The trip units cover rated currents ranging from 125 to 1000 A. tors, pulse loading, and the like).
Tripping characteristics All the trip units protect a circuit against short-circuiting and
overloading. Setting of selective cascading of circuit breakers is
Several different trip units are available. Some have adjustable especially enabled by the ETU UP trip unit. Tripping characteris-
characteristics (in order to match the protected device and to tics of the trip units are independent of the ambient temperature.
achieve the required selectivity): The trip unit is attached to the switching unit by two bolts. The
ETU DP trip units translucent cover over the adjustment controls can be sealed
(with sealing wire).
L I
Ir
Adjustment of the tripping characteristics for ETU DP and MP
t trip units
The tripping characteristics of the trip units are defined by stan-
dard EN 60 947-2. The characteristics are adjusted in two zones,
using latched switches located on the trip unit:
L is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal
Ii
protection.
NSO0_00373
I is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against

I
ultimate short-circuit currents. For ETU MP trip units, the time de-
lay can be set at 0 or 50 ms.
ETU DP trip units have one type of characteristics with adjust-
1. Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L
4
able Ir and Irm.
• The time-dependent trip unit ETU DP is adjusted with one Ir
ETU MP trip units
switch. The Ir switch adjusts the circuit breaker’s rated current.
L I The characteristic moves along the current axis. The trip unit
Ir is set to one characteristic.
t
• The time-dependent trip unit ETU MP is adjusted with two
tr
switches, Ir and tr. The first (Ir) switch adjusts the circuit
breaker’s rated current. The characteristic moves along the
current axis.
Turning the other switch (tr) adjusts the time after which the cir-
Ii cuit breaker will trip while passing through 7.2 Ir. The tripping
characteristic thus moves along the time axis. With the tr
NSO0_00374
switch it is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics:

I
- Four characteristics are available for motor protection.
Breaking times correspond to trip unit classes 10 A, 10, 20,
ETU MP trip units have more characteristics with adjustable Ir, tr 30. By changing tr, it is possible to select the characteristics
and Irm. according to the required motor starting (light, medium,
ETU UP trip units heavy or very heavy starting).
- Four characteristics are available for protecting transformers
ETU UP trip units have universal characteristics, with the great- and lines.
est variability in adjustment: Ir, tr, Isd, tsd and Ii. It is not possible to turn the device back on right after the time-
dependent trip unit has been actuated and the circuit breaker
has tripped. The trip unit must be allowed to cool off (it has a
thermal memory). The memory can be disabled by turning the
“restart” switch from the normal “Tt” position to the “T0” posi-
tion. The time-dependent trip unit remains active, and only its
thermal memory is deactivated. The thermal memory should
be switched off only in justified cases, and with the knowledge
that the temperature could rise in the protected device, caus-
ing repeated tripping.
2. Time-independent instantaneous trip unit (short-circuit trip
unit) I
The time-independent instantaneous ETU DP and ETU MP trip
units are adjusted with one switch, Ii. The Ii switch sets the short-
circuit current that, when reached or exceeded, causes instan-
taneous tripping of the circuit breaker.
Regulation of the short-circuit trip unit provides settings for the
characteristic appropriate for protecting lines and motors. The
wave form of the tripping characteristic is adjusted with latched
switches located on the trip unit’s front panel according to the
needs of the protected device. A visual demonstration on setting
the tripping characteristics is available in the SIMARIS design
software (Tool for Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution).
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 4/9

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Tripping characteristics of ETU DP and MP trip units with load ETU DP and MP tripping times shortening with load
The tripping characteristics from the cold state indicate the T - When tripping from the trip unit’s “warm” state, the tripping
tripping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment time of the characteristic is cut short during the standstill time tu
when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing through the by coefficient k.
circuit breaker. The tripping characteristics tripped from warm
state, indicate the tripping times during which it is assumed that, Thermal standstill time of the characteristics
before the moment when an overcurrent develops, current is For all kinds of characteristics tr, the thermal standstill time for
flowing through the circuit breaker. Characteristics of electronic ETU DP and MP trip units is tu ≥ 30 min.
plotted in a cold state. Digital trip units enable simulation of a During this time, the short-circuit tripping time tv is cut short from
tripping in warm state. The tripping times become shorter in a the cold-state characteristic by the coefficient k.
steady state, as shown in the following graph. The steady state The real tripping time is ts = k . tv
is a period during which the characteristics do not change. If the
circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for at least 30 Example
minutes, the tripping times will be cut by a half. If the load is less The shortening constant can be read from the diagram. With
than 70% of Ir , the tripping time does not become shorter. steady current 85% of Ir the real tripping time will be shortened
NSO0_00375 to:
ts = 0.74 . tv
1.0
k [-] k [–] time shortening coefficient
0.8
0.6 Trip units are set by the manufacturer
T Ir = min
0.4
Restart = T(t)
4 Irm = min, 0 ms
tr = TV, min
0.2
0.0
50 60 70 80 90 100
I r [%]
4/10 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Adjustment of tripping characteristics, trip unit ETU UP 2. Delayed time-independent trip units S
L S I It is used to set up a selective cascade of circuit breakers. It is
set up using specifications Isd and tsd.
Ir
t Isd is an n-multiple of current Ir (Isd = n × Ir). It is a short-circuit
current that, within the span of Isd to Irm, will trip the circuit
breaker with delay tsd, where tsd is a delay set up for switching
tr off the trip unit.
The delayed time-independent trip unit actuates the circuit
breaker if the current in the circuit reaches at least the preset n-
I 2 t ON multiple and lasts at least the preset delay time tsd. The trip unit
Isd
tsd can be disabled by setting the parameter n (Isd = n × Ir) into the
position. Parameter tsd can be set to values with respect to the
Ii energy that passed through l2t (switch position l2t on). The pre-
I 2 t OFF set time values are then applicable for currents higher than 10x
NSO0_00456
current Ir. Tripping times of k-multiples of Ir for k < 10 are defined

as follows:
I
10 2
The tripping characteristics of trip units are defined by standard t = tv ⎛ ⎞
⎝ k⎠
EN 60 947-2. The characteristics are adjusted in three zones us-
ing latched switches located on the trip unit:
3. Time-independent instantaneous trip unit I
L - is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal
It is set up with parameter Irm. Irm is a short-circuit current that,
protection.
when reached or exceeded, causes the circuit breaker to switch
S - is a zone of medium overcurrents and includes long-distance off instantaneously. It is set up directly in kA on the trip unit. The
short-circuit protection for lines. Intentional delay in tripping of wave form of the tripping characteristic is adjusted using latched
these low short-circuit currents can be used to achieve selectiv- switches located on the trip unit’s front panel to match the needs
ity of protective devices. This type of delay can be set only in
self-contained trip units (full version).
of the protected device. A visual demonstration on setting the
tripping characteristic is available in the SIMARIS design soft-
4
ware (Tool for Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution).
I - is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against
ultimate short-circuiting without time delay.
I2t - Characteristic setting in the ON position represents a con-
stant value of energy passed through. If fuses are used as pro-
tective elements for outgoing branch feeders, it is possible to
adjust the selective part of the characteristics to better suit the
shape of the fuse characteristics.
The time-dependent trip unit ETU UP is adjusted with two
switches, Ir and tr. The first switch, Ir, adjusts the circuit breaker’s
rated current. The characteristics move along the current axis.
Turning the second switch, tr, adjusts the time after which the cir-
cuit breaker will trip while passing through 7.2 Ir. The tripping
characteristics thus move on the time axis. A total of 8 charac-
teristics can be set with the tr switch. Breaking times correspond
to tripping classes 10 A, 10, 20, 30.
It is not possible to turn the device back on right after the time-
dependent trip unit has tripped the circuit breaker. The trip unit
must be allowed to cool off (it has a thermal memory). The mem-
ory can be disabled by turning the “restart” switch from the nor-
mal “Tt” position to the “T0” position. The time-dependent trip
unit remains active, and only its thermal memory is inactivated.
The thermal memory should be switched off only in justified
cases, and with the knowledge that there could be rising tem-
perature in the protected device, causing repeated tripping.
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 4/11

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Tripping characteristics for ETU UP trip units with load Example
The tripping characteristics from the cold state indicate the trip- The shortening constant can be read from the diagram. With
ping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment steady current 85% of Ir, the real tripping time will be shortened
when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing through the to:
circuit breaker. The tripping characteristics tripped from warm
state indicate the tripping times during which it is assumed that, ts = 0.74 . tv
before the moment when an overcurrent develops, current is k [–] time shortening coefficient
flowing through the circuit breaker. Characteristics of electronic Ir [A] adjusted rated current of trip unit
trip units are independent of the ambient temperature and are tv [s] tripping time of the trip unit derived from the characteristics
plotted in a cold state. Digital trip units enable simulation of a ts [s] real tripping time of the trip unit tripped from warm state
tripping in warm state. The tripping times become shorter in a tu [s] standstill period for particular characteristics
steady state, as shown in the following diagram. The steady
state is a period during which the characteristics do not change. Trip units are set by the manufacturer
Ir = min
If the circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for at least Restart = T(t)
30 minutes, the tripping times will be cut by half. If the load is Irm = min
less than 70% of Ir , the tripping time does not become shorter. tr = min
NSO0_00375 tv = min, I2t - ON
Isd = min
1.0
k [-] Trip units are set by the manufacturer
Ir = min
0.8
Restart = T(t)
Irm = min, 0 ms
0.6
tr = TV, t(t), min
T
Isd = 0 ms, min
4 0.4
I= 0.5 Ir
0.2
0.0
50 60 70 80 90 100
I r [%]
T - When tripping from the “warm” state, the tripping time of the
characteristics are cut short during the standstill time tu by coef-
ficient k.
Thermal standstill time of the characteristics
For all kinds of characteristics tr the thermal standstill period for
ETU UP trip units is tu ≥ 30 min. During this time, the short-circuit
tripping time tv is cut short from the cold-state characteristics by
the coefficient k.
The real tripping time is ts = k .tv
4/12 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Trip units ETU DP - Distribution protection Specifications for adjustable trip units
• Provides protection for lines and transformers
Order No. Rated cur- Overload Restart Instantaneous short
The 3VT9 4..-6AC00 trip unit is intended only for the 3VT4 710- rent In protection Ir circuit protection Ii
3AA..-0AA0 switching units. Operation of the trip unit is con- A A
trolled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is fitted with a thermal
memory that can be disabled by turning the switch on the front 125, 137 0.5
panel from position T(t) to position T(0). After having disabled the 144, 160 1
thermal memory, the thermal tripping function remains active.
172, 180 1.5
A practical advantage of the trip unit is special tripping charac- 200, 220 T(0) 2
teristics that provide for optimized use of transformers up to 1.5
I n. 3VT9 431-6AC00 315 231, 243 T(t) 2.5
Another advantage of this trip unit is the simple adjustment of the 250, 260 3
tripping characteristics. Set-up includes only the rated current in 275, 290 4
a range of 0.4 to 1.0 of In and the short-circuit tripping level.
305, 315 5
Reaching 80% and 110% of Ir is indicated by LED diodes on the
front panel denoted as I > 80% and I > 110% of Ir. 250, 260 0.8
Located on the lower part of the trip unit cover are four photo- 275, 290 1.5
cells for communicating with the 3VT9 500-6AE00 signalling
unit. 305, 315 2
Tripping characteristics 345, 360 T(0) 3
NSO0_00377
3VT9 463-6AC00 630 400, 435 T(t) 4
10000
Ir 455, 480 6
5000 min. max.
t [s] Ir Ii 500, 550 8
2000
1000 575, 630 10
500
200
315, 345
360, 400
1
1.5
4
100 435, 455 2
L
50 480, 500 T(0) 3
20 3VT9 480-6AC00 800 550, 575 T(0) 4
10
In = 315 A
In=630A 610, 630 6
5
n = 630 A
IIn=1000A 3 3 685, 720 9
2 n = 800 A
IIn=1250A
n = 1000 A
IIn=1600A 760, 800 12
1
0.5 400, 435 1.25
I 455, 480 2
0.2
0.1 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
2.5
3.0 4.0 5.0 500, 550 3
0.05 575, 610 T(0) 5
In = 315 A Ii [kA]
0.02 3VT9 410-6AC00 1000 630, 685 T(0) 7
0.01 720, 760 9
0.1 0.8 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10
0.05 800, 866 12
In = 630 A Ii [kA] 909, 1000 14
0.02
0.01
0.1 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 12
0.05
In = 800 A Ii [kA]
0.02
0.01
0.1 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 1214
0.05
In = 1000 A Ii [kA]
0.02
0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 4/13

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Trip units ETU MP - Motor protection
Order No. Rated Overload tr (7.2 x Ir) Restart Instantaneous
• Direct protection of motors and generators cur- protec- short circuit pro-
rent In tion Ir tection I
• Can protect lines and transformers
A A S kA kA ms
The 3VT9 4..-6AP00 trip unit is intended only for the 3VT4 710-
3AA..-0AA0 switching unit. The operation of the trip unit is con- 0.8
trolled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is equipped with a ther- 250, 260 1 (TV 1) 1.5
mal memory that can be disabled by turning a switch on the front
panel from position T(t) to position T(0). After having disabled the 2
thermal memory, the thermal trip unit remains active. 275, 290 3 (TV 3) T(0) 3
A practical advantage of the trip unit are specially designed trip- 4 0
ping characteristics that provide for optimal exploitation of trans- 305, 315 10 (TV 10) 6
formers up to 1.5 In.
8
It is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics on the trip unit.
From these, in mode “M”, there are 4 characteristics for motor 3VT9 463-6AP00 630 345, 360 30 (TV 30) 10
protection and another 4 characteristics in mode “TV” for pro- 10
tecting transformers and lines. The shape of each characteristic 400, 435 3 (TV 3) 8
can be changed using a selector switch.
6
When one or two phases fail, in the M-characteristic mode, the
switch will open with a 4 s delay (so called undercurrent trip- 455, 480 8 (TV 8) T(t) 4
ping). 3 50
Another parameter for adjusting the trip unit is the rated current, 500, 550 15 (TV 15) 2
which is adjusted in a range of 0.4 to 1.0 of In and the short-cir- 1.5
cuit tripping level, for which it is possible to set the delay at 0 or
50 ms. The reaching of 80% and 110% of Ir is indicated by LED 375, 630 25 (TV 25) 0.8
diodes on the front panel denoted as I > 80% of Ir and I > 110% 1
4 of Ir. Located on the lower part of the trip unit cover are two pho-
tocells for communicating with the 3VT9 500-6AE00 signalling 315, 345 1 (TV 1) 1.5
unit. 2
455, 480 3 (TV 3) T(0) 3 4 0
4
500, 550 10 (TV 10) 6
9
Specifications for adjustable trip units 3VT9 480-6AP00 800 575, 610 30 (TV 30) 12
12
Order No. Rated Overload tr (7.2 x Ir) Restart Instantaneous
cur- protec- short circuit pro- 630, 685 3 (TV 3) 9
rent In tion Ir tection I
6
A A S kA kA ms
722, 760 8 (TV 8) T(t) 4
0.5
3 50
125, 137 1 (TV 1) 1
800, 866 15 (TV 15) 2
1.5
1.5
144, 160 3 (TV 3) T(0) 2 0
909, 1000 25 (TV 25) 1
2.5
1.25
172, 180 10 (TV 10) 3
400, 435 1 (TV 1) 2
4
3
3VT9 431-6AP00 315 200, 220 30 (TV 30) 5
455, 480 3 (TV 3) T(0) 5 0
5
7
231, 243 3 (TV 3) 4
500, 550 10 (TV 10) 9
3
12
250, 260 8 (TV 8) T(t) 2.5 50
3VT9 410-6AP00 1000 575, 610 30 (TV 30) 14
2
12
275, 290 15 (TV 15) 1.5
630, 685 3 (TV 3) 12
1
9
305, 315 25 (TV 25) 0.5
722, 760 8 (TV 8) 7
T(t) 5 50
800, 866 15 (TV 15) 3
2
909, 1000 25 (TV 25) 1.25
4/14 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Tripping characteristic ETU MP
NSO0_00378 NSO0_00379
10000 10000 Ir
Ir TV min. max.
M
min. max. 5000
5000
2000 Ii 2000 Ii
1000 1000
500 500 25
200 200
L tr L
100 100
50 30 50 tr
30 25
20 20
15 15
10 10 10 10 8 8
n = 315 A
IIn=630A n = 315 A
IIn=630A
5 5
n = 630 A
IIn=1000A n = 630 A
IIn=1000A
3 3 3 3
n = 800 A
IIn=1250A 2 n = 800 A
IIn=1250A
2
n = 1000 A
IIn=1600A n = 1000 A
IIn=1600A
1 1 1 1
0.5 0.5
I I
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 0.05 In = 315 A Ii [kA]
In = 315 A 2.5 Ii [kA] 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
2.5
3.0 4.0 5.0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
0.02 0 0.02 0
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 0.05
In = 630 A Ii [kA] In = 630 A Ii [kA]
0.8 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10 0.8 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10
0.02
0.01
0 0.02
0.01
0
4
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 0.05 Ii [kA]
In = 800 A Ii [kA] In = 800 A
1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 12 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 12
0.02 0 0.02 0
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.1
50 50
0.05 In = 1000 A 14 Ii [kA] 0.05 In = 1000 A 14 Ii [kA]
1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12
0.02 0 0.02 0
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 4/15

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Trip units ETU UP - Universal protection
• For protecting complicated loads or those not specified in The operational state 70% of Ir is signalled by an LED indicator
advance that flashes green in a 1.5 s interval. As the load grows, the
blinking frequency of the diode increases. In case of a load
The 3VT9 4..-6AD00 trip unit is intended for the 3VT4 710-3AA..- larger than 110% of Ir this LED will turn red and just before
0AA0 switching unit only. The UP trip unit is equipped with a ther- tripping will begin to blink red. Located on the lower part of the
mal memory that can be disabled by turning the “restart” switch trip unit cover are two photocells for communicating with the
on the front panel from the position T(t) to the position T(0). After 3VT9 500-6AE00 signalling unit.
the thermal memory has been disabled, the thermal trip unit re-
mains active.
A practical advantage of the UP trip unit is its maximum flexibility
for adjusting the tripping characteristics. With its possibility for
setting I2t = constant and I5t = constant, it is optimal from the
selectivity viewpoint for its interaction with fusing devices.
Specifications for adjustable trip units

Order No. Rated current Overload pro- tr (7.2 x Ir) Short delayed short tsd I2t Restart Instantaneous short
In tection Ir circuit protection circuit protection I
Isd=(n x Ir)
A A S n ms kA
125, 137 0.5 2 50, 100 0.5
144, 160 3 3 200, 300 on T(0) 1
172, 180 5 5 400, 600 1.5
3VT9 431-6AD00 315 200, 220 7 6 800, 1000 2
231, 243 10 8 50, 100 2.5
4 250, 260 15 9 200, 300 off T(t) 3
275, 290 20 10 400, 600 4
305, 315 25 ∞ 800, 1000 5
250, 260 0.5 2 50, 100 0.8
275, 290 3 3 200, 300 on T(0) 1.5
305, 315 5 5 400, 600 2
3VT9 463-6AD00 630 345, 360 7 6 800, 1000 3
400, 435 10 8 50, 100 4
455, 480 15 9 200, 300 off T(t) 6
500, 550 20 10 400, 600 8
575, 630 25 ∞ 800, 1000 10
315, 345 0.5 2 50, 100 1
360, 400 3 3 200, 300 on T(0) 1.5
435, 455 5 5 400, 600 2
3VT9 480-6AD00 800 480, 500 7 6 800, 1000 3
550, 575 10 8 50, 100 4
610, 630 15 9 200, 300 off T(t) 6
685, 720 20 10 400, 600 9
760, 800 25 ∞ 800, 1000 12
400, 435 0.5 2 50, 100 1.25
455, 480 3 3 200, 300 on T(0) 2
500, 550 5 5 400, 600 3
3VT9 410-6AD00 1000 575, 610 7 6 800, 1000 5
630, 685 10 8 50, 100 7
720, 760 15 9 200, 300 off T(t) 9
800, 866 20 10 400, 600 12
909, 1000 25 ∞ 800, 1000 14
4/16 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Tripping characteristics ETU UP
NSO0_00380 NSO0_00381
10000 10000 min. max.
min. max.
5000 Ir 5000 Ir
t [s] Ir tr Isd tv Ii t [s] Ir tr Isd tv Ii
2000 2000
1000 Ii = (2 … 10) x Ir min Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir min
500 500
200 Ii = (2 … 10) x Ir max 200 Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir max

L L
100 100
50 50
20 In = 315 A 20 In = 315 A
In = 630 A In = 630 A
10 10 In = 800 A
In = 800 A
5 In = 1000 A 5 In = 1000 A
2 2 S
S
1 1000 1 1000
0.5 0.5 tr [s] 0.5 0.5 0.5 tr [s] 0.5

tv [ms] tv [ms]
I (I 2 t = ON) I
0.2 (I 2 t = OFF) 0.2
0.1 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0
0.1 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0
0.05 50 0.05 50
In = 315 A Ii [kA]
0.02 0.02 In = 315 A Ii [kA]
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.8 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10
0.1 0.8 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10
0.05 50 0.05 50
In = 630 A Ii [kA]
0.02
0.01
0.02
0.01
In = 630 A Ii [kA]
4
0.1 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 12
0.1 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 12
0.05 50 0.05 50
In = 800 A Ii [kA]
0.02 0.02 In = 800 A Ii [kA]
0.01 0.01
0.1 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12
14 0.1 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 1214
0.05 50 0.05 50
In = 1000 A Ii [kA]
0.02 In = 1000 A Ii [kA]
0.02
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 4/17

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Tripping characteristics ETU UP
NSO0_00382 NSO0_00383
10000 min. max.
10000 min. max.
5000 Ir 5000 Ir
2000 2000
1000 Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir min 1000 Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir min
500 500
Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir max Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir max
200 200
L L
100 100
50 50
In = 315 A 25 25 In = 315 A 25 25
20 20
In = 630 A In = 630 A
10 In = 800 A tr [s] 10 In = 800 A tr [s]
5 In = 1000 A 5 In = 1000 A
3 3 3 3
2 S 2
S
1 1000 1 1000
0.5 0.5
tv [ms] tv [ms]
(I 2 t = OFF) I I
0.2 0.2 (I 2 t = ON)
0.1 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0 0.1 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0
0.05 50 0.05 50
0.02 In = 315 A Ii [kA] 0.02 In = 315 A I i [kA]

0.01 0.01
0.1 0.8 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10 0.1 0.8 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10
0.05 50 0.05 50
4 0.02
0.01
In = 630 A Ii [kA] 0.02
0.01
In = 630 A I i [kA]
0.1 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 12 0.1 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 9.0 12
0.05 50 0.05 50
0.02 In = 800 A Ii [kA] 0.02 In = 800 A I i [kA]

0.01 0.01
0.1 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 1214 0.1 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 1214
0.05 50 0.05 50
0.02 In = 1000 A Ii [kA] 0.02 In = 1000 A I i [kA]

0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
4/18 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

5
© Siemens AG 2011

up to 1600 A

up to 1600 A
5/2 General data
5/4 Auxiliary switches and shunt trip units
5/5 Manual/motorized operating
mechanisms

up to 1600 A
5/12 Withdrawable version
5/14 Trip units
5/24 Signalling units
5/26 Shunt trip units
5/27 Undervoltage trip units
5/28 Rotary operating mechanism
5/29 Mechanical interlocking and parallel
switching
5/34 Insulating barriers
© Siemens AG 2011

Catalog
General data
■ Overview
Connecting sets
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Switching unit 9
10
11
1
12
5
16
14 15
13
Accessories
NSO0_00229a
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
1 Molded case circuit breaker 10 Rotary operating mechanism 19 Extension cable

2 Multiple box terminals 11 Mechanical interlocking 20 Terminal cover
3 Box terminals 12 Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire 21 Terminal cover
4 Circular conductor terminal 13 Motor operating mechanism 22 Insulating barriers
5 Multiple feed-in terminal 14 Shunt trip unit 23 Insulating barriers
6 Multiple feed-in terminal 15 Undervoltage trip unit 24 Insulating grommets
7 Rear connection 16 Switch 25 Mounting bolts
8 Front connection 17 Lockingtype lever
9 Rear connection 18 Sealing inset
5/2 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Catalog
■ Overview
The switching unit includes: The circuit breakers consist of a 3-pole switching unit (fixed-
• 3VT9 500-8CE30 insulating barriers mounted or withdrawable version) and a trip unit, which is avail-
able with a choice of different characteristics.
• Set of installation bolts (4x M8x80)
• Connecting sets for front connection - busbar connection Switch disconnector
The switching unit must be outfitted with: The switch disconnector consists of a switching unit (fixed-
mounted or withdrawable version) and a switch disconnector
• Trip unit ETU DP, MP or UP (circuit breaker) or unit.
• 3VT9 516-6DT00 switch disconnector unit
(switch disconnector)
For the withdrawable version, the 3VT5 716-3AA38-0AA0
switching unit additionally requires
• 3VT9 500-4WA40 withdrawable version base

Rated Current Short-circuit breaking DT Order No. PS* Weight
In capacity Icu at AC 400 V approx.
A kA kg
Switching units
Fixed-mounted version, 3-pole
1600 55 B 3VT5 716-3AA30-0AA0 1 unit 23.000
Withdrawable version, 3-pole

1600 55 B 3VT5 716-3AA38-0AA0 1 unit 23.000
5
For different versions of connection, it is necessary to use con-
necting sets (see page 5/6).

Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/3
© Siemens AG 2011


Rated current In Overload protection DT Order No. PS* Weight
approx.
A kg
Distribution protection, ETU DP, LI function
• For protecting lines and transformers
630 250 ... 630 A B 3VT9 563-6AC00 1 unit 0.500
1000 400 ... 1000 A B 3VT9 510-6AC00 1 unit 0.500
1250 500 ... 1250 A B 3VT9 512-6AC00 1 unit 0.500
1600 630 ... 1600 A B 3VT9 516-6AC00 1 unit 0.590
Motor/generator protection, ETU MP, LI function
• Provides protection for motors and generators
• Suitable also for protecting lines and transformers
630 250 ... 630 A B 3VT9 563-6AP00 1 unit 0.500
1000 400 ... 1000 A B 3VT9 510-6AP00 1 unit 0.593
1250 500 ... 1250 A B 3VT9 512-6AP00 1 unit 0.500
1600 630 ... 1600 A B 3VT9 516-6AP00 1 unit 0.500
Universal protection, ETU UP LSI function
• Provides protection for complicated loads or loads not specified in
advance
630 250 ... 630 A B 3VT9 563-6AD00 1 unit 0.590
1000 400 ... 1000 A B 3VT9 510-6AD00 1 unit 0.590
1250 500 ... 1250 A B 3VT9 512-6AD00 1 unit 0.590
1600 630 ... 1600 A B 3VT9 516-6AD00 1 unit 0.590
1600 Switch disconnector unit B 3VT9 516-6DT00 1 unit 0.400
Signalling unit
Signalling unit for trip units B 3VT9 500-6AE00 1 unit 0.670
5 ETU DP, MP and UP

approx.
kg
Auxiliary switches
AC/DC 60 ... 500 V/DC60 ... 240 V B 3VT9 500-2AF10 1 unit 0.041
AC/DC 5 ... 60 V B 3VT9 500-2AF20 1 unit 0.041
Shunt trip units

AC/DC 24 V B 3VT9 500-1SF00 1 unit 0.199
AC/DC 48 V B 3VT9 500-1SG00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 110 V B 3VT9 500-1SH00 1 unit 0.220
AC 230 V/DC 220 V B 3VT9 500-1SJ00 1 unit 0.201
AC/DC 400 V B 3VT9 500-1SK00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 500 V B 3VT9 500-1SL00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 24 V B 3VT9 500-1UF00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 48 V B 3VT9 500-1UG00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 110 V B 3VT9 500-1UH00 1 unit 0.220
AC 230 V/DC 220 V B 3VT9 500-1UJ00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 400 V B 3VT9 500-1UK00 1 unit 0.220
AC/DC 500 V B 3VT9 500-1UL00 1 unit 0.220

5/4 Siemens LV 36 · 2011
© Siemens AG 2011

■ Overview
Rotary operating mechanism In order to operate the circuit breaker through the switchgear
cabinet door the following components are additionally needed:
The rotary operating mechanism assembly consists of:
• 3VT9 500-3HJ10 extension shaft
• 3VT9 500-3HA10 rotary operating mechanism
• 3VT9 500-3HG10/HG20 coupling driver
• 3VT9 500-3HE/HF10 hand drive lever

per PU
approx.
kg
(hand drive unit)
• lockable with padlock B 3VT9 500-3HA10 1 unit 0.230
Hand drive lever

Coupling driver
• Degree of protection IP44 B 3VT9 500-3HG10 1 unit 0.265
• Degree of protection IP66 B 3VT9 500-3HG20 1 unit 0.140

length 365 mm
Mechanical Interlocks
Mechanical interlocks for the rotary operating mechanism B 3VT9 500-8LA00 1 unit 0.120
for circuit breakers/switch disconnectors, fixed-mounted version
Both circuit breakers must be equipped with a rotary operating mecha-
5
nism and a knob.
Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire
Mechanical interlocking by Bowden wire is intended for fixed-mounted
• For circuit breakers/switch disconnectors, fixed-mounted version B 3VT9 500-8LC10 1 unit 0.400
• For one fixed-mounted and one withdrawable circuit breaker/switch B 3VT9 500-8LC30 1 unit 0.400
disconnector
• For circuit breaker/switch disconnector, withdrawable version B 3VT9 500-8LC40 1 unit 0.500
Motorized operating mechanism;
AC/DC 110 V B 3VT9 500-3MN00 1 unit 4,350
Motorized operating mechanism with
operations counter;
AC/DC 110 V B 3VT9 500-3MN10 1 unit 4,400

Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/5
© Siemens AG 2011

■ Overview
Withdrawable version - 2 x 3VT9 500-4EF30 connection set (front connection) or
3VT9 500-4RD30 (rear connection)
When connecting the main circuit, the recommendations on
page 5/10 as well as the deionizing space (see page 5/34) must • We recommend attaching the withdrawable version base to
be observed the switchboard with:
- 3VT9 500-4SA40 mounting bolt set (4 x M8 x60)
• The withdrawable version base must be fitted with:
- 3VT5 716-3AA38-0AA0 switching unit, 3-pole version;

Version Max. permissible Type of cables DT Order No. PS* Weight
approx.
mm2 kg
Withdrawable version base for 3-pole circuit breaker/switch B 3VT9 500-4WA30 1 unit 13,000
disconnector
Connecting sets
Box terminals, double 2 x 70 ... 240 Cu/Al cables B 3VT9 524-4TG30 1 unit 1.470
For connecting four 70 ... 240 mm2 cables, it is possible to use two
3VT9 524-4TG30 connecting sets (see page 5/11). Not for
3VT4 710-3AA30-0AA0 switching unit.
Box terminals, 70 ... 240 Cu/Al cables B 3VT9 524-4TF30 1 unit 0.663
For connecting three 70 ... 240 mm2 cables, it is possible to combine
the 3VT9 524-4TG30 connecting set with the 3VT9 524-4TF30
connecting set (see page 5/11). Not for 3VT4 710-3AA30-0AA0
switching unit.
Rear connection Busbars
• Up to 1000 A B 3VT9 400-4RC30 1 unit 1.430
5
• Up to 1600 A B 3VT9 500-4RC30 1 unit 2.678
Front connection Busbars B 3VT9 500-4EF30 1 unit 2.730

Rear connection Busbars B 3VT9 500-4RD30 1 unit 3,420

Terminals for circular 150 ... 300 Cu/Al cables

conductors

5/6 Siemens LV 36 · 2011
© Siemens AG 2011

Further accessories

per PU
approx.
kg
Accessories
Insulating barriers
In case of reversed connection (supply to terminals 2, 4, 6), the insu-
lating barriers must also be installed on the bottom side.
Not included in standard scope of delivery of switching units in fixed-
mounted version.
• For switching unit, fixed-mounted version B 3VT9 500-8CE30 1 unit 0.264
• For withdrawable version B 3VT9 500-8CF30 1 unit 0.142
Terminal cover protection

Increases degree of protection of connection point to IP20.
Intended for withdrawable version with front connection.
We recommend installation of terminal cover protection on both sides
of the withdrawable device for increasing safety when maintaining the
electrical device.
• For circuit breakers/switch disconnectors, fixed-mounted version B 3VT9 500-8CD30 1 unit 0.287
with rear connection
• For withdrawable version with front connection B 3VT9 500-8CC30 1 unit 0.168
Insulating grommets
Intended for fixed-mounted version of switching unit and withdraw-
able version with rear connection.
5
The insulating connecting sets insulate connecting sets of rear con-
nection from switchgear structure. We recommend installation on all
connecting sets with rear connection.
• For rear connection B 3VT9 500-8CG30 1 unit 0.100
Enables locking circuit breaker in “switched off manually” position.
For locking, up to three padlocks with a max. shank diameter of
6 mm may be used

• Accessory compartment cover

• For connecting circuit breaker accessories to withdrawable version
(15 wire)
Position indicator B 3VT9 500-4WL00 1 unit 0.020
Signals circuit breaker/switch disconnector position in withdrawable
version
Mounting bolts B 3VT9 500-4SA40 1 unit 0.144
• For withdrawable version
ON button cover B 3VT9 500-3MF20 1 unit 0.019

• For motorized operating mechanism, cover can be sealed with
sealing wire

Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/7
© Siemens AG 2011

Type 3VT5 circuit breakers Switch disconnector
Order number 3VT5 716-3AA30-0AA0 3VT9 516-6DT00
3VT5 716-3AA38-0AA0
Approval marks
Number of poles 3
Rated normal current Iu A 1600
DC max. 440
Utilization category (selectivity) AC 690 V A, B --
Utilization category (switching mode) AC 690 V -- AC-23 B
DC 440 V -- DC-23 B
Rated short-time withstand current Ue = AC 690 V Icw/t kA/1 s 20
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity 85 kA/AC 230 V --
(rms value)1) Icu 55 kA/AC 415 V
45 kA/AC 415 V
20 kA/AC 690 V
Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity (rms value) Ics/Ue 45 kA/AC 230 V --
36 kA/AC 415 V
30 kA/AC 500 V
20 kA/AC 690 V
Rated short-circuit making capacity 140 kA/AC 415 V 40 kA/AC 415 V
(peak value) Icm/Ue 40 kA/AC 440 V
5 Mechanical endurance
Electrical endurance (Ue = AC 415 V )
cycles 10000
4000
Switching frequency cycles/hr 120
Ambient temperature range -40 ... +55
Plug-in version --
Withdrawable version ✓
Accessories
Switches-auxiliary/relative/signal/leading ✓/✓/--/--
Shunt trip unit ✓
Undervoltage trip unit ✓
Front rotary operating mechanism ✓
Mechanical interlocking to the rotary operating mechanism by ✓
Bowden wire
Bolt sealing insert/additional cover for trip unit ✓/--
✓ available, 0) If the circuit breaker connection is reversed (input terminals 2, 4, 6,

-- unavailable output terminals 1, 3, 5), Icu does not change.
5/8 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Schematics
Circuit breaker with accessories
Recommended wiring of the Withdrawable device Connecting cable

control circuits 2 4 1 1 3 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Q3 (7)
L+ SO 1
X2
(8)
ON
B OFF
Motor drive Auxiliary trips Main circuit Switches

auxiliary auxiliary relative relative
1.13
1.21
1.31
3VT9 500-2AF001.43
2.13
2.21
2.31
3VT9 500-2AF002.43
3.13
3.21
3.31
3VT9 500-2AF003.43
4.13
4.21
4.31
3VT9 500-2AF004.43
1 3 5
B1
A1
3VT9 500-6AE00
3VT9 500-1U.00
3VT9 500-1S.00
X3 5 7 3 4 1 10
I>
I>
NC NO
or
S5 V Q
M P U< U
C
T1
T2
TEST T3
MP 6 2 1
1.14
1.22
1.32
1.44
2.14
2.22
2.32
2.44
3.14
3.22
3.32
3.44
4.14
4.22
4.32
4.44
A2
6 2 9
B2
X3 J 2 4 6
acc.c. no. 5 acc.c. no. 1 acc.c. no. 2 acc.c. no. 3 acc.c. 4
N-
3VT9
SO 2
500-
4WA40
5
NSO0_00384
X1
1 4 2 2 4 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Withdrawable device Connecting cable

M Motor
SSI Switch signalling MANUAL (NO-C)/AUTO (NC-C) modes
B Recommended wiring of the control circuits
ON Pushbutton
OFF Pushbutton
J 3VT4 710-3AA30-0AA0, 3VT5 716-3AA30-0AA0 switching
unit
Q Main contacts
T1, T2, T3, Current transformers
ETU Trip unit, ETU DP, MP and UP
TEST Pushbutton to test tripping
ZV-BL 3VT9 500-4WA40 withdrawable version
X1, X2 3VT9 500-4PL00 connecting cable for withdrawable
version
SO1, SO2 Contacts indicating positions of 3VT9 500-4WL00 (see
page 5/7) withdrawable versions, see page 5/24.
3VT9 500-1U..0 Undervoltage trip units
3VT9 500-1S..0 Shunt trip units
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/9

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Functions
Switching states in the circuit breaker cavities
Accessory compartment 1, 2 3, 4
3VT9 500-2AF10
3VT9 500-2AF10
Circuit breaker position

of circuit breaker
Lever position
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
Switched off manually or 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1

mechanism
Switched off by the trip unit, 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
auxiliary trip unit or by TEST
pushbutton
0 = contact open 1 = contact closed
■ Design
Main circuit Recommended cross-sections for cables, busbars and flexibars
• Connected with Cu/Al busbars or cables, and possibly cables for fixed-mounted and withdrawable versions
with cable lugs. Rated current Permissible cross- Busbars W x H
• Connecting sets are available for greater connecting options, In section S
(see page 5/6).
• Generally, conductors from the power supply are connected Cu AI Cu Al
to input terminals 1, 3, 5, (N) and conductors from the load to A mm2 mm2 mm mm
5 terminals 2, 4, 6, (N). But it is possible to exchange this con-
nection (switching of input and output terminals) without limit-
250 120 150
ing rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity Icu. 400 185 240
• In case of reversed connection, the circuit breaker/switch dis- 500 2 x 150 2 x 185
connector must be provided with 3VT9 500-8CE30 insulating
barriers also between terminals 2, 4, 6 (for detailed informa- 630 2 x 185 2 x 240
tion, see page 5/34). 800 2 x 240 3 x 240 50 x 10 2 x 50 x 5 2 x 50 x 8
• We recommend painting the connecting busbars.
1000 2 x 240 3 x 240 2 x 50 x 6
• Input and output conductors/busbars must be mechanically
reinforced to avoid transmitting electrodynamic force to the 1300 3 x 240 4 x 240 2 x 50 x 10
circuit breaker/switch disconnector during short-circuiting. 1500 (1450) 1)
4 x 240 2 x 50 x 10
deionizing space of the circuit breaker/switch disconnector is 1600 (1450)1) 2 x 50 x 101)
not obstructed (see page 5/34). 1)
The withdrawable version connected by 2 x 50 x 12 mm Cu busbars can
Auxiliary circuits be loaded with max. 1420 A. For 1600 A loading, the withdrawable version
must be connected by 2 x 50 x 12 mm busbars.
• Switches, shunt trip units or undervoltage trip units are con-
nected using flexible 0.5 ... 1 mm2 Cu conductors to the Maximum circuit breaker/switch disconnector loads in
terminals on these devices. accordance with ambient temperature
• Auxiliary circuits of the withdrawable version are connected
using a connector. 3VT4 circuit breaker/switch disconnector - connection of
Cu busbars 2 x 50 x 6 mm to pole
50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
1000 A 1000 A 1000 A 1000 A 980 A
3VT5 circuit breaker/switch disconnector - connection of

50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
1400 A 1400 A 1340 A 1260 A 1200 A
3VT5 circuit breaker/switch disconnector - connection of

50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
1600 A 1540 A 1460 A 1400 A 1320 A
5/10 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Specifications of cable shapes
Order No. of Max. rated Maximum permissible conductor cross-section S
connecting set current I
Cable type
Sector-shaped Sector-shaped Round Round conductor, Busbars and Technical
conductor, conductor, solid conductor, stranded solid cable lugs information
stranded
WxH
A mm2 mm
3VT9 524-4TG30 800 2 x (70 ... 240) Cu/Al 2 x (95 ... 300) Cu/Al 2 x (50 ... 185) Cu/Al 2 x (70 ... 240) Cu/Al 5/36, 5/36
3VT9 524-4TF30 500 70 ... 240 Cu/Al 95 ... 300 Cu/Al 50 ... 185 Cu/Al 70 ... 240 Cu/Al 5/36, 5/36
3VT9 400-4RC30 1000 50 x .... 5/35
3VT9 500-4RC30 1600 50 x .... 5/35, 5/35
3VT9 500-4EF30 1600 50 x .... 5/41
3VT9 500-4RD30 1600 50 x .... --
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/11

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Overview
3VT9 500-4WC00 specifications
Order Number 3VT9 500-4WL00
Rated operating voltage Ue AC 230 V
Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz
Rated operating current 6 A/AC 230 V
Ie/Ue
Connector cross-section S 0.5 ... 1 mm2
The withdrawable version of the circuit breaker/switch discon- Terminal protection IP20
nector is intended for demanding industrial applications where (connected switch)
rapid exchange of the circuit breaker and frequent checking of
the circuit are needed. For the wiring diagram of the circuit breaker in withdrawable de-
vice with accessories, see page 5/9.
• The withdrawable version base must be fitted with the follow-
ing connecting sets: 3VT9 500-4WL00 position signalling
2 x 3VT9 500-4EF30, for front connection or The withdrawable device can be provided with up to four
2 x 3VT9 500-4RD30, for rear connection switches for signalling the circuit breaker’s switched-on position
• For mounting withdrawable device to switchgear, use (see table).
3VT9 500-4SA40 installation bolts, see page 5/7.
Advantages and enhanced safety for operator:
Circuit breaker position • Remote signalling of circuit breaker‘s switched-on position
The withdrawable version of the circuit breaker has three posi- (position of locking is not signalled)
tions: • Checking of circuit breaker and accessories function in the
1. inserted (connected position) checking position
2. withdrawn (disconnected position) • Locking of withdrawable device against inserting circuit
3. removed breaker, locking of circuit breaker in withdrawn (checking)
position - locking by means of padlocks.
• Visible and conductive disconnection of the power circuit
Main circuit • Easy exchange of circuit breakers in case of failure
• To connect busbars and cable lugs, use 3VT9 500-4EF30 con-
nection set (front connection) or 3VT9 500-4RD30 (rear con-
nection).
• For connection using cables, it is necessary to additionally
5 use 3VT9 500-4EF30 or 3VT9 500-4RD30 connection sets.
• The way of connecting the main circuit must observe recom-
mendations (see page 5/10) as well as deionizing space (see
page 5/34).
Auxiliary circuits
These are connected using 3VT9 500-4PL00 15-wire cables.
Circuit breaker accessories for withdrawable version
The withdrawable version of the circuit breaker has the same
accessories as the fixed-mounted version.
States of switches 3VT9 500-4WL00 in withdrawable device

according to circuit breaker and lockout positions
Circuit breaker position State of switch
1 1
2 4 2 4
Switched on (locked or not locked) 0 1

Other positions 1 0
0 = contact open
1 = contact closed
5/12 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Recommended wiring of circuit breaker, withdrawable version
with motorized operating mechanism Symbol Description
Control circuit M Motor
Q3 P Energy storage device
L+
X3 Terminal strip to connect control circuits
ON X4 Terminal strip for external operations counter

SSI Switch indicating AUTO (NO-C)/MANUAL (NC-C)
OFF modes
B
B Recommended wiring of the control circuits (control
Motor drive Switches circuits not included in motor driver delivery)
relative ON Make pushbutton
3VT9 500-2AF10 4.13
4.21
4.31
4.43
X3 5 7 3 4 1 10 Q3 Circuit breaker for motorized operating mechanism

AC 110 V LSN 4C/1
5 7 3 4 1 3 AC 230 V LSN 2C/1
NC NO
SSI Inserting and withdrawing circuit breaker with motorized

C M P operating mechanism
• Each time before inserting or withdrawing the circuit breaker,
we recommend first to turn the AUTO/MANUAL switch on the
NSO0_00452
motor drive to the MANUAL position

4.14
4.22
4.32
4.44
MP 6 2 1 • More information is available in the operating instructions

acc.c. 4
• Not adhering to this procedure or failing to follow the recom-
mended wiring could mean that the circuit breaker will not
6 2 9 successfully turn on at the first attempt
X3
N-
Changes in states of switches in compartments of switching unit when inserting and withdrawing circuit breaker
State before insertion/withdrawal State after insertion/withdrawal
Circuit breaker state before insertion State of switches before insertion→ State of switches after insertion
-withdrawn position inserted position
Circuit breaker state before withdrawal State of switches before withdrawal→ State of switches after withdrawal
inserted position withdrawn position
accessory compartment accessory compartment
1,2 3,4 1,2 3,4
3VT9 500-2AF10
3VT9 500-2AF10
3VT9 500-2AF10
3VT9 500-2AF10
Lever position of
circuit breaker
main contacts
State of the
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1
Switched on 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
Switched off manually or by motor drive 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
Switched off from the switched-on state: 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

by the trip unit or TEST button
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/13

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
■ Overview
The electronic trip unit is a separate and interchangeable unit, Trip units ETU DP, MP and UP - description of function
which has to be ordered separately and in addition to the 3VT5
716-3AA3.-0AA0 switching unit. By exchanging the trip unit, the Proper functioning of trip units does not depend on the wave-
range of the circuit breaker’s rated current can be easily form of the current in the main circuit. The function of the trip unit
changed. is supported by a microprocessor, which processes a sampled
signal of the power circuit and recalculates it to obtain an rms
Trip units for the 3VT5 716-3AA3.-0AA0 switching unit are avail- value. Therefore, digital trip units are suitable for protecting cir-
able in four current values In = 630, 1000, 1250 and 1600 A. The cuits where the sinusoidal current is distorted by high harmonics
trip units cover rated currents ranging from 250 to 1600 A. (e.g. circuits with controlled rectifiers, power factor compensa-
tors, pulse loading, and the like).
All the trip units protect a circuit against short-circuiting and
Several different trip units are available. Some have adjustable overloading. Setting of selective cascading of circuit breakers is
characteristics (in order to match the protected device and to especially enabled by the ETU UP trip unit. Tripping characteris-
achieve the required selectivity): tics of the trip units are independent of the ambient temperature.
ETU DP trip units The trip unit is attached to the switching unit by two bolts. The
translucent cover over the adjustment controls can be sealed
L I (with sealing wire).
Ir Adjustment of the tripping characteristics for ETU DP and MP

t trip units
The tripping characteristics of the trip units are defined by stan-
dard EN 60 947-2. The characteristics are adjusted in two zones
using latched switches located on the trip unit:
L -is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal
protection.
I is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against
Ii ultimate short-circuit currents.

NSO0_00506
The time-dependent trip unit ETU MP is adjusted with two

switches, Ir and tr. The first (Ir) switch adjusts the circuit breaker’s
I
rated current. The characteristic moves along the current axis.
ETU DP trip units have one type of characteristic with adjustable Turning the other switch (tr) adjusts the time after which the cir-
Ir and Irm. cuit breaker will trip while passing through 7.2 Ir. The tripping
5 ETU MP trip units characteristic thus moves along the time axis. With the tr switch
it is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics:
L I • Four characteristics are available for motor protection. Break-
ing times correspond to trip unit classes 10 A, 10, 20, 30. By
Ir
t changing tr, it is possible to select the characteristics
according to the required motor starting (light, medium, heavy
or very heavy starting).
tr • Four characteristics are available for protecting transformers
and lines.
dependent trip unit has been actuated and the circuit breaker
has tripped. The trip unit must be allowed to cool off (it has a
Ii thermal memory). The memory can be disabled by turning the
“restart” switch from the normal “Tt” position to the “T0” position.
The time-dependent trip unit remains active, and only its thermal
NSO0_00454
memory is deactivated. The thermal memory should be

switched off only in justified cases, and with the knowledge that
I the temperature could rise in the protected device, causing re-
peated tripping.
ETU MP trip units have more kinds of characteristics with adjust-
able Ir, tr and Irm. 2. Time-independent instantaneous trip unit (short-circuit trip
unit) I
ETU UP trip units
The time-independent instantaneous ETU DP and ETU MP trip
They have universal characteristics, with the greatest variability units are adjusted with one switch, Irm . The Irm switch sets the
in adjustment: Ir, tr, Irmv, tv and Irm. short-circuit current that, when reached or exceeded, causes in-
stantaneous tripping of the circuit breaker.
Regulation of the short-circuit trip unit provides settings for the
characteristic appropriate for protecting lines and motors. The
wave form of the tripping characteristic is adjusted with latched
switches located on the trip unit’s front panel according to the
needs of the protected device. A visual demonstration on setting
the tripping characteristics is available in the SIMARIS design
software (Tool for Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution).
5/14 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Tripping characteristics of ETU DP and MP trip units with load ETU DP and MP tripping times shortening with load
The tripping characteristics from the cold state indicate the T - When tripping from the trip unit‘s „warm“ state, the tripping
tripping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment time of the characteristic is cut short during the standstill time tu
when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing through the by coefficient k.
circuit breaker. The tripping characteristic tripped from warm
state indicates the tripping times during which it is assumed that, Thermal standstill time of the characteristics
before the moment when an overcurrent develops, current is For all kinds of characteristics tr the thermal standstill time for
flowing through the circuit breaker. Characteristics of electronic ETU DP and MP trip units is tu ≥ 30 min.
plotted in a cold state. Digital trip units enable simulation of trip- During this time, the short-circuit tripping time tv is cut short from
ping in warm state. The tripping times become shorter in a the cold-state characteristic by the coefficient k.
steady state, as shown in the following diagram. The steady The real tripping time is ts = k . tv
state is a period during which the characteristic does not
change. If the circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for Example:
at least 30 minutes, the tripping times will be cut by a half. If the The shortening constant can be read from the graph. With
load is less than 70% of Ir , the tripping time does not become steady current 85% of Ir the real tripping time will be shortened
shorter. to:
ts = 0.74 . tv
NSO0_00455
k [-]
1.0 k [–] time shortening coefficient
0.8
0.6
Trip units are set by the manufacturer
T
0.4 Ir = min
Restart = T(t)
Irm = min
0.2
tr = TV, min
0.0
50 60 70 80 90 100
I r [%]
^
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/15

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Tripping characteristic adjustment, trip unit ETU UP 2. Delayed time-independent trip units S
L S I It is used to set up a selective cascade of circuit breakers. It is
set up using specifications Isd and tsd.
Ir
t Isd is an n-multiple of current Ir (Isd = n × Ir). It is a short-circuit
current that, within the span of Isd to Irm, will trip the circuit
breaker with delay tsd, where tsd is a delay set up for switching
tr off the trip unit.
The delayed time-independent trip unit actuates the circuit
breaker if the current in the circuit reaches at least the preset n-
I 2 t ON multiple and lasts at least the preset delay time tsd. The trip unit
Isd
tsd can be disabled by setting the parameter n (Isd = n × Ir) into the
position. Parameter tsd can be set to values with respect to the
Ii energy that passed through l2t (switch position l2t on). The pre-
I 2 t OFF set time values are then applicable for currents higher than 10x
NSO0_00456
current Ir. Tripping times of k-multiples of Ir for k < 10 are defined

as follows:
I
10 2
The tripping characteristic of trip unit is defined by standard EN t = t v ⋅ ⎛ ------⎞
⎝ k⎠
60 947-2. The characteristic is adjusted in three zones using
latched switches located on the trip unit:
3. Time-independent instantaneous trip unit I
L - is a zone of low overcurrents and includes the area of thermal
protection. It is set up with parameter Ii. Ii is a short-circuit current that, when
reached or exceeded, causes the circuit breaker to switch off in-
S - is a zone of medium overcurrents and includes long-distance stantaneously. It is set up directly in kA on the trip unit. The wave
short-circuit protection for lines. Intentional delay in tripping of form of the tripping characteristic is adjusted using latched
these low short-circuit currents can be used to achieve selectiv- switches located on the trip unit’s front panel to match the needs
ity of protective devices. This type of delay can be set only in of the protected device. A visual demonstration on setting the
self-contained trip units (full version). tripping characteristic is available in the SIMARIS design soft-
ware (Tool for Dimensioning Electrical Power Distribution).
I - is a zone of high overcurrents and includes protection against
ultimate short-circuit currents without time delay.
I2t - Characteristic setting in ON position represents a constant
value of energy passed through. If fuses are used as protective
elements for outgoing branch feeders, it is possible to adjust the
selective part of the characteristics to better suit the shape of the
fuse characteristics.
5 1. Time-dependent trip unit (thermal) L
The time-dependent trip unit ETU UP is adjusted with two
switches, Ir and tr. The first switch, Ir, adjusts the circuit breaker’s
rated current. The characteristics move along the current axis.
Turning the second switch, tr, adjusts the time after which the cir-
cuit breaker will trip while passing through 7.2 Ir. The tripping
characteristics thus move on the time axis. A total of 8 charac-
teristics can be set with the tr switch. Breaking times correspond
to tripping classes 10 A, 10, 20, 30.
dependent trip unit has tripped the circuit breaker. The trip unit
must be allowed to cool off (it has a thermal memory). The mem-
ory can be disabled by turning the “restart” switch from the nor-
mal “Tt” position to the “T0” position. The time-dependent trip
unit remains active, and only its thermal memory is inactivated.
The thermal memory should be switched off only in justified
cases, and with the knowledge that there could be rising tem-
perature in the protected device, causing repeated tripping..
5/16 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Tripping characteristics of ETU UP trip units with load Example
The tripping characteristic from the cold state indicates the trip- The shortening constant can be read from the graph. With
ping times during which it is assumed that, up to the moment steady current 85% of Ir the real tripping time will be shortened
when an overcurrent develops, no current is flowing through the to:
circuit breaker. The tripping characteristic tripped from warm
state indicates the tripping times during which it is assumed that, ts = 0.74 . tv
before the moment when an overcurrent develops, current is k [-] time shortening coefficient
flowing through the circuit breaker. Characteristics of electronic Ir [A] adjusted rated current of trip unit
trip units are independent of the ambient temperature and are tv [s] tripping time of the trip unit derived from the characteristic
plotted in a cold state. Digital trip units enable simulation of a ts [s] real tripping time of the trip unit tripped from warm state
trip unit in warm state. The tripping times become shorter in a tu [s] standstill period for particular characteristics
steady state, as shown in the following diagram. The steady
state is a period during which the characteristic does not Trip units are set by the manufacturer
change. Ir = min
If the circuit breaker is loaded with a reduced current for at least Restart = T(t)
30 minutes, the tripping times will be cut by a half. If the load is Ii = min
less than 70% of Ir, the tripping time does not become shorter. tr = min
tsd = min, I2t - ON
Tripping time shortening with load Isd = min
NSO0_00455
1.0
k [-]
0.8
0.6
T
0.4
0.2
0.0
50 60 70 80 90
I r [%]
100
5
T - When tripping from the “warm” state, the tripping time of the
characteristic is cut short during the standstill time tu by coeffi-
cient k.
Thermal standstill time of the characteristics
For all kinds of characteristics tr the thermal standstill period for
ETU UP trip units is tu ≥ 30 min. During this time, the short-circuit
tripping time tv is cut short from the cold-state characteristic by
the coefficient k.
The real tripping time is ts = k . tv
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/17

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
• Provides protection for lines and transformers Order No. Rated current Overload Restart Instantaneous
The 3VT9 5..-6AC00 trip unit is intended only for 3VT5 716- In protection Ir short circuit
protection Ii
3AA3.-0AA0 switching units. Operation of the trip unit is con-
trolled by a microprocessor. The trip unit is fitted with a thermal A A kA
memory that can be disabled by turning the switch on the front 250, 260 0.8
panel from position T(t) to position T(0). After having disabled the
thermal memory, the thermal tripping function remains active. 275, 290 1.5
A practical advantage of the trip unit is a specially designed 305, 315 2

tripping characteristic that provides for optimal exploitation of 3VT9 563-6AC00 630 345, 360 T(0) 2.5
transformers up to 1.5 In.
400, 435 T(t) 4.5
Another advantage of this trip unit is the simple adjustment of the 455, 480 6
tripping characteristic. Set-up includes only rated current and
the tripping level of the short-circuit trip unit. Reaching 80% and 500, 550 7.5
110% of Ir is indicated by LED diodes on the front panel denoted 575, 630 10
as I > 80% of Ir and I > 110% of Ir. Located on the lower part of
400, 435 1.25
the trip unit cover are four photocells for communicating with the
3VT9 500-6AE00 signalling unit. 455, 480 2
Tripping characteristics 500, 550 3
NSO0_00458 3VT9 510-6AC00 1000 575, 630 T(0) 5

10000 Ir
5000 min. max. 630, 685 T(t) 7
t [s] Ir Ii 720, 760 9
2000
1000 800, 870 12
500 910, 1000 15
200 500, 550 1.5
100 577, 610 3
L
50
630, 685 5
20 3VT9 512-6AC00 1250 722, 760 T(0) 7
10
In = 630 A
In=630A 800, 866 T(t) 9
5 In = 1000 A
In=1000A 3 3 909, 1000 12
2 In = 1250 A
In=1250A
In = 1600 A
In=1600A 1100, 1155, 15
1
5 0.5 1200, 1250 18
I 630, 685 2
0.2
0.1 720, 800 4
0.05 0.8 1.5 2.0 2.5 4.5 6.0 7.5 10
870, 910 6
0.02 In = 630 A I i [kA] 3VT9 516-6AC00 1600 1000, 1100 T(0) 8
0.01 1155, 1200 T(t) 11
0.1
0.05 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 1250, 1300 14
0.02 1375, 1445 17

In = 1000 A I i [kA]
0.01 1500, 1600 20
0.1
0.05 1.5 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 18
0.02 In = 1250 A I i [kA]

0.01
0.1
0.05 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 11 14 17
20
0.02 In = 1600 A I i [kA]
0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In

5/18 Siemens LV 36 · 2011
© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Trip units ETU MP - Motor protection
• Provides protection of motors and generators Adjustable specifications
• Can protect lines and transformers Order No. Rated Overload tt (7.2 x Ir) Restart Instanta-
The 3VT9 5..-6AP00 trip unit is intended only for 3VT5716-3AA3.- current protection Ir neous short
In circuit pro-
0AA0 switching unit. The operation of the trip unit is controlled tection Ii
by a microprocessor. The trip unit is equipped with a thermal
memory that can be disabled by turning a switch on the front A A S kA
panel from position T(t) to position T(0). After having disabled the 250, 260 1 (TV 1) 0.8
thermal memory, the thermal trip unit remains active.
275, 290 3 (TV 3) 1.5
A practical advantage of the trip unit is a specially designed
305, 315 10 (TV 10) 2
tripping characteristic that provides for optimal exploitation of
transformers up to 1.5 In. 3VT9 563-6AP00 630 345, 360 30 (TV 30) T(0) 2.5
It is possible to set a total of 8 characteristics on the trip unit. 400, 435 3 (M 3) T(t) 4.5
From these, in mode “M”, there are 4 characteristics for motor 455, 480 8 (M 8) 6
protection and another 4 characteristics in mode “TV” for pro-
500, 550 15 (M 15) 7.5
tecting transformers and lines. The shape of each characteristic
can be changed using a selector switch. 575, 630 25 (M 25) 10
When one or two phases fail, in the M-characteristic mode, the 400, 435 1 (TV 1) 1.25
switch will open with a 4 s delay (so-called undercurrent trip- 455, 480 3 (TV 3) 2
ping).
500, 550 10 (TV 10) 3
Another parameter for adjusting the trip unit is the rated current,
3VT9 510-6AP00 1000 575, 630 30 (TV 30) T(0) 5
which is adjusted in a range of 0.4 to 1.0 of In and the short-cir-
cuit tripping level. Reaching 80% and 110% of Ir is indicated by 630, 685 3 (M 3) T(t) 7
LED diodes on the front panel denoted as I > 80% of Ir and I > 720, 760 8 (M 8) 9
110% of Ir. Located on the lower of the trip unit cover are four
photocells for communicating with the 3VT9 500-6AE00 800, 870 15 (M 15) 12
signalling unit. 910, 1000 25 (M 25) 15
500, 550 1 (TV 1) 1.5
577, 610 3 (TV 3) 3
630, 685 10 (TV 10) 5
3VT9 512-6AP00 1250 722, 760 30 (TV 30) T(0) 7
800, 866 3 (M 3) T(t) 9
909, 1000 8 (M 8)
1100, 1155, 15 (M 15)
12
15
5
1200, 1250 25 (M 25) 18
630, 685 1 (TV 1) 2
720, 800 3 (TV 3) 4
870, 910 10 (TV 10) 6
3VT9 516-6AP00 1600 1000, 1100 30 (TV 30) T(0) 8
1155, 1200 3 (M 3) T(t) 11
1250, 1300 8 (M 8) 14
1375, 1445 15 (M 15) 17
1500, 1600 25 (M 25) 20
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/19

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Tripping characteristic ETU MP
NSO0_00459 NSO0_00460
10000 10000 Ir
Ir TV min. max.
M
min. max. 5000
5000
t [s] Ir tr Ii t [s] Ir tr Ii
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500 25
200 200
L tr L tr
100 100
30
50 50
30 25
20 20 15 15
10 10 10 10 8 8
In = 630 A In = 630 A
5 In = 1000 A 5 In = 1000 A
3 3 3 3
In = 1250 A In = 1250 A
2 2
In = 1600 A In = 1600 A
1 1 1 1
0.5 0.5
I I
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
In = 630 A 0.8 1.5 2.0 2.5 4.5 6.0 7.5 10 I i [kA] In = 630 A 0.8 1.5 2.0 2.5 4.5 6.0 7.5 10 I i [kA]
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.05 0.05
In = 1000 A 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 I i [kA] In = 1000 A 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 I i [kA]
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.05 0.05 18
18 I i [kA]
In = 1250 A 1.5 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 I i [kA] In = 1250 A 1.5 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.05 17 0.05 17
In = 1600 A 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 11 14 20 I i [kA] In = 1600 A 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 11 14 20 I i [kA]
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
5/20 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Trip units ETU UP - Universal protection
• For protecting complicated loads or those not specified in ad- Reaching 80% and 110% of Ir is indicated by LED diodes on the
vance. front panel denoted as I > 80% of Ir and I > 110% of Ir.
The bottom part of the trip unit cover contains photocells for
The 3VT9 5..-6AD00 trip unit is intended for the 3VT5 716-3AA3.- communicating with the 3VT9 500-6AE00 signalling unit.
0AA0 switching unit only. The trip unit is equipped with a thermal
memory that can be disabled by turning a “restart” switch on the
front panel from the position T(t) to position T(0). After disabling
the thermal memory, the thermal trip unit remains active.
A practical advantage of the trip unit is its maximum flexibility for
adjusting the tripping characteristic. With its possibility for set-
ting I2t = constant and I5t = constant, it is optimal from the
selectivity viewpoint for its interaction with fusing devices.
Specifications for adjustable trip units
Order No. Rated current Overload protec- tr (7.2 x Ir) Short delayed short tsd I2t Restart Instantaneous short
In tion Ir circuit protection circuit protection Ii
Isd A = (n x Ir)
A A s n ms kA
250, 260 0.5 2 50, 100 0.8
275, 290 3 3 200, 300 on T(0) 1.5
305, 315 5 5 400, 600 2
3VT9 563-6AD00 630 345, 360 7 7 800, 1000 2.5
400, 435 10 8 50, 100 4.5
455, 480 15 9 200, 300 off T(t) 6
500, 550 20 10 400, 600 7.5
575, 630 25 ∞ 800, 1000 10
400, 435 0.5 2 50, 100 1.25
455, 480 3 3 200, 300 on T(0) 2
500, 550 5 5 400, 600 3
3VT9 510-6AD00 1000 575, 630 7 7 800, 1000 5
630, 685 10 8 50, 100 7
720, 760 15 9 200, 300 off T(t) 9 5
800, 870 20 10 400, 600 12
910, 1000 25 ∞ 800, 1000 15
500, 550 0.5 2 50,1 00 1.5
577, 610 3 3 200, 300 on T(0) 3
630, 685 5 5 400, 600 5
3VT9 512-6AD00 1250 722, 760 7 7 800, 1000 7
800, 866 10 8 50, 100 9
909, 1000 15 9 200, 300 off T(t) 12
1100, 1155, 20 10 400, 600 15
1200, 1250 25 ∞ 800, 1000 18
630, 685 0.5 2 50, 100 2
720, 800 3 3 200, 300 on T(0) 4
870, 910 5 5 400, 600 6
3VT9 516-6AD00 1600 1000, 1100 7 7 800, 1000 8
1155, 1200 10 8 50, 100 11
1250, 1300 15 9 200, 300 off T(t) 14
1375, 1445 20 10 400, 600 17
1500, 1600 25 ∞ 800, 1000 20
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/21

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Tripping characteristic ETU UP
NSO0_00461 NSO0_00462
10000 10000 min. max.
min. max.
5000 Ir 5000 Ir
2000 2000
1000 Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir min 1000 Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir min
500 500
200 Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir max 200 Isd = (2 … 10) x Ir max

L L
100 100
50 50
In = 630 A 20 In = 630 A
20
In = 1000 A In = 1000 A
10 10 In = 1250 A
In = 1250 A
5 In = 1600 A 5 In = 1600 A
2 2 S
S 1 1000
1 1000
0.5 0.5 0.5 tr [s] 0.5

0.5 tr [s] 0.5
tv [ms] tv [ms] I
I 0.2
0.2 (I 2 t = OFF) (I 2 t = ON)
0.8 1.5 2.0 2.5 4.5 6.0 7.5 10
0.1 0.8 1.5 2.0 2.5 4.5 6.0 7.5 10 0.1
0.05 50 0.05 50
0.02 In = 630 A I i [kA] 0.02 In = 630 A I i [kA]

0.01 0.01
1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15
0.1 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 0.1
0.05 50 0.05 50
0.02 In = 1000 A I i [kA] 0.02 In = 1000 A I i [kA]

0.01 0.01
1.5 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 18
0.1 1.5 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 18 0.1
0.05 50 0.05 50
In = 1250 A I i [kA] 0.02 In = 1250 A I i [kA]

0.02
0.01 0.01
2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 11 141720
0.1 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 11 141720 0.1
0.05 50
0.05 50
In = 1600 A I i [kA] In = 1600 A I i [kA]

0.02
5 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
5/22 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Trip units
Tripping characteristic ETU UP
NSO0_00463 NSO0_00464
10000 min. max.
10000 min. max.
5000 Ir 5000 Ir
2000 2000
1000 Isd = (2 …10) x Ir min 1000 Isd = (2 … 0) x Ir min
500 500
Isd = (2 …10) x Ir max Isd = (2 … 0) x Ir max
200 200
L L
100 100
50 50
In = 630 A 25 25 In = 630 A 25 25
20 20
In = 1000 A In = 1000 A
10 In = 1250 A tr [s] 10 In = 1250 A tr [s]
5 In = 1600 A 5 In = 1600 A
3 3 3 3
2 S 2 S
1 1000 1 1000
0.5 0.5
tv [ms] I tv [ms] I
0.2 (I 2 t = OFF) 0.2 (I 2 t = ON)
0.1 0.8 1.5 2.0 2.5 4.5 6.0 7.5 10 0.1 0.8 1.5 2.0 2.5 4.5 6.0 7.5 10
0.05 50 0.05 50
0.02 In = 630 A I i [kA] 0.02 In = 630 A I i [kA]

0.01 0.01
0.1 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 0.1 1.25 2.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15
0.05 50 0.05 50
0.02 In = 1000 A I i [kA] 0.02 In = 1000 A I i [kA]

0.01 0.01
0.1 1.5 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 18 0.1 1.5 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 12 15 18
0.05 50 0.05 50
0.02 In = 1250 A I i [kA] 0.02 In = 1250 A I i [kA]

0.01 0.01
2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 11 141720 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 11 141720
0.1 0.1
0.05 50 0.05 50
In = 1600 A I i [kA] In = 1600 A I i [kA]

0.02
0.01
0.02
0.01
5
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50
x In x In
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/23

© Siemens AG 2011

Signalling units
■ Overview
The 3VT9 500-6AE00 signalling unit is a modular accessory for • Remote indication on the state of the circuit breaker and the
the 3VT4 and 3VT5 circuit breakers and operates in conjunction protected circuit is ensured by a relay, the make and break
with 3VT9 5..-6AC00, 3VT9 5..-6AP00 and 3VT9 5..-6AD00 elec- contacts of which are pulled into the terminal strip on the unit
tronic trip units. - relays to indicate tripping of time-dependent or undercurrent
• It is intended for applications in automated control systems and time-independent trip units have storage
- after the storage relay is activated by tripping,
• The signalling unit signals reaching a certain current value in it is necessary to reset the relay by actuating the front panel
a circuit and the tripping of the circuit breaker by trip units RESET switch, or to reset remotely by an external pushbut-
(time-dependent, time-independent, undercurrent) ton.
- The user has options to set up (by steps, using a rotary
switch) a current value which will be indicated when reached • The supply voltages are presented in the table
- the options are 70; 80; 90; 100; 120; 140; 160 or 180% Ir • The main power supply circuit and the reset circuit are not
(refer to the table below for more details). safely separated
• Local indication regarding the state of the circuit breaker and • The external RESET button must be connected with a
the protected circuit is signaled by LED indicators located on screened cable or a twisted wire with maximum loop resis-
the front panel of the signalling unit tance of 100 Ohm.
• The information on the state of the circuit breaker is transferred The signalling unit will not work without power supply!
from the trip unit to the signalling unit by means of optical cou-
pling
Specifications
Order No. 3VT9 500-6AE00
Rated operating voltage Ue AC/DC 12 ... 230 V
Protection (tube fuse) T1.5 A
Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz
Current draw (rms) max. at Ue
AC-15 AC/DC 12 V 370 mA
DC-13 AC/DC 24 V 170 mA
AC/DC 48 V 100 mA
AC/DC 110 V 60 mA
AC 230 V/DC 220 V 50 mA
Rated operating current AC-1 8 A/AC 230 V
(of relay contacts) Ie/Ue DC-1 0.25 A DC 250 V, 8 A/DC 30 V
Connection cross-section S 0.5 ... 1 mm2
5
Main circuit status indication
Signalling
(relay contacts) LED
Reaching < 70% Ir -- +
110% Ir + +
70; 80; 90; 100; 120; 140; 160; 180 -- +
Settings + +
Tripping By time-dependent/undercurrent trip + +/+
unit
By time-independent trip unit + +
I > 110 % Ir N I > Isd I > Ir

M
AC/DC Power 3~ 3 < m
12 - 230 V RESET I > … % Ir

NSO0_00465
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1, 2 supply
6, 7 external RESET button
9, 10, 11 relay contacts indicating preset Ir
12, 13, 14 relay contacts indicating reaching 110% Ir
15, 16, 17 relay contacts indicating tripping by time-
dependent or undercurrent trip units
18, 19, 20 relay contacts indicating tripping by independent
trip unit (instantaneous or delayed tripping)
5/24 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Auxiliary switches
Order No. 3VT9 500-2AF10 3VT9 500-2AF201)
Rated operating voltage Ue V AC 60 ...500 V AC 5 ...60 V
DC 60 ...240 V DC 5 ...60 V
Rated isolation voltage Ui V 500
Rated operating current Ie/Ue
AC-15 6 A/60 V ... 240 V, 3 A/400 V,
DC-13 1.5 A/500 V
1 A/60 V, 0.7 A/110 V, 0.3 A/240 V
Thermal current Ith A 6A 0.5 A
Connection cross-section S mm2 0.5 ... 1
(connected switch)
1)
PS-BL-....-Au is not suitable for controlling electromagnetic loads
Arrangement of contacts Number of contacts Contact types

22 2+2 break + make

cavities
Switch location Switch name Switch function
accessory Auxiliary switch to indicate the position of the main
compartment 1, 2 contacts
accessory Relative switch to indicate tripping of circuit breaker
compartment 3, 4 by trip unit, TEST pushbutton or by
motor
5
Wiring diagram
Switches
auxiliary auxiliary relative relative
3VT9 500-2AF10 1.13
1.21
1.31
1.43
3VT9 500-2AF10 2.13

2.21
2.31
2.43
3VT9 500-2AF10 3.13

3.21
3.31
3.43
3VT9 500-2AF10 4.13

4.21
4.31
4.43
NSO0_00466
1.14
1.22
1.32
1.44
2.14
2.22
2.32
2.44
3.14
3.22
3.32
3.44
4.14
4.22
4.32
4.44
acc.comp. no. 1 acc. comp. no. 2 acc. comp. no. 3 acc. comp. no. 4
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/25

© Siemens AG 2011

Shunt trip units
L+
Order No. 3VT9 500-1S.00
Rated operating voltage Ue V AC 24, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500
DC 24, 48, 110, 220
3VT9 500-1S.00
B1
Input power at 1.1 Ue
AC < 2.5 VA
DC <2W
Characteristic U ≥ 0,7Ue the circuit breaker must U
trip
Time to switch-off ms 20
NSO0_00467
B2
Continuous load Yes
2
Connection cross-section S mm 0.5 ... 1
Terminal protection IP20 N-
(connected trip units)
Location in accessory com- 5
partment No.
Circuit breaker switched off by shunt trip unit

NSO0_00470
Main contacts
2 1 20
4 3 1
6 5
0
Auxiliary switch
compartment
accessory
30
1.44 1.43 1
1+2
1.14 1.13
2.14 2.13
0
2.44 2.43
Auxiliary switch
30
1.32 1.31 1
1.22 1.21
2.22 2.21
0
2.32
Relative switch
2.31
5
compartment
accessory
30
3.44 3.43 1
3+4
3.14 3.13
4.14 4.13
0
Relative switch
4.44 4.43
30
3.32 3.31 1
3.22 3.21
4.22
0
4.21
4.32 4.31 t [ms]
Circuit breaker states and lever positions of circuit breakers

Switched on
Switched off by trip units, or by TEST

the motor drive
Switched off manually or electrically
by drive
5/26 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Circuit breaker switched off by undervoltage trip unit
Order No. 3VT9 500-1U.00
Rated operating V AC 24, 48, 110, 230, 400, 500
voltage Ue DC 24, 48, 110, 220 Switched on
Input power at 1.1 Ue < 2.5 VA Switched off by trip units, or by TEST
<2W button or by the trip pushbutton on
the motor drive
Characteristic U ≥ 0.85 Ue,
circuit breaker can switch on Switched off manually or electrically
U ≥ 0.35 Ue, by drive
the circuit breaker must trip
Time to switched-off ms 20
Continuous load Yes
Connection mm2 0.5 ... 1
cross-section S
compartment No.
Circuit breaker switched off by undervoltage trip unit

NSO0_00470
Main contacts
2 1 20
4 3 1
6 5
0
Auxiliary switch
compartment
accessory
30
1.44 1.43 1
1+2
1.14 1.13
2.14 2.13
0
2.44 2.43
Auxiliary switch
30
1.32 1.31 1
1.22 1.21
2.22
2.32
2.21
2.31
0
Relative switch 5
compartment
accessory
30
3.44 3.43 1
3+4
3.14 3.13
4.14 4.13
0
Relative switch
4.44 4.43
30
3.32 3.31 1
3.22 3.21
4.22
0
4.21
4.32 4.31 t [ms]
L+
3VT9 500-1U.00
A1
U<
NSO0_00471
A2
N-
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/27

© Siemens AG 2011

Rotating the hand drive lever located on the rotary operating • In order to enhance safety for the operator of the electrical
mechanism switches circuit breakers 3VT4 to 3VT5 on and off, equipment, the coupling driver is furnished with a locking fea-
e.g. for switching electrical equipment on and off. Modular de- ture which prevents the cabinet from being opened when the
sign of the drives enables easy installation on the circuit breaker circuit breaker is in closed position.
after removing the accessory compartment cover from the cir- • When the circuit breaker in position "manual open", the drive
cuit breaker. The rotary operating mechanism and its accesso- handle can be locked up using the built-in cylinder type lock
ries must be ordered separately, see page 5/5. (FAB) and as many as three padlocks with shank diameter up
• The coupling driver operates the circuit breaker through the to 7 mm.
front panel or through the cabinet door, the outlet for the oper- • When the drive lever is in position "manual open", it is possible
ating shaft features protection class IP44 or IP66 (for bear- to remove the hand drive lever.
ings). • The circuit breakers with rotary operating mechanism can be
• The hand drive lever can be furnished with an extension shaft equipped with a mechanical interlocking system, see next
which makes it possible to control the circuit breaker in deeper page.
cabinets.
Specifications
Switchgear door locking in
circuit breaker state
Order Number Description Color Lockable with padlock when Protection Switched on and off by trip unit Length mm
circuit breaker is in OFF state class
3VT9 500-3HA10 Rotary operating mecha- -- yes -- -- --
nism
3VT9 500-3HE10 Hand drive lever black yes -- -- --
3VT9 500-3HF10 Hand drive lever red yes -- -- --
3VT9 500-3HG10 Coupling driver -- -- IP44 yes --
3VT9 500-3HG20 Coupling driver -- -- IP66 yes --
3VT9 500-3HJ10 Extension shaft -- -- -- -- 365
5/28 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

3VT9 300-8LA00 Mechanical interlocking • It provides interlocking of two circuit breakers so that they can-
not be switched on simultaneously, but always only one of
them.
• It is possible to use the locking device between two 3VT4 or
3VT5 circuit breakers or between 3VT4 and 3VT5 circuit
breakers. Both circuit breakers must be furnished with a rotary
operating mechanism (at least with the hand drive unit and
hand drive lever), see page 5/5. In order to use locking, it is
necessary to adhere to the dimensions.
314
NSO0_00472
4xØ9
NSO0_00473
50 70 190 70
3VT9 500-8LC10 Mechanical interlocking by Bowden

• Provides mechanical interlocking of two circuit breakers so
that they cannot both be tripped simultaneously, but only one
of them at a time.
• Interlocking can be used between two 3VT4 or 3VT5 circuit
5
breakers or between a 3VT4 and a 3VT5 circuit breaker. For in-
terlocking, circuit breakers can be outfitted with a hand or mo-
tor drive. To use interlocking, it is absolutely necessary to com-
ply with the dimensions shown below.
Type of mechanical interlocking Combination of circuit breaker/switch

disconnector versions
3VT9 500-8LC10 fixed-mounted - fixed-mounted
Mechanical interlocking by Bowden between fixed-mounted and
3VT9 500-8LC30 fixed-mounted - withdrawable withdrawable 3VT5 circuit breakers
3VT9 500-8LC40 withdrawable - withdrawable
Dimensions:
R min
72.5
75
= 75
140 =
in
130 Ø 2.3 R m
125.9
47
OK
ON
ON
31
OFF
OFF
NSO0_00474
0 or 350 ... 1400
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/29

© Siemens AG 2011

The motorized operating mechanism is equipped with spring Specifications
storage units. The energy stored in the springs makes it possible
to switch the circuit breaker on in less than 70 ms. Releasing the Order Number 3VT9 500-3M...0
spring energy and turning on the circuit breaker is ensured by a Operational voltage Ue V AC 110, 230
closing coil. The motorized operating mechanism can trip the DC 110, 220
circuit breaker in approx. 10 s. This method of tripping is suitable Rated frequency fn Hz 50/60
for most technological applications. When faster circuit breaker
tripping is required (e.g., because an emergency STOP button Control pulse length for switching on ms > 20 ... 1500 ∞1
was pressed), it is possible to use the motorized mechanism in Control pulse length for switching off ms > 20 ... ∞1)
combination with an undervoltage trip unit or a shunt trip unit.
Time to switching on ms < 70
• The motorized operating mechanism front panel contains a
selector switch for selecting the drive modes. There is also the Time to the accumulating of
motor drive under voltage Ue
possibility to remotely indicate the selector switch state.
- The first mode is automatic remote control (selector switch in • AC 230 V s 14
position AUTO). This is the standard position in automatic • DC 220 V s 18
operation.
- The second mode is manual control (selector switch position Time to switch-off Ue
MANUAL). In manual mode the motorized operating mecha- • AC 230 V s 3
nism does not need any voltage to perform perform open-
ing/closing operations • DC 220 V s 3
• Remote switching on and off in position AUTO is carried out Frequency of ON/OFF cycles cycles/ 2
with pushbuttons that must be connected to the motorized op- min
erating mechanism connector. When the motorized operating Frequency of cycles - immediately cycles 8
mechanism is in MANUAL mode, the circuit breaker can be one after another ON/OFF
switched on using the green button on the front part of the mo-
torized operating mechanism cover and to switch it off with the
red TEST button on the trip unit. The function of the remote Input power
control ON button in MANUAL MODE is locked up, whereas • AC VA 200
the function of the remote control OFF button remains active
for safety reasons. • DC W 200
• The motorized operating mechanism makes it simple to con- Protection
trol the circuit breaker when there is a loss of control voltage.
In MANUAL mode, it is possible to wind up the spring storage • AC 110 V; AC 230 V LSN 4C/1; LSN 2C/1
assembly by repeated rotation of the foldable handle. After the • DC 110 V; DC 220 V LSN-DC 4C/1; LSN-DC 2C/1
storage is wound up, the circuit breaker can be turned on us-
Rated operating current of the switch V 6 A/AC 250
ing the green button on the front part of the insulation cover of selector AUTO / MANUAL Ie/Ue
5 the drive and it can be turned off using the red TEST button on
the trip unit. 1)
for sequence of control pulses, see page 5/33.
• The motorized operating mechanism, as opposed to the cir-
cuit breaker, recognizes only two fixed positions:
- In the first position, the circuit breaker is ON. When the circuit
breaker is tripped in AUTO mode by a trip unit, auxiliary trip
devices or from a distance, the 3VT9 500-2AF10 switch (in-
cluded in motorized operating mechanism delivery) will gen-
erate a pulse to load the spring storage mechanism automat-
ically. If the switch is placed in accessory compartment 3 or
4, automatic loading process will take place.
- In the second fixed position the circuit breaker is switched off
and the loaded motorized operating mechanism is ready to
activate the circuit breaker after receiving the control pulse.
• The presence of the control voltage in the drive is indicated by
a steadily lit green LED indicator below the drive plate. If the
indicator is not lit, the position of the circuit breaker lever need
not comply with the correct positions of the power contacts.
• The motorized operating mechanism may be furnished with
an electromechanical operations counter.
• The motorized operating mechanism can be locked up in off-
state position using the built-in cylinder type lock and using as
many as three padlocks with the shank diameter max. 7 mm.
Before the drive is locked up, it is necessary to turn the drive
unit switch to MANUAL mode position, to withdraw the drive
unit yellow lockup strip and to insert the padlock shank into the
oval opening in the lockup strip. When a cylinder type lock is
used, the lockup strip will stick out a little.
• An 3VT9 500-3MF20 cover can be affixed to the motorized op-
erating mechanism’s turn-on switch and then sealed. The
cover prevents turning on the circuit breaker from the motor-
ized operating mechanism panel.
5/30 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Specifications Circuit breaker switched off by motorized operating mechanism-
electrically by pushbutton OFF
Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanism-
electrically by pushbutton ON
NSO0_00529
Main contacts
NSO0_00528
Main contacts 2 1 1300 - 2600
4 3 1
6 5
2 1 70 0
4 3 1 Auxiliary switch
6 5
0
compartment
1300 - 2600
accessory
Auxiliary switch
1.44 1.43 1
1+2
compartment
1.14 1.13
60
accessory
0
1.44 1.43 1 2.14 2.13
Auxiliary switch
1+2
1.14 1.13 2.44 2.43
2.14 2.13
0
Auxiliary switch 1300 - 2600
2.44 2.43 1.32 1.31 1
1.22 1.21
60 0
1.32 1.31 1 2.22 2.21 Relative switch
1.22 1.21 2.32 2.31
0
compartment
2.22 2.21 Relative switch
accessory
2.32 2.31 3.44 3.43 1
3+4
compartment
3.14 3.13
0
1 accessory
3.44 3.43 4.14 4.13 Relative switch
3+4
3.14 3.13 4.44 4.43
4.14
0
4.13 Relative switch
4.44 4.43 3.32 3.31 1
3.22 3.21
0
3.32 3.31 1 4.22 4.21
t [ms]
3.22 3.21 4.32 4.31
4.22
0
4.21
4.32 4.31
t [ms]
Wiring diagram
Circuit breaker switch on and switched off by motor driver
- electrically by pushbutton ON and pushbutton OFF
Control circuit
Q3
L+
ON
B OFF 5
Motor drive Switches
relative
3VT9 500-2AF10 4.13
4.21
4.31
4.43
X3 5 7 3 4 1 10
5 7 3 4 1 3
NC NO
SSI
C
M P
NSO0_00476
4.14
4.22
4.32
4.44
MP 6 2 1
acc.c. 4
6 2 9
X3
N-
Circuit breaker states and Lever positions of circuit breakers

Switched on
Switched off by trip unit, or by TEST

button

drive
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/31

© Siemens AG 2011

Specifications
Symbol Description Tripping of the circuit breaker with motorized operating mecha-
nism by shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit
MP 3VT9 500-3M...0 motorized operating mechanism
NSO0_00530
M Motor Main contacts
P Energy storage device 2 1 20
4 3 1
X3 Connector to connect auxiliary circuits 6 5
0
Auxiliary switch
SSI Switch indicating MANUAL(NO-C)/ AUTO(NC-C) modes
compartment
30
accessory
B Recommended wiring of the control circuits (not included in 1.44 1.43 1
1+2
delivery) 1.14 1.13
2.14 2.13
0
ON Make pushbutton 2.44 2.43
Auxiliary switch
OFF Break pushbutton 30

1.32 1.31 1
1.22 1.21
S Switch for energy storage 2.22 2.21
0
(switched on = automatic storage, may be 2.32
Relative switch
2.31
compartment
continuously switched on)
30 1000
accessory
3.44 3.43 1
3+4
Q3 Circuit breaker for motorized operating mechanism 3.14 3.13
4.14
0
4.13 Relative switch
4.44 4.43
30 1000
3.32 3.31 1
3.22 3.21
4.22
0
4.21
4.32 4.31
t [ms]

Switched on
Switched off by trip unit, or by TEST

button

drive
5 Wiring diagram description

Symbol Description
MP Motorized operating mechanism 3VT9 500-3M...0
M Motor
X3 Connector to connect auxiliary circuits
SSI Switch indicating MANUAL(NO-C)/ AUTO(NC-C)
modes
B Recommended wiring of the control circuits (not in-
cluded in delivery)
ON Make pushbutton
5/32 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Wiring diagram Specifications
Circuit breaker switched on by motorized operating mechanism Recommended actuating pulses
(electrical pushbutton ON) and switched off by shunt trip unit
Circuit breaker switched on/off by motorized operating mecha-
Control circuit
nism
Q3
NSO0_00479
10000 … 12000 70
L+
HK 1
0
ON
10000 … 12000 > 10000
B OFF PS 1
0
Motor drive Switches Aux.rel. > 100
> 20000
20 … ∞ 20 … 1500
relative 1
IMP OFF IMP ON
0
3VT9 500-2AF10 4.13
4.21
4.31
4.43
B1
A1
t [ms]
X3 5 7 3 4 1 10
3VT9 500-1U.00
3VT9 500-1S.00
Circuit breaker switched off by trip units or shunt/undervoltage
5 7 3 4 1 3 trip units and switched on by motorized operating mechanism-S
switch permanently closed
NC NO
NSO0_00480
70
SSI or
C M P U 12000

NSO0_00477
RS 1
4.14
4.22
4.32
4.44
A2
B2
MP 6 2 1 0
acc.c. 4 acc.c. 5 > 20000
20 … 1500
1
6 2 9 IMP ON
X3 0
t [ms]
N- N- R OFF

(electrical pushbutton ON) and switched off by undervoltage trip
unit
5
Control circuit Switched on
Q3
L+ Switched off by trip unit, or by TEST
button or by the trip pushbutton on the
motor drive
ON
drive
B OFF
Motor drive Switches Aux. releases Description of charts

Symbol Description
relative
HK main contacts
3VT9 500-2AF10 4.13
4.21
4.31
4.43
B1
A1
PS auxiliary switch
X3 5 7 3 4 1 10
3VT9 500-1U.00
3VT9 500-1S.00
RS relative switch
5 7 3 4 1 3
R OFF circuit breaker closed instantly by trip unit
IMP S pulse to store up motor drive energy (generated by S
NC NO switch)
IMP ON make pulse for motor drive
SSI or
C IMP OFF break pulse for motor drive
M P U< U
X random segment of time
NSO0_00478
4.14
4.22
4.32
4.44
A2
B2
MP 6 2 1
acc.c. 4 acc.c. 5
6 2 9
X3
N- N-
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/33

© Siemens AG 2011

Insulating barriers
■ Overview
B = 310 C = 134.5 Withdrawable version
Front connection
• terminals 1, 3, 5 (upper side)
If the mounting base for the withdrawable circuit
breaker/switch disconnector is connected on the upper side,
A = 100 using clamp or block type terminals, 3VT9 500-8CF30 insulat-
ing barriers must always be installed.
In all other cases, we recommend installing 3VT9 500-8CC30
50 insulating covers on the upper side of the circuit breaker.
• terminals 2, 4, 6 ( bottom side)
If the mounting base for the withdrawable circuit
breaker/switch disconnector is connected to the bottom side
of the circuit breaker using clamp or block type terminals,
350
ON
3VT9 500-8CF30 insulating barriers must always be installed.

In all other cases, we recommend installing 3VT9 500-8CC30
OFF
insulating covers on the bottom side of the withdrawable ver-
sion base.
NSO0_00522
210
A, B, C - minimum deionizing space, free of earthed metal parts

Use of insulating barriers and terminal covers with circuit
breakers and switch disconnectors.
Fixed-mounted version
Front connection
3VT9 500-8CE30 insulating barriers must always be installed on
circuit breakers/switch disconnectors.
5 • Terminals 2, 4, 6 (bottom side)
- If circuit breakers/switch disconnectors are connected to the
supply using terminals 2, 4, 6, 3VT9 500-8CE30
insulating barriers must always be installed on it.
- If circuit breakers/switch disconnectors are connected on
the bottom side using clamp or block type terminals,
3VT9 500-8CE30 insulating barriers must always be installed
on it.
Rear connection
3VT9 500-8CD30 insulating covers or 3VT9 500-8CE30
insulating barriers must always be installed on the circuit
breaker/switch disconnector.
We recommend installing 3VT9 500-8CG30 insulating grommets

with all sets for rear connection.
• terminals 2, 4, 6 (bottom side)
If circuit breakers/switch disconnectors are connected to the
bottom side using clamp or block type terminals,
3VT9 500-8CD30 insulating barriers must always be installed on
circuit breaker.
We recommend installing 3VT9 500-8CG30 insulating grommets

with all sets for rear connection.
5/34 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Dimensional drawings - fixed-mounted version

142.5
134.5 3VT4
70 70 35.5 3VT5
200
3
4 x M8
148
15°
72
314
ON
7°
100
240
300
350
494
21°
51
OFF
56.5
NSO0_00393
4xØ9
148
80
72
18
50 35.5 16 70 70
210 134.5
157 7
Drilling pattern
12.5
4 x Ø 10.5
50
5
NSO0_00397
+1
25 0
+1
25 0
Fixed-mounted version, rear connection

(3VT9 500-4RC30, 3VT9 400-4RC30 connecting sets) Openings for insulation grommets
70 70 84.5 142.5 200

60
BL1600S 16
BL1000S 8
R4
356
436
ON
444
510
OFF
NSO0_00398
50
60
82
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/35

© Siemens AG 2011

Fixed-mounted version, clamp type terminals (3VT9 524-4TG30 connecting sets)
- not for 3VT4 710-3AA30-0AA0 switching unit
134.5
250
3
200
750
350
627
ON
OFF
NSO0_00512
138.5
80 23
133
Fixed-mounted version, clamp type terminals (3VT9 524-4TG30 and 3VT9 524-4TF30 connecting sets)
- not for 3VT4 710-3AA30-0AA0 switching units
134.5
250
3
5
200
750
350
627
ON
OFF
NSO0_00401
138.5
80 136
5/36 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Fixed-mounted version, block type terminals (3VT9 532-4TF30)
134.5
205 52.5
3 35.5
NSO0_00403
200
750
582
350
ON
OFF
TEST
116
65 Ø 26
75.5
134.5
205 52.5 32
3 35.5
NSO0_00405
5
200
750
350
ON
626
OFF
TEST
138
65 Ø 26
Ø 26
107.5
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/37

© Siemens AG 2011

134.5
205 52.5 32
3 35.5
NSO0_00407
200
750
350
ON
626
OFF
TEST
138
65 Ø 26
Ø 26
107.5
Fixed-mounted version, front rotary operating mechanism Knob - lockable

(3VT9 500-3HE10, 3VT9 500-3HF10)
46
5
NSO0_00409
1
28°
2
72
12°
72
148
R1
60
40°
1 3VT9 500-3HA10
196 2 3VT9 500-3H.10

50
5/38 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Fixed-mounted version, front rotary operating mechanism Cabinet door cut-out
46
1 3VT4/3VT5
1
2 3VT9 500-3HA10
NSO0_00412
3 3VT9 500-3HJ10
2 4 3VT9 500-3HG.0
4 min. 200 5 3VT9 500-3H.10
28
Ø 40 6 Control cabinet door
3 4 x Ø 5.4
90
5 28
28
28
Hinge of control
cabinet door
19.5 50
6
90 198
min. 267
max. 500
3VT9 300-8LA00 mechanical interlock Cabinet door cut-out
min. 200 260
28
2 x Ø 40
314
28
28
28
Hinge of
8 x Ø 5.4
5
NSO0_00415
4xØ9 control cabinet door
50 70 190 70
Fixed-mounted version, motorized operating mechanism 3VT9 500-3M..0, lockable with up to three padlocks
33
8
R8
114
235
NSO0_00418
134.5 73
268.5
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/39

© Siemens AG 2011

Fixed-mounted version, 3VT9 500-6AE00 signalling unit
Description see page 5/24.
ON
417
OFF
NSO0_00421
31
142,5
5/40 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

■ Dimensional drawings - withdrawable version

3VT9 500-4WA40 withdrawable version base Drilling pattern
292
max. 140
4xØ9
350
180
100
314
NSO0_00423
508
4xØ9
125
210 75 140 35 70 70
18
248 174
Withdrawable version, front connection (3VT9 500-4EF30 connecting sets)
70 70
4 x M8
33.5
350
494
5
33.5
NSO0_00427
72
50 27.5 16
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/41

© Siemens AG 2011

Withdrawable version, rear connection Drilling pattern
(3VT9 500-4RC30 connecting set)
106.5
16
max. 140
230 4xØ9
100
125
NSO0_00430
50
140 35
Withdrawable version, clamp type terminals (3VT9 524-4TG30 connecting set)
250
350
627
5
NSO0_00433
138.5
31
80 133
5/42 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Withdrawable version, clamp type terminals (3VT9 524-4TG30 and 3VT9 524-4TF30 connecting set)
250
350
627
NSO0_00435
138.5
80 128
Withdrawable version, block type terminals (3VT9 532-4TF30)

137
205 45
3 28
NSO0_00437
200
5
750
350
582
116
65 Ø 26
68
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/43

© Siemens AG 2011

137
205 45 32
3 28
NSO0_00439
750
350
626
138
65 Ø 26
Ø 26
100

137
205 45 32
3 28
5
NSO0_00441
750
350
626
138
65 Ø 26
Ø 26
100
5/44 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011

Withdrawable version Connected Disconnected
292 295 340
65
350
180
ON
508
OFF
NSO0_00443
210 75 75 45
248 174 174

239 284
Withdrawable version, Connected Disconnected

rotary operating mechanism
321 366
5
NSO0_00446
271 316
Withdrawable version, Connected Disconnected

3VT9 500-3MQ00 motorized
operating mechanism
343.5 33 388.5 33
NSO0_00449
282.5 327.5
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 5/45

© Siemens AG 2011

Notes
■ Notes
5/46 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

6
© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
6/2 Glossary
6/3 Catalog notes
6/4 Ordering notes
6/6 Further documentation
6/7 Standards and approvals
6/10 Siemens contacts
6/11 Solution partners
6/12 Online services
6/13 Service & support
6/14 Comprehensive support

from A to Z
6/15 Software licenses
6/16 Subject index
6/17 Order number index
6/20 Terms and conditions

of sale and delivery
© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
Glossary
Rated operating voltage, (Ue) Voltage fixed by the manufacturer. Several pertinent tests relate to its
EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.1 determination, as may also the utilization category. Along with the
rated (operating) current, it determines the device’s utilization. The
highest value of rated operating voltage may in no case be greater
than the value of the rate insulation voltage Ui.
Rated insulation voltage, (Ui) Voltage measure to which are related tests of dielectric strength and
EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.2 creepage distance.
Rated current, (In) Current value of particular circuit breaker that can be handled uninter-
EN 60947-2; 4.3.2.3 ruptedly. The highest current valued tripping the circuit breaker in
conformity with a specifically stated tripping characteristic.
Reduced rated current, (Ir) Specifically established, reduced value of In current for a regulated
time-dependent (thermal) trip unit and that the circuit breaker can han-
dle continuously. Maximum setting is at value equal to In.
Changing Ir shifts the trip unit’s tripping characteristic along the
current axis. (Ir = k x In holds where k ≤ 1)
Tripping time at a given Ir multiple, (tr) Time after which circuit breaker will trip, if a current flows through it that
is equal to the given multiple of Ir. Changing tr shifts the tripping
characteristic along the time axis.
Actuating current of (selective) release’s Minimum current value causing the release’s time-independent delay
time-independent delay, (Ids) to actuate.
Delay of time-independent delayed release, (tv) If a current flows through the circuit breaker equal to at least Isd but not
reaching Irm the circuit breaker will trip with time delay tv. Total shut-off
time is influenced by the tripping of the circuit breaker itself and is
about 10 ÷ 20 ms longer.
Actuating current of time-independent Minimum current value causing the time-independent instantaneous
instantaneous, (Irm) release to actuate.
Rated operating current, (Ie) Rated operating current of device (switch-disconnector) is fixed by the
EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.3 manufacturer with consideration for the rated operating voltage, rated
frequency, rated operation, utilization category and type of protective
cover, if that comes into consideration.
Rated normal current, (Iu) Current value set by the manufacturer and which the device can han-
EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.4 dle in continuous operation, i.e. during a period longer than 8 hours
(weeks, months, or longer).
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, (Icu) Ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity value expressed as the rms
EN 60947-2; 2.15.1; 4.3.5.2.1 value of the alternating component of the assumed short-circuit current
that the circuit breaker must be able to manage in the mode: 1x switch-
ing off of the short circuit and a following 1x make-break sequence. Af-
6 ter testing, the circuit breaker need not be able to conduct the rated
current uninterruptedly. Icu is set for the rated operating voltage at the
rated frequency and at the established power factor for alternating
current or at the time constant for direct current. Must fulfil the
condition: Icu ≥ Ik“
Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity, (Ics) Value of the operating short-circuit breaking capacity expressed as the
EN 60947-2; 2.15.2; 4.3.5.2.2 rms value of the alternating component of the assumed short-circuit
current that the circuit breaker must be able to manage in the mode:
1x switching off of the short circuit and a following 2x make-break
sequence. May also be expressed as a percentage of Icu. After
testing, the circuit breaker must be able uninterruptedly to conduct the
rated current and to switch off the overcurrent. Temperature increase
of the main terminals may be greater. Ics is set for the rated operating
voltage at the rated frequency and at the established power factor for
alternating current or at the time constant for direct current. Permitted:
Ics ≥ Ik“
Rated short-time withstand current, (Icw) Value of short-time withstand current specified by the manufacturer
EN 60947-1; 4.3.6.1 that the device is able to handle without damage during a designated
EN 60947-2; 4.3.5.4 time period (short-time delay). In case of alternating current, it is the
EN 60947-3; 4.3.6.1 rms value of the alternating component of the assumed short-circuit
current Ip.
6/2 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
Catalog notes
■ Overview
Trademarks Technical data
All product designations may be registered trademarks or prod- The technical data in the catalog are for general information. The
uct names of Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by instruction manuals and the operating instructions on the prod-
third parties for their own purposes may violate the rights of the ucts must be observed during assembly, operation and mainte-
owner. nance.
Amendments Further technical information is available at
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support
All technical data, dimensions and weights are subject to
change without notice unless otherwise specified on the pages • under Product List:
of this catalog. - Technical specifications
• under Entry List:
Dimensions - Updates
All dimensions are in mm. - Download
- FAQ
Images - Manuals
The illustrations are not binding. - Characteristics
- Certificates
Configurators can be found under
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/configurators
Assembly, operation and maintenance
The instruction manuals and the operating instructions on the
products must be observed during assembly, operation and
maintenance.
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 6/3

© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
Ordering notes
■ Logistics
General Ordering very small quantities
With regard to delivery service, communications and environ- When small orders are placed, the costs associated with order
mental protection, our logistics service ensures "quality from the processing are greater than the order value. We therefore rec-
moment of ordering right through to delivery". By designing our ommend that you combine several small orders. Where this is
infrastructure according to customer requirements and imple- not possible, we regret that we are obliged to make a small pro-
menting electronic order processing, we have successfully opti- cessing charge: for orders with a net goods value of less than
mized our logistics processes. € 250 we charge an € 20 supplement to cover our order pro-
cessing and invoicing costs.
We are proud of our personal consulting service, on-time deliv-
eries and 1-day transport within Germany.
To this end, we supply the preferred types marked with }
ex works.
We regard the DIN ISO 9001 certification and consistent quality
checks as an integral part of our services.
Electronic order processing is fast, cost-efficient and error-free.
Please contact us if you want to benefit from these advantages.
Packaging, packing units
The packaging in which our equipment is dispatched provides
protection against dust and mechanical damage during trans-
port, thus ensuring that all our products arrive in perfect condi-
tion.
We select our packaging for maximum environmental compati-
bility and reusability (e.g. crumpled paper instead of polystyrene
chips for protection during transport in packages up to 32 kg)
and, in particular, with a view to reducing waste.
With our multi-unit packaging and reusable packaging, we offer
you specific types of packaging that are both kind to the environ-
ment and tailored to your requirements:
Your advantages at a glance:
• Lower order costs.
• Cost savings through uniform-type packaging: low/no dis-
posal costs.
• Reduced time and cost thanks to short unpacking times.
• "Just-in-time" delivery directly to the production line helps re-
duce stock: cost savings through reduction of storage area.
• Fast assembly thanks to supply in sets.
• Standard Euro boxes - corresponding to the Euro pallet mod-
ular system - suitable for most conveyor systems.
• Active contribution to environmental protection.
6 Unless stated otherwise in the "Selection and ordering data" of
this catalog, our products are supplied individually packed.
For small parts/accessories, we offer you economical pack-
aging units as standard packs containing more than one
item, e.g. 5, 10, 50 or 100 units. It is essential that whole num-
ber multiples of these quantities be ordered to ensure satis-
factory quality of the products and problem-free order pro-
cessing.
The products are delivered in a neutral carton. The label in-
cludes warning notices, the CE mark, the open arrow recycling
symbol, and product description information in English and
German. In addition to the Order No. (MLFB) and the number of
items in the packaging, the Instr. Order No. is also specified for
the operating instructions. It can be obtained from your local
Siemens representative (you will find a list of your local Siemens
representatives at www.siemens.com/automation/partner).
The device Order No. of most devices can also be acquired
through the EAN barcode to simplify ordering and storage logis-
tics.
The Order Nos. and EAN codes are assigned electronically in
the master data of the products for low-voltage power distribu-
tion and electrical installation.
6/4 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
Ordering notes
■ Overview
Explanations on the Selection and Ordering Data
Delivery time class (DT)
Preferred types are device types that can be delivered immediately ex works, i.e. they are dispatched
DT Meaning within 24 hours.
} Preferred type Normal quantities of the products are usually delivered within the specified time following receipt of your
order at our branch.
A Two workdays
In exceptional cases, the actual delivery time may differ from that specified.
B One week
The delivery times apply up to the ramp at Siemens AG (products ready for dispatch).
C Three weeks
The transport times depend on the destination and type of shipping. The standard shipping time for Ger-
D Six weeks
many is one day.
X On request
The delivery time classes specified here represent the state at 10/2010. They are permanently optimized.
Up-to-date information can be found at www.siemens.com/industrymall.
Price units (PU)
The price unit defines the number of units, sets or meters to which the specified price and weight apply.
PS (packaging size)
The packaging size / packaging unit defines the number, e.g. of units, sets or meters, for outer packaging.
• The first digit in the PS/P. unit column (packaging size/packaging unit) indicates the minimum order quantity. You can only order this
specified quantity or a multiple thereof.
• The second digit in the PS/P. unit column (packaging size/packaging unit) specifies the number of units contained in larger packaging
(e.g. in a carton). You must order this quantity or a multiple thereof if you want the item to be delivered in a larger packaging quantity.
Examples:
PS/P. unit Meaning

1 unit You can order one item or a multiple thereof.
5 units For example, five units are packed in a bag. Because the bags cannot be opened, you can only order a multiple of
the quantity contained in the bag: 5, 10, 15, 20 etc.
5/100 units One carton contains (for example) 20 bags, each containing 5 units, i.e. a total of 100 units. If only cartons are avail-
able for delivery, you need to order a multiple of the carton quantity: 100, 200, 300, etc.
Ordering a quantity of 220 units, would produce the following delivery: two cartons, each containing 100 units
(= 200 units) and 4 bags, each containing 5 units (= 20 units).
Weight
The defined weight is the net weight in kg and refers to the price unit (PU).
Examples
DT Order No. PS Weight DT Order No. PS Weight
per PU per PU
approx. approx.
kg kg
B 3VT2 725-2AA36-0AA0 1 unit 2,840 B 3VT9 300-8CE30 1 unit 0,077
B 3VT2 725-3AA36-0AA0 1 unit 2,840 B 3VT9 300-8CE00 1 unit 0,050
DT: B = one week DT: B = one week

PS: The minimum order quantity is one unit PS: The minimum order quantity is one unit
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 6/5

© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
Further documentation
■ Overview
We regard product support as just as important as the products
and systems themselves.
Visit our site on the Internet for a comprehensive offering of sup-
port for low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation
products, such as
• Operating instructions and manuals for direct download
• Online registration for seminars and events
• Up-to-date answers to your queries and problems
• Software upgrades and updates for fast download
• Telephone assistance in more than 190 countries
• Photos and graphics for external use
and much, much more - all conveniently and easily accessible.
Address:
You will find regularly updated information material such as cat-

alogs, customer magazines, brochures and trial versions of soft-
ware for low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation
on the Internet at:
Here you can order your copy of the available documentation or
download it in common file formats (PDF, ZIP).
For your configuration systems we can provide technical and

graphic data in electronic form for the range of low-voltage
power distribution and electrical installation products:
CAx online generator
For the further processing of low-voltage power distribution and
6 electrical installation products in CAE/CAD systems the online
generator provides:
• Technical product master data in CSV and Excel format
• Graphic product data
- 2D dimensional drawings in DXF format (other formats op-
tional)
- 3D models in STEP format
- Internal circuit diagrams
- EPLAN electric P 8 macros
• Documentation in the form of PDF files
- Product data sheets
- Manuals
- Operating instructions
- Characteristics
- Certificates
• Product photos
• Texts for tenders in GAEB and Text format
www.siemens.com/cax
6/6 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
Standards and approvals
■ Overview
Approvals, test certificates, characteristic curves
An overview of the certificates available for low-voltage power
distribution and electrical installation products along with more
technical documentation can be consulted daily on the Internet
at:
Product support: Approvals / Certificates Product support: Characteristic curves

Product standards (excerpt)
IEC EN DIN VDE Title
60947-1 60947-1 -- Low-voltage controlgear and switchgear: General rules
60947-2 60947-2 -- • Circuit breakers
60947-3 60947-3 -- • Switches, disconnectors, switch disconnectors and fuse-combination units
60947-4-1 60947-4-1 -- • Contactors and motor starters – Electromechanical contactors and motor starters
60947-4-2 60947-4-2 -- • Contactors and motor starters – Semiconductor motor controllers and starters, soft starters
60947-4-3 60947-4-3 -- • Contactors and motor starters – AC semiconductor controllers and contactors for non-motor loads
60947-5-1 60947-5-1 -- • Control circuit devices and switching elements – Electromechanical control circuit devices
60947-5-2 60947-5-2 -- • Control circuit devices and switching elements – Proximity switches
60947-5-3 60947-5-3 -- • Control circuit devices and switching elements – Requirements for proximity devices with
defined behaviour under fault conditions
60947-5-5 60947-5-5 -- • Control circuit devices and switching elements – Electrical emergency stop device with mechanical latch-
ing function
60947-5-6 60947-5-6 -- • Control circuit devices and switching elements – DC interface for proximity sensors and
switching amplifiers (NAMUR)
60947-5-7 60947-5-7 -- • Control circuit devices and switching elements – Requirements for proximity switches with
analog output
6
60947-5-8 60947-5-8 -- • Control circuit devices and switching elements – Three-position enabling switches
60947-5-9 60947-5-9 -- • Control circuit devices and switching elements – Flow rate switches
60947-6-1 60947-6-1 -- • Multiple function equipment – Transfer switching equipment
60947-6-2 60947-6-2 -- • Multiple function equipment – Control and protective switching devices (or equipment) (CPS)
60947-7-1 60947-7-1 -- • Ancillary equipment – Terminal blocks for copper conductors
60947-7-2 60947-7-2 -- • Ancillary equipment – Protective conductor terminal blocks for copper conductors
60947-7-3 60947-7-3 -- • Ancillary equipment – Safety requirements for fuse terminal blocks
60947-8 60947-8 -- • Control units for built-in thermal protection (PTC) for rotating electrical machines
62026-2 50295 -- • Controller and device interface systems. Actuator-Sensor Interface (AS-i)
60269-1 60269-1 -- Low-voltage fuses – General requirements
60269-4 60269-4 -- Low-voltage fuses – Supplementary requirements for fuse-links for the protection of semiconductor
devices
60050-441 -- -- International Electrotechnical Vocabulary. Switchgear, controlgear and fuses
60439-1 60439-1 -- Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies – Type-tested and partially type-tested assemblies
61439-1 -- -- Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies – General rules
61439-2 -- -- Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies – Particular requirements for busbar trunking
systems (busways)
-- 50274 -- Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies – Protection against electric shock - Protection
against unintentional direct contact with hazardous live parts
61140 61140 -- Protection against electric shock - Common aspects for installation and equipment
60664-1 60664-1 -- Insulation coordination for electrical equipment within low-voltage systems –
Principles, requirements and tests
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 6/7

© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
IEC EN DIN VDE Title

60204-1 60204-1 -- Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines – General requirements
-- 50178 -- Electronic equipment for use in power installations
60079-14 60079-14 -- Explosive atmospheres – Part 14: Electrical installations design, selection and erection
Installing electrical apparatus in potentially explosive gas atmospheres (except mining)
60079-2 60079-2 -- Explosive atmospheres – Part 2: Equipment protection by pressurized enclosures "p"
61810-1 61810-1 -- Electromechanical elementary relays – Part 1: General requirements
61812-1 61812-1 -- Specified time relays for industrial use – Part 1: Requirements and tests
60999-1 60999-1 -- Connecting devices – Electrical copper conductors – Safety requirements for screw-type and screwless-
type clamping units – Part 1: General requirements and particular requirements for clamping units for con-
ductors from 0.2 mm2 to 35 mm2
61558-1 61558-1 0570-11) Safety of power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar products –
- Part 1: General requirements and tests
61558-2-1 61558-2-1 0570-2-11) - Part 2-1: Particular requirements and tests for separating transformers and power supplies
incorporating separating transformers for general applications
1)
61558-2-2 61558-2-2 0570-2-2 - Part 2-2: Particular requirements and tests for control transformers and power supplies
incorporating control transformers
61558-2-4 61558-2-4 0570-2-41) - Part 2-4: Particular requirements and tests for isolating transformers and power supply units
incorporating isolating transformers
61558-2-6 61558-2-6 0570-2-61) - Part 2-6: Particular requirements and tests for safety isolating transformers and power supply units
incorporating safety isolating transformers
61558-2-9 61558-2-9 0570-2-91) - Part 2-9: Particular requirements and tests for transformers and power supply units for class III
handlamps for tungsten filament lamps
61558-2-12 61558-2-12 0570-2-121) - Part 2-12: Particular requirements for constant voltage transformers
61558-2-13 61558-2-13 0570-2-131) - Part 2-13: Particular requirements and tests for auto transformers and power supply units
incorporating auto transformers
61558-2-15 61558-2-15 0570-2-151) - Part 2-15: Particular requirements for isolating transformers for the supply of medical locations
61558-2-20 61558-2-20 0570-2-201) - Part 2-20: Particular requirements and tests for small reactors
62041 62041 0570-101) Power transformers, power supply units, reactors and similar products – EMC requirements
60076-11 60076-11 -- Power transformers – Part 11: Dry-type transformers
-- -- 0552 Standards for variable-ratio transformers with moving contacts perpendicular to the coiling direction
61000-4-1 61000-4-1 -- Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 4-1: Testing and measurement techniques – Overview
of IEC 61000-4 series
61000-6-3 61000-6-3 -- Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6-3: Generic standards – Emission standard for
residential, commercial and light-industrial environments
61000-6-4 61000-6-4 -- Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6-4: Generic standards – Emission standard for
industrial environments
60044-1 60044-1 -- Instrument transformers – Part 1: Current transformers
1)
VDE classification.
UL CSA C22.2 ASME JIS Title

506 -- -- -- Specialty transformers
508 -- -- -- Industrial control equipment
489 -- -- -- Molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and circuit breaker enclosures
1012 -- -- -- Power units other than CLASS 2
1561 -- -- -- Dry-type general purpose and power transformers
5085 -- -- -- Low-voltage transformers
60601-1 -- -- -- Medical electrical equipment, Part 1: General requirements for safety (IEC 60601, EN 60601,
VDE 0750-1)
1604 -- -- -- Electrical equipment for use in CLASS I and II, Division 2 and CLASS III hazardous (Classified) locations
1059 -- -- -- Terminal blocks
486A-486B -- -- -- Wire connectors
6 486E -- -- -- Equipment wiring terminals for use with aluminum and/or copper conductors
50 -- -- -- Enclosures for electrical equipment. Non-environmental considerations
-- No. 66 -- -- Specialty transformers
-- No. 14 -- -- Industrial control equipment
-- No. 5 -- -- Molded case circuit breakers, molded case switches and circuit breaker enclosures
-- No. 107-1 -- -- General use power supplies
-- -- A17.5 / B 44.1 -- Elevator and escalator electrical equipment
-- -- -- C 8201-4-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear; Contactors and motor-starters
6/8 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
■ Quality management ■ Certificates

The quality management system of our I BT LV Business Unit Information on the certificates available (CE, UL, CSA, FM, ship-
complies with the international standard EN ISO 9001. ping authorizations) for low-voltage power distribution and elec-
The products and systems listed in this catalog are marketed us- trical installation products can be found on the Internet at:
ing a VDE-approved quality management system according to www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support
ISO 9001.
In the Entry List you can use the certificate type (general product
VDE certificate approval, explosion protection, test certificates, shipbuilding,...)
as a filter criterion.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Building Technologies Division
Low Voltage Distribution (I BT LV)
Reg. No.: 40017/QM/03.06
■ Approval requirements valid in different countries

Siemens low-voltage switchgear and controlgear are designed, In some cases, CSA for Canada and UL for the USA only ap-
manufactured and tested according to the relevant German prove special switchgear versions. Such special versions are
standards (DIN and VDE), IEC publications and European stan- listed separately from the standard versions in the individual
dards (EN) as well as CSA and UL standards. The standards as- parts of this catalog.
signed to the single devices are stated in the relevant parts of
this catalog. For this equipment, partial limitations of the maximum permissi-
ble voltages, currents and ratings can be imposed, or special
As far as is economically viable, the requirements of the various approval and, in some cases, special identification is required.
regulations valid in other countries are also taken into account in
the design of the equipment. For use on board ship, the specifications of the marine classifi-
cation societies must be observed (see table below). In some
In some countries (see table below), an approval is required for cases, they require type tests of the components to be ap-
certain low-voltage switchgear and controlgear components. proved.
Depending on the market requirements, these components have
been submitted for approval to the authorized testing institutes.
6
■ Testing bodies, approval identification and approval requirements
Country Canada 1) USA 1) China
Government-appointed or private, officially CSA UL UL CQC
recognized testing bodies (USA)
Approval symbol s c u cU u U
c UUS c UUS
c uUS c uUS
Approval requirements + + +
Remarks UL and CSA are authorized to grant approvals according to Canadian CCC
or US regulations. Please note: these approvals are frequently not rec-
ognized and additional approval often has to be obtained from the
national testing authority.
For more information about UL and CSA on request.

1) For guide numbers and file numbers for the approvals, visit our website at
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 6/9

© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
Siemens contacts
■ Contact partner at Siemens Industry

At Siemens Industry, more than 85 000 people are resolutely
pursuing the same goal: long-term improvement of your compet-
itive ability. We are committed to this goal. Thanks to our commit-
ment, we continue to set new standards. In all industries – world-
wide.
At your service locally, around the globe for consulting, sales,
training, service, support, spare parts ... on the entire Industry
range.
Your personal contact can be found in our Contacts Database at:
www.siemens.com/automation/partner
You start by selecting a
• Product group,
• Country,
• City,
• Service.
6/10 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
Solution partners
■ Solution partners - Automation, Power Distribution and PLM

Solution Partner Finder
The Siemens Solution Partner Program helps you to find the op-
timum partner for your specific requirements. Support is pro-
vided by the Solution Partner Finder, a comprehensive online da-
tabase that showcases the profiles of all our solution partners.
You can convince yourself of the competence of the respective
Solution Partner by means of the references provided.
The following search criteria are possible:
• Country
• Technology
• Sector
• Company
• Zip code
Once you have located a partner, you are only one small step
from contacting them.
You can locate the Solution Partner Finder as follows:
www.siemens.com/automation/partnerfinder
Additional information on the Siemens Solution Partner Program
is available online at:
The products and systems from Siemens Industry Automation www.siemens.com/automation/solutionpartner
and Drive Technologies offer the ideal platform for all automation
applications.
Under the name Siemens Solution Partner, selected system inte-
grators operate around the world as uniformly qualified solution
providers for the portfolio of Siemens automation, power distri-
bution and product lifecycle management products. Day after
day, they utilize their qualified product and system know-how as
well as their excellent industry expertise to your advantage –
for all requirements.
The Solution Partner emblem is a guarantee of quality.
The basis for this is to be found in four defined quality features:
• Solution quality:
A good result in every case based on proven solution know-
how.
• Expert quality:
Certified technical competence guarantees maximum effi-
ciency.
• Project quality:
Straight to the goal with proven project experience.
• Product range quality:
6
Comprehensive portfolio for state-of-the-art solutions from a
single source.
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 6/11

© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
Online Services
Information and ordering options available
on the Internet and DVD
■ Siemens Building Technologies on the web

The Siemens Division Building Technologies offers the full range
of products and solutions for secure and energy-efficient build-
ings and infrastructures – from building automation and heating,
ventilation and air-conditioning systems (HLK) to fire protection,
security, low-voltage power distribution and electrical installation
technology.
Extensive information about all products, systems and services
and support services is available in a compact and clear format
on the Internet at:
www.siemens.com/buildingtechnologies
■ Product selection with the interactive catalog CA 01

Detailed information together with convenient interactive
functions:
The interactive catalog CA 01 covers more than 80 000 products
and thus provides a full summary of the Siemens Industry
product base.
Here you will find everything that you need to solve tasks in the
fields of automation, switchgear, installation and drives.
All information is linked into a user interface which is easy to
work with and intuitive.
After selecting the product of your choice you can order at the
press of a button, by fax or by online link.
Information on the interactive catalog CA 01 can be found in the
Internet under:
www.siemens.com/automation/ca01
or on DVD.
6 ■ Easy Shopping with the Industry Mall

The Industry Mall is the virtual department store of Siemens AG
on the Internet. Here you have access to a huge range of prod-
ucts clearly and informatively presented in electronic catalogs.
Data transfer via EDIFACT allows the whole procedure, from se-
lection over ordering through to order tracking, to be carried out
online over the Internet.
A range of functions offer comprehensive support.
These include powerful search functions that make it easy to find
the required products, which can then be immediately checked
for availability. Customer-specific discounting and compilation of
tenders are possible online, as is checking the status of your or-
der (Tracking & Tracing).
You can find the Industry Mall on the Internet at:
6/12 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
Service & Support
Service covering the entire life cycle
■ Overview ■ Technical Consulting

Support in the planning and de-
ng & Design signing of your project from de-
Planni
tailed actual-state analysis,
on target definition and consulting
ti
on product and system ques-
Co
iza
Technical
nfi
ti m
Consulting tions right to the creation of the
gu
Op
rat
automation solution.
ion &
Modernization
io
Technical
n&
and
Support
Modernizat
Optimization
Development
Online
Support
Spare Parts Engineering

and Repairs Support ■ Engineering Support
Support in configuring and de-
Op
Field
g
nin
er a
Service veloping with customer-oriented

sio
tio
&
services from actual configura-
n
is
M m
ain om
ten
anc n &C tion to implementation of the au-
e atio
Install tomation project.
Our Service & Support are available worldwide to help you with
every aspect of Siemens automation and drive technology. We
offer on-site support for every phase of the life cycle of your ma-
chines and plants in more than 100 countries. Round the clock.
Every step of the way, you have access to an experienced team
■ Field Service
With Field Service, we offer
of specialists and their combined expertise. Thanks to regular
services for startup and mainte-
training and the close cooperation of key employees around the
nance essential for ensuring
globe, we are able to offer reliable services for a huge range of
system availability.
options.
■ Online Support
The comprehensive information
system available round the
clock via Internet ranging from
Product Support and Service &
Support services to Support ■ Spare parts and Repais
Tools in the Shop. In the operating phase of a ma-
chine or automation system, we
www.siemens.com/
offer comprehensive repair and
lowvoltage/support
spare parts services ensuring
the highest degree of plant
availability.
■ Technical Support
Competent consulting in techni-
cal questions covering a wide 6
range of customer-oriented ser-
vices for all our products and
systems. ■ Modernization and Optimization
After startup or during the oper-
www.siemens.com/ ating phase, additional potential
lowvoltage/technical-support for inceasing the productiviy or
for reducing costs often arises.
For this purpose, we offer you
high-quality services in optimi-
zation and upgrading.
Contact information is available in the Internet at:

www.siemens.com/automation/partner
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 6/13

© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
Comprehensive support from A to Z
■ Overview
In all issues for more efficiency - comprehensive support and ac-
Product information cess at any time to tried and tested tools, quickly and easily via
Website Fast and targeted information about low-voltage the Internet.
power distribution:
Newsletter Always up to date about our forward-looking prod-

ucts and systems:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/newsletter
Product information/product & system selection

Information and Current catalogs, customer magazines, brochures,
download center demo software and promotion packages:
Industry Mall Comprehensive information and order platform for

the Siemens Industry Basket:
Product- & System-Engineering

SIMARIS Support in planning and configuration the electrical
Software tools power distribution:
www.siemens.com/simaris
Engineering soft- Simple and fast configuration for distribution boards

ware ALPHA and meter cabinets with products from the Siemens
SELECT Industry Basket:
www.siemens.com/alpha-select
Product documentation
Service & support Comprehensive technical information - from planning
portal to configuration and operation:
CAx Data Collation of commercial and technical master prod-

uct data:
www.siemens.com/cax
Image database Collection of product photographs and graphics,

such as dimensional drawings and internal circuit
diagrams:
www.siemens.de/lowvoltage/bilddb
Product training
SITRAIN Portal Comprehensive training program about our prod-
ucts, systems and engineering tools:
6 www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/training
Product hotline
Technical support Support in all technical queries about our products:
E-mail: support.automation@siemens.com
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-support
6/14 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
Software Licenses
■ Overview
Software types Factory license
Software requiring a license is categorized into types. With the Factory License the user has the right to install and use
The following software types have been defined: the software at one permanent establishment only. The perma-
• Engineering software nent establishment is defined by one address only.The number
of hardware devices on which the software may be installed re-
• Runtime software sults from the order data or the Certificate of License (CoL).
Engineering software Certificate of license
This includes all software products for creating (engineering) The Certificate of License (CoL) is the licensee's proof that the
user software, e.g. for configuring, programming, parameteriz- use of the software has been licensed by Siemens. A CoL is
ing, testing, commissioning or servicing. required for every type of use and must be kept in a safe place.
Data generated with engineering software and executable
programs can be duplicated for your own use or for use by third- Downgrading
parties free-of-charge. The licensee is permitted to use the software or an earlier ver-
sion/release of the software, provided that the licensee owns
Runtime software such a version/release and its use is technically feasible.
This includes all software products required for plant/machine
operation, e.g. operating system, basic system, system expan- Delivery versions
sions, drivers, etc. Software is constantly being updated.
The duplication of the runtime software and executable pro- The following delivery versions
grams created with the runtime software for your own use or for • PowerPack
use by third-parties is subject to a charge. • Upgrade
You can find information about license fees according to use in can be used to access updates.
the ordering data (e.g. in the catalog). Examples of categories of
use include per CPU, per installation, per channel, per instance, Existing bug fixes are supplied with the ServicePack version.
per axis, per control loop, per variable, etc. PowerPack
Information about extended rights of use for parameteriza-
tion/configuration tools supplied as integral components of the PowerPacks can be used to upgrade to more powerful software.
scope of delivery can be found in the readme file supplied with The licensee receives a new license agreement and CoL
the relevant product(s). (Certificate of License) with the PowerPack. This CoL, together
with the CoL for the original product, proves that the new soft-
License types ware is licensed.
A separate PowerPack must be purchased for each original
Siemens Industry Automation & Drive Technologies offers vari- license of the software to be replaced.
ous types of software license:
• Floating license Upgrade
• Single license An upgrade permits the use of a new version of the software on
the condition that a license for a previous version of the product
• Rental license is already held.
• Trial license The licensee receives a new license agreement and CoL with
the upgrade. This CoL, together with the CoL for the previous
Floating license product, proves that the new version is licensed.
The software may be installed for internal use on any number of A separate upgrade must be purchased for each original license
devices by the licensee. Only the concurrent user is licensed. of the software to be upgraded.
The concurrent user is the person using the program. Use be- ServicePack
gins when the software is started.
A license is required for each concurrent user. ServicePacks are used to debug existing products.
Single license
ServicePacks may be duplicated for use as prescribed accord-
ing to the number of existing original licenses.
6
Unlike the floating license, a single license permits only one License key
installation of the software.
The type of use licensed is specified in the ordering data and Siemens Industry Automation & Drive Technologies supplies
in the Certificate of License (CoL). Types of use include for software products with and without license keys.
example per device, per axis, per channel, etc. The license key serves as an electronic license stamp and
One single license is required for each type of use defined. is also the "switch" for activating the software (floating license,
rental license, etc.).
Rental license The complete installation of software products requiring license
A rental license supports the "sporadic use" of engineering keys includes the program to be licensed (the software) and the
software. Once the license key has been installed, the software license key (which represents the license).
can be used for a specific number of hours (the operating hours
do not have to be consecutive). Detailed explanations concerning license conditions can be found in the
One license is required for each installation of the software. “Terms and Conditions of Siemens AG” or under
http://www.siemens.com/industrymall
Trial license (Industry Mall Online-Help System)
A trial license supports "short-term use" of the software in a non-
productive context, e.g. for testing and evaluation purposes.
It can be transferred to another license.
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 6/15

© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
Subject index
Page Page
Numbers P
3VT1 Molded case circuit breakers Packaging ...................................................... 6/4
up to 160 A ................................................... 1/1 Parallel switching for 3VT1 ............ 1/7, 1/8, 1/27
3VT2 Molded case circuit breakers Parallel switching for 3VT2 .......... 2/6, 2/28, 2/30
up to 250 A ................................................... 2/1
Parallel switching for 3VT3 ................... 3/6, 3/31
3VT3 Molded case circuit breakers
up to 630 A ................................................... 3/1 Parallel switching for 3VT5 .......................... 5/29
3VT4 Molded case circuit breakers Partners of Industry Automation and Drive
up to 1000 A ................................................. 4/1 Technologies ................................................. 6/6
3VT5 Molded case circuit breakers R
up to 1600 A ................................................. 5/1 RCD modules for 3VT1 .................................. 1/9
A Residual current devices for 3VT1 ................ 1/9
Alarm switch for 3VT1 ................................... 1/6 Rotary operating mechanism for 3VT1 .......... 1/7
Alarm switch for 3VT2 ................................... 2/5 Rotary operating mechanism for 3VT2 . 2/6, 2/28
Alarm switch for 3VT3 ................................... 3/5 Rotary operating mechanism for 3VT3 .......... 3/6
Approvals ...................................................... 6/7 Rotary operating mechanism for 3VT4 .......... 4/5
Auxiliary switches for 3VT1 .................. 1/6, 1/24 Rotary operating mechanism for 3VT5 . 5/5, 5/28
Auxiliary switches for 3VT2 .................. 2/5, 2/25 S
Auxiliary switches for 3VT3 ........................... 3/5 Service and Support ..................................... 6/8
Auxiliary switches for 3VT4 ........................... 4/6 Shunt trip units for 3VT1 ....................... 1/6, 1/26
Auxiliary switches for 3VT5 .................. 5/4, 5/25 Shunt trip units for 3VT2 ....................... 2/5, 2/26
Auxiliary trip units for 3VT2 ......................... 2/26 Shunt trip units for 3VT3 ....................... 3/5, 3/27
C Shunt trip units for 3VT4 ................................ 4/4
Certificates..................................................... 6/9 Shunt trip units for 3VT5 ....................... 5/4, 5/26
Connecting accessories for 3VT1 ............... 1/10 Signalling units for 3VT4 ................................ 4/4
Connecting accessories for 3VT2 ................. 2/9 Signalling units for 3VT5 ....................... 5/4, 5/24
Connecting accessories for 3VT3 ................. 3/9 Software licenses ........................................ 6/15
Connecting accessories for 3VT4 ................. 4/6 Solution partners .......................................... 6/11
Connecting accessories for 3VT5 ................. 5/6 Standard circuit breaker 3VT5 ................ 5/3, 5/8
E Standards and approvals .............................. 6/7
ETU trip units for 3VT3 .................................. 3/4 Switch disconnector 3VT2 ........... 2/4, 2/12, 2/13
ETU trip units for 3VT4 .................................. 4/4 Switch disconnector 3VT3 ........................... 3/13
ETU trip units for 3VT5 .................................. 5/4 Switch disconnector 3VT4 ............................. 4/3
Export regulations ....................................... 6/18 Switch disconnectors 3VT1 .................. 1/5, 1/12
F Switch-disconnector 3VT5 ..................... 5/4, 5/9
Further documentation .................................. 6/6 Switches for 3VT3 ........................................ 3/25
G Switching units for 3VT2 ................................ 2/3
Glossary ........................................................ 6/2 Switching units for 3VT4 ................................ 4/3
I Switching units for 3VT5 ................................ 5/3
Interlocks for 3VT1 ........................................ 1/8 T
K Terms and Conditions of Sale and Delivery 6/20
Knowledge Base on DVD ........................... 6/10 Trip units for 3VT3 ........................................ 3/11
M Trip units for 3VT5 ................................... 5/3, 5/8
6 Mechanical interlocking for 3VT1 ........ 1/7, 1/27
Mechanical interlocking for 3VT2 2/6, 2/28, 2/30
U
Undervoltage trip unit for 3VT1 ............. 1/6, 1/26
Mechanical interlocking for 3VT3 ........ 3/6, 3/31 Undervoltage trip unit for 3VT2 ............ 2/5, 2/27
Mechanical interlocking for 3VT4 ................. 4/5 Undervoltage trip unit for 3VT3 ..................... 3/5
Mechanical interlocking for 3VT5 ........ 5/5, 5/29 Undervoltage trip units for 3VT4 ................... 4/4
Mounting accessories for 3VT1 .................. 1/10 Undervoltage trip units for 3VT5 .......... 5/4, 5/27
Mounting accessories for 3VT2 .................... 2/8 V
Mounting accessories for 3VT3 .................... 3/8 Verification certificates .................................. 6/7
Mounting accessories for 3VT4 .................... 4/6 W
Mounting accessories for 3VT5 .................... 5/6 Withdrawable version for 3VT2 ............ 2/8, 2/40
O Withdrawable version for 3VT3 ............ 3/8, 3/43
Online Services ........................................... 6/12 Withdrawable version for 3VT4 ..................... 4/8
Operating mechanisms for Withdrawable version for 3VT5 ............ 5/6, 5/12
3VT1 ....................................... 1/7, 1/8, 1/9, 1/30
Operating mechanisms for 3VT2 ................ 2/32
Operating mechanisms for 3VT3 ................ 3/33
Operating mechanisms for 3VT4 .................. 4/5
Operating mechanisms for 3VT5 ......... 5/5, 5/30
Order number index ................................... 6/17
Ordering notes .............................................. 6/4
Overcurrent trip units for 3VT2 ............. 2/4, 2/15
Overcurrent trip units for 3VT3 .................... 3/16
Overcurrent trip units for 3VT4 ...................... 4/9
Overcurrent trip units for 3VT5 .................... 5/14
6/16 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
Order number index

Page Page Page
3VT1 3VT1 712-2EB46-0AA0 .................................. 1/5 3VT9 100-3HJ20 ............................................ 1/7

3VT1 701-2DC36-0AA0 ................................. 1/4 3VT1 712-2EC46-0AA0 .................................. 1/4 3VT9 100-3HL00 .......................................... 1/11
3VT1 701-2DM36-0AA0 ................................. 1/5 3VT1 712-2EH46-0AA0 .................................. 1/3 3VT9 100-3MA00 ........................................... 1/8
3VT1 701-2EC46-0AA0.................................. 1/4 3VT1 712-2EJ46-0AA0 ................................... 1/4 3VT9 100-3MB00 ........................................... 1/8
3VT1 701-2EJ46-0AA0................................... 1/4 3VT1 716-2DA36-0AA0 .................................. 1/3 3VT9 100-3MD00 ........................................... 1/8
3VT1 702-2DC36-0AA0 ................................. 1/4 3VT1 716-2DB36-0AA0 .................................. 1/5 3VT9 100-3ME00 ........................................... 1/8
3VT1 702-2DM36-0AA0 ................................. 1/5 3VT1 716-2DC36-0AA0.................................. 1/4 3VT9 100-3MF00 ......................................... 1/11
3VT1 702-2EC46-0AA0.................................. 1/4 3VT1 716-2DE36-0AA0 .................................. 1/5 3VT9 100-4ED30.......................................... 1/10
3VT1 702-2EJ46-0AA0................................... 1/4 3VT1 716-2EA46-0AA0 .................................. 1/3 3VT9 100-4PP30 .......................................... 1/11
3VT1 703-2DB36-0AA0.................................. 1/5 3VT1 716-2EB46-0AA0 .................................. 1/5 3VT9 100-4RC00 ......................................... 1/10
3VT1 703-2DC36-0AA0 ................................. 1/4 3VT1 716-2EC46-0AA0 .................................. 1/4 3VT9 100-4RC30 ......................................... 1/10
3VT1 703-2DM36-0AA0 ................................. 1/5 3VT1 716-2EE46-0AA0................................... 1/5 3VT9 100-4TA00 .......................................... 1/10
3VT1 703-2EB46-0AA0 .................................. 1/5 3VT1 716-2EH46-0AA0 .................................. 1/3 3VT9 100-4TA30 .......................................... 1/10
3VT1 703-2EC46-0AA0.................................. 1/4 3VT1 716-2EJ46-0AA0 ................................... 1/4 3VT9 100-4TF30 .......................................... 1/10
3VT1 703-2EJ46-0AA0................................... 1/4 3VT1 792-2DC36-0AA0.................................. 1/4 3VT9 100-4TF40 .......................................... 1/10
3VT1 704-2DA36-0AA0.................................. 1/3 3VT1 792-2DM36-0AA0 ................................. 1/5 3VT9 100-4TN00 .......................................... 1/10
3VT1 704-2DB36-0AA0.................................. 1/5 3VT1 792-2EC46-0AA0 .................................. 1/4 3VT9 100-4TN30 .......................................... 1/10
3VT1 704-2DC36-0AA0 ................................. 1/4 3VT1 792-2EJ46-0AA0 ................................... 1/4 3VT9 100-8CA30 ......................................... 1/11
3VT1 704-2DM36-0AA0 ................................. 1/5 3VT2 3VT9 100-8CA40 ......................................... 1/11
3VT1 704-2EA46-0AA0 .................................. 1/3 3VT2 725-2AA36-0AA0 .................................. 2/3 3VT9 100-8CE00.......................................... 1/11
3VT1 704-2EB46-0AA0 .................................. 1/5 3VT2 725-2AA46-0AA0 .................................. 2/3 3VT9 100-8CE30.......................................... 1/11
3VT1 704-2EC46-0AA0.................................. 1/4 3VT2 725-2AA56-0AA0 .................................. 2/3 3VT9 100-8LA00 ............................................ 1/8
3VT1 704-2EH46-0AA0.................................. 1/3 3VT2 725-3AA36-0AA0 .................................. 2/3 3VT9 100-8LB00 ............................................ 1/8
3VT1 704-2EJ46-0AA0................................... 1/4 3VT2 725-3AA46-0AA0 .................................. 2/3 3VT9 115-5GY31 ........................................... 1/9
3VT1 705-2DA36-0AA0.................................. 1/3 3VT2 725-3AA56-0AA0 .................................. 2/3 3VT9 115-5GY32 ........................................... 1/9
3VT1 705-2DB36-0AA0.................................. 1/5 3VT3 3VT9 115-5GY41 ........................................... 1/9
3VT1 705-2DC36-0AA0 ................................. 1/4 3VT3 763-2AA36-0AA0 .................................. 3/3 3VT9 115-5GY42 ........................................... 1/9
3VT1 705-2DM36-0AA0 ................................. 1/5 3VT3 763-2AA46-0AA0 .................................. 3/3 3VT9 116-5GA40 ........................................... 1/9
3VT1 705-2EA46-0AA0 .................................. 1/3 3VT3 763-2AA56-0AA0 .................................. 3/3 3VT9 116-5GB40 ........................................... 1/9
3VT1 705-2EB46-0AA0 .................................. 1/5 3VT3 763-3AA36-0AA0 .................................. 3/3 3VT9 2
3VT1 705-2EC46-0AA0.................................. 1/4 3VT3 763-3AA46-0AA0 .................................. 3/3 3VT9 200-3HA10 ........................................... 2/6
3VT1 705-2EH46-0AA0.................................. 1/3 3VT3 763-3AA56-0AA0 .................................. 3/3 3VT9 200-3HA20 ........................................... 2/6
3VT1 705-2EJ46-0AA0................................... 1/4 3VT4 3VT9 200-3HB20 ........................................... 2/6
3VT1 706-2DA36-0AA0.................................. 1/3 3VT4 710-3AA30-0AA0 .................................. 4/3 3VT9 200-3HC10 ........................................... 2/6
3VT1 706-2DB36-0AA0.................................. 1/5 3VT4 710-3AA38-0AA0 .................................. 4/3 3VT9 200-3HD10 ........................................... 2/6
3VT1 706-2DC36-0AA0 ................................. 1/4 3VT5 3VT9 200-3HL00 .......................................... 2/10
3VT1 706-2DM36-0AA0 ................................. 1/5 3VT5 716-3AA30-0AA0 .................................. 5/3 3VT9 200-3MJ00............................................ 2/7
3VT1 706-2EA46-0AA0 .................................. 1/3 3VT5 716-3AA38-0AA0 .................................. 5/3 3VT9 200-3MJ10............................................ 2/7
3VT1 706-2EB46-0AA0 .................................. 1/5 3VT9 1 3VT9 200-3ML00 ........................................... 2/7
3VT1 706-2EC46-0AA0.................................. 1/4 3VT9 100-1SC00 ............................................ 1/6 3VT9 200-3ML10 ........................................... 2/7
3VT1 706-2EH46-0AA0.................................. 1/3 3VT9 100-1SD00 ............................................ 1/6 3VT9 200-3MN00 ........................................... 2/7
3VT1 706-2EJ46-0AA0................................... 1/4
3VT1 708-2DA36-0AA0.................................. 1/3
3VT9 100-1SE00............................................. 1/6
3VT9 100-1UC00............................................ 1/6
3VT9 200-3MN10 ........................................... 2/7
3VT9 200-3MQ00........................................... 2/7 6
3VT1 708-2DB36-0AA0.................................. 1/5 3VT9 100-1UD00............................................ 1/6 3VT9 200-3MQ10........................................... 2/7
3VT1 708-2DC36-0AA0 ................................. 1/4 3VT9 100-1UE00 ............................................ 1/6 3VT9 200-4ED30............................................ 2/9
3VT1 708-2DM36-0AA0 ................................. 1/5 3VT9 100-1UU00............................................ 1/6 3VT9 200-4EE30 ............................................ 2/9
3VT1 708-2EA46-0AA0 .................................. 1/3 3VT9 100-1UV00 ............................................ 1/6 3VT9 200-4PA30 ............................................ 2/8
3VT1 708-2EB46-0AA0 .................................. 1/5 3VT9 100-2AB10 ............................................ 1/6 3VT9 200-4PA40 ............................................ 2/8
3VT1 708-2EC46-0AA0.................................. 1/4 3VT9 100-2AB20 ............................................ 1/6 3VT9 200-4RC00 ........................................... 2/9
3VT1 708-2EH46-0AA0.................................. 1/3 3VT9 100-2AH10 ............................................ 1/6 3VT9 200-4RC30 ........................................... 2/9
3VT1 708-2EJ46-0AA0................................... 1/4 3VT9 100-2AH20 ............................................ 1/6 3VT9 200-4TA30 ............................................ 2/9
3VT1 710-2DA36-0AA0.................................. 1/3 3VT9 100-3HA10 ............................................ 1/7 3VT9 200-4TC00 ............................................ 2/9
3VT1 710-2DB36-0AA0.................................. 1/5 3VT9 100-3HA20 ............................................ 1/7 3VT9 200-4TC30 ............................................ 2/9
3VT1 710-2DC36-0AA0 ................................. 1/4 3VT9 100-3HB20 ............................................ 1/7 3VT9 200-4TN30 ............................................ 2/9
3VT1 710-2DM36-0AA0 ................................. 1/5 3VT9 100-3HC10............................................ 1/7 3VT9 200-4WA30 ........................................... 2/8
3VT1 710-2EA46-0AA0 .................................. 1/3 3VT9 100-3HD10............................................ 1/7 3VT9 200-4WA40 ........................................... 2/8
3VT1 710-2EB46-0AA0 .................................. 1/5 3VT9 100-3HE10 ............................................ 1/7 3VT9 200-4WN00......................................... 2/10
3VT1 710-2EC46-0AA0.................................. 1/4 3VT9 100-3HE20 ............................................ 1/7 3VT9 200-8BL00 .......................................... 2/10
3VT1 710-2EH46-0AA0.................................. 1/3 3VT9 100-3HF20 ............................................ 1/7 3VT9 200-8BL00 .......................................... 3/10
3VT1 710-2EJ46-0AA0................................... 1/4 3VT9 100-3HG10............................................ 1/7 3VT9 200-8BN00 ......................................... 2/10
3VT1 712-2DA36-0AA0.................................. 1/3 3VT9 100-3HG20............................................ 1/7 3VT9 200-8BN00 ......................................... 3/10
3VT1 712-2DB36-0AA0.................................. 1/5 3VT9 100-3HH10............................................ 1/7 3VT9 200-8CB30 ......................................... 2/10
3VT1 712-2DC36-0AA0 ................................. 1/4 3VT9 100-3HH20............................................ 1/7 3VT9 200-8CB40 ......................................... 2/10
3VT1 712-2EA46-0AA0 .................................. 1/3 3VT9 100-3HJ10............................................. 1/7 3VT9 200-8LC10 ............................................ 2/7
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 6/17

© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
Order number index

Page Page Page
3VT9 203-4TF00............................................. 2/9 3VT9 300-3HL00 .......................................... 3/10 3VT9 4

3VT9 203-4TF30............................................. 2/9 3VT9 300-3MF00 ..................................... 2/7, 3/7 3VT9 400-4RC30 .................................... 4/6, 5/6
3VT9 210-6AC00............................................ 2/4 3VT9 300-3MF10 ..................................... 2/7, 3/7 3VT9 410-6AC00 ........................................... 4/4
3VT9 210-6AP00 ............................................ 2/4 3VT9 300-3MF20 ................................. 2/10, 3/10 3VT9 410-6AD00 ........................................... 4/4
3VT9 210-6AS00 ............................................ 2/4 3VT9 300-3MF20 .......................................... 3/10 3VT9 410-6AP00 ............................................ 4/4
3VT9 210-6BC00............................................ 2/4 3VT9 300-3MJ00 ............................................ 3/7 3VT9 410-6DT00 ............................................ 4/4
3VT9 215-4TD00 ............................................ 2/9 3VT9 300-3MJ10 ............................................ 3/7 3VT9 431-6AC00 ........................................... 4/4
3VT9 215-4TD30 ............................................ 2/9 3VT9 300-3ML00 ............................................ 3/7 3VT9 431-6AD00 ........................................... 4/4
3VT9 215-4TF00............................................. 2/9 3VT9 300-3ML10 ............................................ 3/7 3VT9 431-6AP00 ............................................ 4/4
3VT9 215-4TF30............................................. 2/9 3VT9 300-3MN00 ........................................... 3/7 3VT9 463-6AC00 ........................................... 4/4
3VT9 216-6AB00............................................ 2/4 3VT9 300-3MN10 ........................................... 3/7 3VT9 463-6AD00 ........................................... 4/4
3VT9 216-6AC00............................................ 2/4 3VT9 300-3MQ00 ........................................... 3/7 3VT9 463-6AP00 ............................................ 4/4
3VT9 216-6AP00 ............................................ 2/4 3VT9 300-3MQ10 ........................................... 3/7 3VT9 480-6AC00 ........................................... 4/4
3VT9 216-6AS00 ............................................ 2/4 3VT9 300-4ED30 ............................................ 3/9 3VT9 480-6AD00 ........................................... 4/4
3VT9 216-6BC00............................................ 2/4 3VT9 300-4EE30............................................. 3/9 3VT9 480-6AP00 ............................................ 4/4
3VT9 220-6AB00............................................ 2/4 3VT9 300-4PA30............................................. 3/8 3VT9 5
3VT9 224-4TD00 ............................................ 2/9 3VT9 300-4PA40............................................. 3/8 3VT9 500-1SF00 ..................................... 4/4, 5/4
3VT9 224-4TD30 ............................................ 2/9 3VT9 300-4PL00.................................. 2/10, 3/10 3VT9 500-1SG00 .................................... 4/4, 5/4
3VT9 224-4TF00............................................. 2/9 3VT9 300-4RC00 ............................................ 3/9 3VT9 500-1SH00..................................... 4/4, 5/4
3VT9 224-4TF30............................................. 2/9 3VT9 300-4RC30 ............................................ 3/9 3VT9 500-1SJ00 ..................................... 4/4, 5/4
3VT9 225-6AB00............................................ 2/4 3VT9 300-4TA30 ............................................. 3/9 3VT9 500-1SK00 ..................................... 4/4, 5/4
3VT9 225-6AC00............................................ 2/4 3VT9 300-4TC00 ............................................ 3/9 3VT9 500-1SL00 ..................................... 4/4, 5/4
3VT9 225-6AP00 ............................................ 2/4 3VT9 300-4TC30 ............................................ 3/9 3VT9 500-1UF00 ..................................... 4/4, 5/4
3VT9 225-6AS00 ............................................ 2/4 3VT9 300-4TN30 ............................................ 3/9 3VT9 500-1UG00 .................................... 4/4, 5/4
3VT9 225-6BC00............................................ 2/4 3VT9 300-4WA30............................................ 3/8 3VT9 500-1UH00 .................................... 4/4, 5/4
3VT9 225-6DT00 ............................................ 2/4 3VT9 300-4WA40............................................ 3/8 3VT9 500-1UJ00 ..................................... 4/4, 5/4
3VT9 3 3VT9 300-4WL00................................. 2/10, 3/10 3VT9 500-1UK00 .................................... 4/4, 5/4
3VT9 300-1SC00............................................ 2/5 3VT9 300-4WN00 ......................................... 3/10 3VT9 500-1UL00 ..................................... 4/4, 5/4
3VT9 300-1SC00............................................ 3/5 3VT9 300-8CB30 .......................................... 3/10 3VT9 500-2AF10 ..................................... 4/4, 5/4
3VT9 300-1SD00..................................... 2/5, 3/5 3VT9 300-8CB40 .......................................... 3/10 3VT9 500-2AF10 ............................................ 5/4
3VT9 300-1SE00 ..................................... 2/5, 3/5 3VT9 300-8CE00 ................................. 2/10, 3/10 3VT9 500-2AF20 ..................................... 4/4, 5/4
3VT9 300-1UC00 .................................... 2/5, 3/5 3VT9 300-8CE30 ................................. 2/10, 3/10 3VT9 500-3HA10 .................................... 4/5, 5/5
3VT9 300-1UC10 .................................... 2/5, 3/5 3VT9 300-8LA00...................................... 2/7, 3/7 3VT9 500-3HE10..................................... 4/5, 5/5
3VT9 300-1UD00 .................................... 2/5, 3/5 3VT9 300-8LA00............................................. 3/7 3VT9 500-3HF10 ..................................... 4/5, 5/5
3VT9 300-1UD10 .................................... 2/5, 3/5 3VT9 300-8LB00...................................... 2/7, 3/7 3VT9 500-3HG10 .................................... 4/5, 5/5
3VT9 300-1UE00..................................... 2/5, 3/5 3VT9 300-8LC10 ............................................ 3/7 3VT9 500-3HG20 .................................... 4/5, 5/5
3VT9 300-1UE10..................................... 2/5, 3/5 3VT9 300-8LC20 ..................................... 2/7, 3/7 3VT9 500-3HJ10 ..................................... 4/5, 5/5
3VT9 300-2AC10..................................... 2/5, 3/5 3VT9 303-4TF00 ............................................. 3/9 3VT9 500-3HL00 ..................................... 4/7, 5/7
3VT9 300-2AC20..................................... 2/5, 3/5 3VT9 303-4TF30 ............................................. 3/9 3VT9 500-3MF20 .................................... 4/7, 5/7
3VT9 300-2AD10..................................... 2/5, 3/5 3VT9 315-4TD00 ............................................ 3/9 3VT9 500-3MN00 .................................... 4/5, 5/5
3VT9 300-2AD20..................................... 2/5, 3/5 3VT9 315-4TD30 ............................................ 3/9 3VT9 500-3MN10 .................................... 4/5, 5/5
6 3VT9 300-2AE10 ..................................... 2/5, 3/5

3VT9 300-2AE20 ..................................... 2/5, 3/5
3VT9 315-4TF00 ............................................. 3/9
3VT9 315-4TF30 ............................................. 3/9
3VT9 500-3MQ00.................................... 4/5, 5/5
3VT9 500-3MQ10.................................... 4/5, 5/5
3VT9 300-2AF10 ..................................... 2/5, 3/5 3VT9 324-4TD00 ............................................ 3/9 3VT9 500-4EF30 ..................................... 4/6, 5/5
3VT9 300-2AF20 ..................................... 2/5, 3/5 3VT9 324-4TD30 ............................................ 3/9 3VT9 500-4PL00 ..................................... 4/7, 5/7
3VT9 300-2AG10 .................................... 2/5, 3/5 3VT9 324-4TF00 ............................................. 3/9 3VT9 500-4RC30 .................................... 4/6, 5/6
3VT9 300-2AG20 .................................... 2/5, 3/5 3VT9 324-4TF30 ............................................. 3/9 3VT9 500-4RD30 .................................... 4/6, 5/6
3VT9 300-2AH10..................................... 2/5, 3/5 3VT9 325-6AB00 ............................................ 3/4 3VT9 500-4SA40 ..................................... 4/7, 5/7
3VT9 300-2AH20..................................... 2/5, 3/5 3VT9 325-6AC00 ............................................ 3/4 3VT9 500-4WA30 .................................... 4/6, 5/6
3VT9 300-2AJ00 ..................................... 2/5, 3/5 3VT9 325-6AP00 ............................................ 3/4 3VT9 500-4WL00 .................................... 4/7, 5/7
3VT9 300-2AJ00 ............................................ 3/5 3VT9 325-6AS00 ............................................ 3/4 3VT9 500-6AE00 ..................................... 4/4, 5/4
3VT9 300-3HA10............................................ 3/6 3VT9 325-6BC00 ............................................ 3/4 3VT9 500-8BN00 .................................... 4/7, 5/7
3VT9 300-3HA20............................................ 3/6 3VT9 331-6AB00 ............................................ 3/4 3VT9 500-8CC30 .................................... 4/7, 5/7
3VT9 300-3HB20............................................ 3/6 3VT9 340-6AB00 ............................................ 3/4 3VT9 500-8CD30 .................................... 4/7, 5/7
3VT9 300-3HC10 ........................................... 3/6 3VT9 340-6AC00 ............................................ 3/4 3VT9 500-8CE30..................................... 4/7, 5/7
3VT9 300-3HD10 ........................................... 3/6 3VT9 340-6AP00 ............................................ 3/4 3VT9 500-8CF30 ..................................... 4/7, 5/7
3VT9 300-3HE10..................................... 2/6, 3/6 3VT9 340-6AS00 ............................................ 3/4 3VT9 500-8CG30 .................................... 4/7, 5/7
3VT9 300-3HE20..................................... 2/6, 3/6 3VT9 340-6BC00 ............................................ 3/4 3VT9 500-8LA00 ..................................... 4/5, 5/5
3VT9 300-3HF20 ..................................... 2/6, 3/6 3VT9 350-6AB00 ............................................ 3/4 3VT9 500-8LC10 ..................................... 4/5, 5/5
3VT9 300-3HG10 .................................... 2/6, 3/6 3VT9 363-6AB00 ............................................ 3/4 3VT9 500-8LC30 ..................................... 4/5, 5/5
3VT9 300-3HG20 .................................... 2/6, 3/6 3VT9 363-6AC00 ............................................ 3/4 3VT9 500-8LC40 ..................................... 4/5, 5/5
3VT9 300-3HH10 .................................... 2/6, 3/6 3VT9 363-6AP00 ............................................ 3/4 3VT9 510-6AC00 ........................................... 5/4
3VT9 300-3HH20 .................................... 2/6, 3/6 3VT9 363-6AS00 ............................................ 3/4 3VT9 510-6AD00 ........................................... 5/4
3VT9 300-3HJ10 ..................................... 2/6, 3/6 3VT9 363-6BC00 ............................................ 3/4 3VT9 510-6AP00 ............................................ 5/4
3VT9 300-3HJ20 ..................................... 2/6, 3/6 3VT9 363-6DT00 ............................................ 3/4 3VT9 512-6AC00 ........................................... 5/4
6/18 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
Order number index

Page
3VT9 512-6AD00............................................ 5/4

3VT9 512-6AP00 ............................................ 5/4
3VT9 516-6AC00............................................ 5/4
3VT9 516-6AD00............................................ 5/4
3VT9 516-6AP00 ............................................ 5/4
3VT9 516-6DT00 ............................................ 5/4
3VT9 524-4TF30...................................... 4/6, 5/6
3VT9 524-4TG30..................................... 4/6, 5/6
3VT9 532-4TF30...................................... 4/6, 5/6
3VT9 533-4TF30...................................... 4/6, 5/6
3VT9 534-4TF30...................................... 4/6, 5/6
3VT9 563-6AC00............................................ 5/4
3VT9 563-6AD00............................................ 5/4
3VT9 563-6AP00 ............................................ 5/4
Siemens LV 36 · 2011 6/19

© Siemens AG 2011
Appendix
Terms and conditions of sale and delivery

Export regulations
■ Overview
Our obligation to fulfill this agreement is subject to the proviso
By using this catalog you can acquire hardware and software that the fulfillment is not prevented by any impediments arising
products described therein from Siemens AG subject to the fol- out of national and international foreign trade and customs re-
lowing terms. Please note! The scope, the quality and the condi- quirements or any embargos and/or other sanctions.
tions for supplies and services, including software products, by
any Siemens entity/regional having a registered office outside of If you transfer goods (hardware and/ or software and/ or technol-
Germany, shall be subject exclusively to the General Terms and ogy as well as corresponding documentation, regardless of the
Conditions of the respective Siemens entity. The following terms mode of provision) delivered by us or works and services (in-
apply exclusively for orders placed with Siemens AG. cluding all kinds of technical support) performed by us to a third
party worldwide, you shall comply with all applicable national
For customers with a seat or registered office in Germany and international (re-) export control regulations.
The General Terms of Payment as well as the General Conditions If required to conduct export control checks, you, upon request
for the Supply of Products and Services of the Electrical and by us, shall promptly provide us with all information pertaining to
Electronics Industry shall apply. particular end customer, destination and intended use of goods,
For software products, the General License Conditions for Soft- works and services provided by us, as well as any export control
ware Products for Automation and Drives for Customers with a restrictions existing.
Seat or Registered Office in Germany shall apply. The products listed in this catalog / price list may be subject to
European / German and/or US export regulations.
For customers with a seat or registered office outside of
Germany Therefore, any export requiring a license is subject to approval
by the competent authorities.
The General Terms of Payment as well as the General Conditions
for Supplies of Siemens Automation and Drives for Customers According to current provisions, the following export regulations
with a Seat or registered Office outside of Germany shall apply. must be observed with respect to the products featured in this
catalog / price list:
For software products, the General License Conditions for
Software Products for Automation and Drives for Customers
with a Seat or registered Office outside of Germany shall apply. AL Number of the German Export List
General Products marked other than "N" require an export license.
In the case of software products, the export designations of the
All dimensions are in mm. In Germany, according to the German relevant data medium must also be generally adhered to.
law on units in measuring technology, data in inches only apply Goods labeled with an "AL" not equal to "N" are subject to a
to devices for export. European or German export authorization when being
exported out of the EU.
Illustrations are not binding.
ECCN Export Control Classification Number
Insofar as there are no remarks on the corresponding pages, Products marked other than "N" are subject to a re-export
- especially with regard to data, dimensions and weights given - license to specific countries.
these are subject to change without prior notice. In the case of software products, the export designations of the
relevant data medium must also be generally adhered to.
The prices are in € (Euro) ex works, excluding packaging.
Goods labeled with "ECCN" not equal to "N" are subject to a US
The sales tax (value added tax) is not included in the prices. re-export authorization.
It shall be debited separately at the respective rate according to
the applicable legal regulations. Even without a label or with an "AL: N" or "ECCN: N", authoriza-
tion may be required due to the final destination and purpose for
Prices are subject to change without prior notice. We will debit which the goods are to be used.
the prices valid at the time of delivery.
The deciding factors are the AL or ECCN export authorization
Surcharges are added to the price of products that contain indicated on order confirmations, delivery notes and invoices.
6 silver, copper, aluminum, lead and/or gold if the respective basic
official prices for these metals are exceeded. These surcharges Errors excepted and subject to change without prior notice.
will be determined based on the official price and the metal fac-
tor of the respective product.
The surcharge will be calculated on the basis of the official price
on the day prior to receipt of the order or prior to the release
order.
The metal factor determines the official price as of which the
metal surcharges are charged and the calculation method used.
The metal factor, provided it is relevant, is included with the price
information of the respective products.
An exact explanation of the metal factor and the text of the
Comprehensive Terms and Conditions of Sale and Delivery are
available free of charge from your local Siemens business office
under the following Order Nos.:
• 6ZB5310-0KR30-0BA1
(for customers based in Germany)
• 6ZB5310-0KS53-0BA1
(for customers based outside Germany)
or download them from the Internet:
(Germany: Industry Mall Online Help System)
6/20 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

© Siemens AG 2011
Catalogs
Industry Automation, Drive Technologies and Low Voltage Distribution
Further information can be obtained from our branch offices listed
in the appendix or at www.siemens.com/automation/partner
Interactive Catalog on DVD Catalog Motion Control Catalog
for Industry Automation, Drive Technologies and CA 01 SINUMERIK & SIMODRIVE NC 60
Low Voltage Distribution Automation Systems for Machine Tools
SINUMERIK & SINAMICS NC 61
Drive Systems Equipment for Machine Tools
Variable-Speed Drives SINUMERIK 828D BASIC T/BASIC M, NC 82
SINAMICS S120 Combi and 1FK7/1PH8 motors
SINAMICS G110, SINAMICS G120 D 11.1
Standard Inverters SIMOTION, SINAMICS S120 and PM 21
SINAMICS G110D, SINAMICS G120D Motors for Production Machines
Distributed Inverters SINAMICS S110 PM 22
SINAMICS G130 Drive Converter Chassis Units D 11 The Basic Positioning Drive
SINAMICS G150 Drive Converter Cabinet Units
SINAMICS GM150, SINAMICS SM150 D 12 Power Supply and System Cabling
Medium-Voltage Converters
Power supply SITOP KT 10.1
SINAMICS S120 Chassis Format Units and D 21.3
Cabinet Modules System cabling SIMATIC TOP connect KT 10.2
SINAMICS S150 Converter Cabinet Units
SINAMICS DCM Converter Units D 23.1 Process Instrumentation and Analytics
Three-phase Induction Motors D 84.1 Field Instruments for Process Automation FI 01
• H-compact
SIREC Recorders and Accessories MP 20
• H-compact PLUS
SIPART, Controllers and Software MP 31
Asynchronous Motors Standardline D 86.1
Products for Weighing Technology WT 10
Synchronous Motors with Permanent-Magnet D 86.2
Technology, HT-direct Process Analytical Instruments PA 01
DC Motors DA 12 PDF: Process Analytics, PA 11
Components for the System Integration
SIMOREG DC MASTER 6RA70 Digital Chassis DA 21.1
Converters
SIMOREG K 6RA22 Analog Chassis Converters DA 21.2 Safety Integrated
PDF: SIMOREG DC MASTER 6RM70 Digital Converter DA 22 Safety Technology for Factory Automation SI 10
Cabinet Units
SIMOVERT PM Modular Converter Systems DA 45
SIEMOSYN Motors DA 48 SIMATIC HMI/PC-based Automation
MICROMASTER 420/430/440 Inverters DA 51.2 Human Machine Interface Systems/ ST 80/
MICROMASTER 411/COMBIMASTER 411 DA 51.3 PC-based Automation ST PC
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Vector Control DA 65.10
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Motion Control DA 65.11 SIMATIC Industrial Automation Systems
Synchronous and asynchronous servomotors for DA 65.3 Products for Totally Integrated Automation and ST 70
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Micro Automation
SIMODRIVE 611 universal and POSMO DA 65.4 SIMATIC PCS 7 Process Control System ST PCS 7
SIMOTION, SINAMICS S120 and PM 21 Add-ons for the SIMATIC PCS 7 ST PCS 7.1
Motors for Production Machines Process Control System
SINAMICS S110 PM 22 PDF: Migration solutions with the SIMATIC PCS 7 ST PCS 7.2
The Basic Positioning Drive Process Control System
Low-Voltage Three-Phase-Motors
IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors D 81.1 SIMATIC NET
MOTOX Geared Motors D 87.1
Industrial Communication IK PI
Automation Systems for Machine Tools SIMODRIVE NC 60
• Motors
• Converter Systems SIMODRIVE 611/POSMO SIMATIC Sensors
Automation Systems for Machine Tools SINAMICS NC 61 Sensor Technology for Factory Automation FS 10
• Motors Industrial Identification Systems ID 10
• Drive System SINAMICS S120
Drive and Control Components for Hoisting Equipment HE 1
SINVERT Photovoltaics
Mechanical Driving Machines
Inverters and Components for Photovoltaic Installations RE 10
FLENDER Standard Couplings MD 10.1
Low-Voltage Power Distribution and SIRIUS Industrial Controls

Electrical Installation Technology SIRIUS Industrial Controls IC 10
Protection, Switching, Measuring & Monitoring Devices LV 10.1 SIRIUS Industrial Controls IC 90
Switchboards and Distribution Systems LV 10.2 (selected content from catalog IC 10)
GAMMA Building Management Systems ET G1
PDF: DELTA Switches and Socket Outlets ET D1 System Solutions
SICUBE System Cubicles and Cubicle Air-Conditioning LV 50 Applications and Products for Industry are part of the
SIVACON 8PS Busbar Trunking Systems LV 70 interactive catalog CA 01
Download-Center
PDF versions of the catalogs are available on the Internet at:
PDF: These catalogs are only available as pdf files. www.siemens.com/buildingtechnologies/infocenter
© Siemens AG 2011
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Building Technologies Division
Low Voltage Distribution
Postfach 10 09 53
93009 REGENSBURG
GERMANY
Subject to change without prior notice

Order No. E86060-K1836-A101-A5-7600
3P.8303.54.19 / Dispo 18301
KG 0511 10. S 272 En
Printed in Germany
© Siemens AG 2011
The information provided in this catalog contains descriptions or

characteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not
always apply as described or which may change as a result of further
development of the products. An obligation to provide
the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the
terms of contract. Availability and technical specifications are subject
to change without notice.
All product designations may be trademarks or product names
of Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third
parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of
the owners.
Token fee: 5.00 €

3VT - SENTRON - LV36 - Complete - English - 2011 - noPW PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

3VT - SENTRON - LV36 - Complete - English - 2011 - noPW PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

© Siemens AG 2011

3VT Molded Case

Answers for infrastructure.

Related catalogs Contents

Low-Voltage Power Distribution and LV 10.1 ·

Low-Voltage Power Distribution and LV 10.2 ·

3WT Air Circuit Breakers LV 35 3WT Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A

Catalog CA 01 CA 01 All products of automation, drives and installation technology,

Industry Mall All products of automation, drives and installation technology,

Trademarks Technical Support

3VT Molded Case 3VT1

The products and sys-

For further information contact your local 3VT5

Answers for infrastructure

Siemens Industry meets the great challenges of our time

head on. With solutions for technical infrastructure in

industrial and non-residential buildings, residential

buildings and public facilities, Siemens ensures enhanced

comfort and energy efficiency in buildings, as well as the

protection and safety of persons, property and business

processes. As a longstanding and professional partner with

all-round expertise in the industry sector, we offer tailored

solutions that generate sustainable added value for our

Gain a competitive edge -

The right product for every need

Our portfolio comprises switchboards,

Consistent, safe and intelligent

Whether in industrial plants or in buildings: Every technical

system depends on a reliable supply of electric power. Even a

short power failure may have serious consequences. For this

the broadest world-wide, covering everything from switchboards

We will be glad to provide you with extensive support from the

initial information to the operation. Convince yourself of the

possibilities we offer you.

A residual current module (RCD module) disconnects a circuit

Residual current devices and accessories → See page 1/9

Rotary operating mechanisms for operation through side

For lateral operation of 3VT2 molded case circuit breakers up

Rotary operating mechanisms for 3VT2 → See page 2/6

Rotary operating mechanisms for operation through side

For lateral operation of 3VT3 molded case circuit breakers up

Rotary operating mechanisms for 3VT3 → See page 3/6

Our added extra

Build on a sound basis Low-voltage power distribution on the Web

The range of courses extends through low-voltage power distri-

For details of our current range of courses, please visit our

BTLV Zusatzangebot En 11.11.2010

We can help you with all your requirements: contact us if you

Just give us a call:

Tender specification texts

For your support, we offer you a comprehensive range of spe-

You have a catalog in your hands that will serve Ordering

Added value due to additional information

Convinced? We look forward to your visit!

3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Catalog 3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Technical Information 3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 160 A

1/2 Siemens LV 36 · 2011

3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 160 A

■ Selection and ordering data

* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.

3VT1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers up to 160 A